FE FRENIC-Mini User's manual

USER'S MANUAL
Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
Mitsui Sumitomo Bank Ningyo-cho Bldg.,
5-7, Nihonbashi Odemma-cho, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 103-0011, Japan
Phone: +81-3-5847-8011 Fax: +81-3-5847-8172
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan 2005-3 (C05a/I02) CM 10 FIS
MEH446a
FRENIC Mini ユーザーズマニュアルC■M■Y■K■
Compact Inverter
User's Manual
Copyright © 2002-2005 Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric
FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
Preface
This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters including its operating
procedure, operation modes, and selection of peripheral equipment. Carefully read this manual for proper use.
Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and/or related equipment from operating correctly,
shorten their lives, or cause problems.
Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-Mini. Read them in conjunction with
this manual as necessary.
• FRENIC-Mini Instruction Manual
(INR-SI47-0791-E)
• RS485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448)
• Catalog
(MEH441/MEH451)
• Application Guide
(MEH449)
• RS485 Communications Card Installation Manual
(INR-SI47-0773)
• Rail Mounting Base Installation Manual
(INR-SI47-0774)
• Mounting Adapter Installation Manual
(INR-SI47-0775)
• FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual
(INR-SI47-0903-E)
• Remote Keypad Instruction Manual
(INR-SI47-0843-E)
• Built-in Braking Resistor Installation Manual
(INR-SI47-0838)
The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.
Documents related to Fuji inverters
Catalogs
FRENIC5000G11S/P11S
FVR-E11S
FRENIC-Eco
FRENIC5000VG7S
(MEH403/MEH413)
(MEH404/MEH414)
(MEH442)
(MEH405)
User's Manuals and Technical Information
FRENIC5000G11S/P11S & FVR-E11S Technical Information
FRENIC-Eco User's Manual
FRENIC5000VG7S Series User's Manual
i
(MEH406)
(MEH456)
(MEH407)
Safety precautions
Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation, connections (wiring), operation, or
maintenance and inspection. Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with
all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to
dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to
dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries
and/or substantial property damage.
Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences.
These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.
This product is not designed for use in appliances and machinery on which lives depend. Consult your Fuji
Electric representative before considering the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters for equipment and
machinery related to nuclear power control, aerospace uses, medical uses or transportation. When the
product is to be used with any machinery or equipment on which lives depend or with machinery or
equipment which could cause serious loss or damage should this product malfunction or fail, ensure that
appropriate safety devices and/or equipment are installed.
ii
n Precautions for Use
Driving a 400V
general-purpose
motor
When driving a 400V general-purpose motor with an inverter using
extremely long wires, damage to the insulation of the motor may occur. Use
an output circuit filter (OFL) if necessary after checking with the motor
manufacturer. Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters
because of their good insulation.
Torque
characteristics
and temperature
rise
When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose motor, the temperature
of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial
power supply. In the low-speed range, the cooling effect will be weakened,
so decrease the output torque of the motor. If constant torque is required in
the low-speed range, use a Fuji inverter motor or a motor equipped with an
externally powered ventilating fan.
In running
generalpurpose
motors
When an inverter-driven motor is mounted to a machine, resonance may be
caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system.
Vibration
In running
special
motors
Note that operation of a 2-pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause
abnormal vibration.
* The use of a rubber coupling or vibration dampening rubber is
recommended.
* Use the inverter's jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance
frequency zone(s).
Noise
When an inverter is used with a general-purpose motor, the motor noise
level is higher than that with a commercial power supply. To reduce noise,
raise carrier frequency of the inverter. Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also
result in higher noise level.
High-speed
motors
If the set frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high-speed motor,
test-run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for
safe operation.
Explosion-proof
motors
When driving an explosion-proof motor with an inverter, use a combination
of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance.
Submersible
motors and pumps
These motors have a larger rated current than general-purpose motors.
Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the
motor.
These motors differ from general-purpose motors in thermal characteristics.
Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the
electronic thermal overload protection.
Brake motors
For motors equipped with parallel-connected brakes, their braking power
must be supplied from the primary circuit. If the brake power is connected
to the inverter's power output circuit by mistake, the brake will not work.
Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series-connected
brakes.
iii
In running
special
motors
Geared motors
If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-lubricated gearbox or
speed changer/reducer, then continuous motor operation at low speed may
cause poor lubrication. Avoid such operation.
Synchronous
motors
It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type. Contact
your Fuji Electric representative for details.
Single-phase
motors
Single-phase motors are not suitable for inverter-driven variable speed
operation. Use three-phase motors.
* Even a single-phase inverter provides three-phase output, so use a threephase motor.
Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from -10 to +50°C.
Environmental
conditions
Installation
location
Installing an
MCCB or
RCD/ELCB
Installing an MC
in the secondary
circuit
Combination with
peripheral
devices
Installing an MC
in the primary
circuit
Protecting the
motor
The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under
certain operating conditions, so install the inverter on nonflammable
material such as metal.
Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions
specified in Chapter 8, Section 8.5 "Operating Environment and Storage
Environment."
Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residualcurrent-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of the inverter
to protect the wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent
to or lower than the recommended capacity.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is mounted in the inverter's secondary circuit
for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other purpose,
ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before
you turn the MC on or off.
Do not connect a magnet contactor united with a surge killer to the inverter's
secondary circuit.
Do not turn the magnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit on or off
more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result.
If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation, use
FWD/REV signals or the RUN/STOP key.
The electronic thermal overload protection function of the inverter can
protect the motor. The operation level and the motor type (general-purpose
motor, inverter motor) should be set. For high-speed motors or watercooled motors, set a small value for the thermal time constant and protect
the motor.
If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire, a
high-frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance. This
may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the
thermal relay. If this happens, lower the carrier frequency or use the output
circuit filter (OFL).
iv
Combination with
peripheral
devices
Discontinuance of
power-factor
correcting
capacitor
Do not mount power-factor correcting capacitors in the inverter’s primary
circuit. (Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor.) Do not
use power-factor correcting capacitors in the inverter output circuit. An
overcurrent trip will occur, disabling motor operation.
Discontinuance of
surge killer
Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's secondary circuit.
Reducing noise
Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC
directives.
Measures against
surge currents
If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under
a light load, it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open/close
of the phase-advancing capacitor in the power system.
* Connect a DC reactor to the inverter.
Megger test
When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter, use a 500 V megger
and follow the instructions contained in the FRENIC-Mini Instruction
Manual (INR-SI47-0791-E), Chapter 7, Section 7.4 "Insulation Test."
Control circuit
wiring length
When using remote control, limit the wiring length between the inverter and
operator box to 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded cable.
Wiring length
between inverter
and motor
If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor, the inverter will
overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent (high-frequency current flowing
into the stray capacitance) in the wires connected to the phases. Ensure that
the wiring is shorter than 50 m. If this length must be exceeded, lower the
carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter (OFL).
Wiring size
Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or
recommended wire size.
Wiring type
Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with
motors.
Grounding
Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal.
Wiring
Selecting
inverter
capacity
Driving generalpurpose motor
Driving special
motors
Transportation and
storage
Select an inverter according to the applicable motor ratings listed in the
standard specifications table for the inverter.
When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration
is required, select an inverter with a capacity one size greater than the
standard.
Select
an
inverter
that
meets
the
Inverter rated current > Motor rated current
following
condition:
When transporting or storing inverters, follow the procedures and select locations that meet the
environmental conditions listed in Chapter 1, Section 1.3 "Transportation" and Section 1.4
"Storage Environment."
v
How this manual is organized
This manual contains chapters 1 through 9, appendices and glossary.
Part 1 General Information
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC-Mini series, and the recommended
configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.
Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC-Mini series and an overview of terminal blocks,
including a description of the LED display and keys on the keypad.
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation modes
(Running, Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor, monitor running
status, set function code data, display running information required for maintenance, and display alarm data.
Part 2 Driving the Motor
Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS485 communications facility. Refer
to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for details.
Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options
Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Mini's
configuration with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.
Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model
Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES
This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection
procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It
also helps you select braking resistors.
vi
Part 5 Specifications
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, and terminal functions for the
FRENIC-Mini series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment,
external dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.
Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES
This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC-Mini series
of inverters and details of each function code.
Appendices
App.A
App.B
App.C
App.D
App.E
App.F
App.G
Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special
High Voltage
Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
Inverter Generating Loss
Conversion from SI Units
Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Replacement Information
Glossary
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating to
full efficiency, as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can
result in accidents.
This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or
operations.
&
This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.
vii
CONTENTS
Part 1 General Information
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
1.1
1.2
1.3
Features..................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Control System ......................................................................................................................................... 1-8
Recommended Configuration ................................................................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
2.1
2.2
External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks.................................................................................... 2-1
LED Monitor, Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad ............................................................................ 2-2
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
3.1
Overview of Operation Modes.................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2
Running Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Run/stop the motor.............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Set up the set frequency and others ..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.3 Monitor the running status .................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.4 Jog (inch) the motor ............................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.3
Programming Mode .................................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.1 Setting the function codes--"Data Setting".......................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.2 Checking changed function codes--"Data Checking" ....................................................................... 3-13
3.3.3 Monitoring the running status--"Drive Monitoring" ......................................................................... 3-14
3.3.4 Checking I/O signal status--"I/O Checking" ..................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.5 Reading maintenance information--"Maintenance Information" ...................................................... 3-21
3.3.6 Reading alarm information--"Alarm Information"............................................................................ 3-22
3.4
Alarm Mode............................................................................................................................................ 3-26
3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and transferring the inverter to Running mode ................................................. 3-26
3.4.2 Displaying the alarm history ............................................................................................................. 3-26
3.4.3 Displaying the running information when an alarm occurs .............................................................. 3-27
3.4.4 Transferring to Programming mode .................................................................................................. 3-27
Part 2 Driving the Motor
Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings....................................................................... 4-1
Drive Frequency Command Generator ..................................................................................................... 4-2
Drive Command Generator....................................................................................................................... 4-4
Terminal Command Decoders .................................................................................................................. 4-6
Digital Output Selector ........................................................................................................................... 4-10
Analog Output (FMA) Selector .............................................................................................................. 4-12
Drive Command Controller .................................................................................................................... 4-14
PID Frequency Command Generator...................................................................................................... 4-16
viii
Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
5.1
Overview on RS485 Communication ....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Common specifications ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Connector specifications ..................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Connection .......................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options
Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
6.1
Configuring the FRENIC-Mini................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2
Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Recommended wires ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Crimp terminals................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3
Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4
Selecting Options.................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options............................................................................................................ 6-13
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications ...................................................................................... 6-22
6.4.3 Extended installation kit options ....................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.4 Meter options .................................................................................................................................... 6-28
Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model
Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES
7.1
Selecting Motors and Inverters ................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Equations for selections ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................................ 7-7
7.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation........................................................................... 7-8
7.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor ............................................................................... 7-11
7.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor .................................................................................. 7-12
7.2
Selecting a Braking Resistor................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.1 Selection procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.2 Notes on selection ............................................................................................................................. 7-13
ix
Part 5 Specifications
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
8.1
Standard Models ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 Single-phase 200 V series ................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2
Models Available on Order ....................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 EMC filter built-in type....................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-5
8.2.1.3 Single-phase 200 V series ........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2 Braking resistor built-in type............................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.2.1 Three-phase 200 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-7
8.2.2.2 Three-phase 400 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-8
8.3
Common Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.4
Terminal Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.4.1 Terminal functions ............................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.4.2 Terminal block arrangement.............................................................................................................. 8-23
8.4.3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications.................................................................. 8-24
8.4.3.1 Main circuit terminals ............................................................................................................... 8-24
8.4.3.2 Control circuit terminal ............................................................................................................. 8-25
8.5
Operating Environment and Storage Environment ................................................................................. 8-26
8.5.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.5.2 Storage environment ......................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.5.2.1 Temporary storage..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.5.2.2 Long-term storage ..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.6
External Dimensions............................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.6.1 Standard models and models available on order (braking resistor built-in type) .............................. 8-28
8.6.2 Models available on order (EMC filter built-in type)........................................................................ 8-30
8.7
Connection Diagrams ............................................................................................................................. 8-32
8.7.1 Keypad operation .............................................................................................................................. 8-32
8.7.2 Operation by external signal inputs................................................................................................... 8-33
8.8
Details of Protective Functions ............................................................................................................... 8-34
Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES
9.1
Function Code Tables ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2
Details of Function Codes....................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ...................................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)............................................................................................. 9-33
9.2.3 C codes (Control functions of frequency) ......................................................................................... 9-46
9.2.4 P codes (Motor parameters) .............................................................................................................. 9-49
9.2.5 H codes (High performance functions) ............................................................................................. 9-51
9.2.6 J codes (Application functions)......................................................................................................... 9-64
9.2.7 y codes (Link functions).................................................................................................................... 9-70
x
Appendices
App.A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ................................................................... A-1
A.1
Effect of inverters on other devices.................................................................................................... A-1
A.2
Noise .................................................................................................................................................. A-2
A.3
Noise prevention ................................................................................................................................ A-4
App.B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or
Special High Voltage ........................................................................................................................... A-12
B.1
Application to general-purpose inverters ......................................................................................... A-12
B.2
Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or
special high voltage.......................................................................................................................... A-13
App.C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters.......................... A-17
C.1
Generating mechanism of surge voltages......................................................................................... A-17
C.2
Effect of surge voltages.................................................................................................................... A-18
C.3
Countermeasures against surge voltages .......................................................................................... A-18
C.4
Regarding existing equipment.......................................................................................................... A-19
App.D Inverter Generating Loss ..................................................................................................................... A-20
App.E Conversion from SI Units.................................................................................................................... A-21
App.F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires ................................................................................................. A-23
App.G Replacement Information .................................................................................................................... A-25
G.1
External dimensions comparison tables ........................................................................................... A-25
G.2
Terminal arrangements and symbols ................................................................................................ A-29
G.3
Function codes ................................................................................................................................. A-31
Glossary
xi
Part 1 General Information
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC-Mini series, and the recommended
configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.
Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
Features ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Control System............................................................................................................................................ 1-8
Recommended Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1 Features
Chap. 1
1.1 Features
• High starting torque, at 150% or more
Equipped with Fuji's original simplified torque-vector control system and the automatic torque boost
function, these inverters ensure consistent and powerful operation (when automatic torque boost and
slip compensation control are ON and start frequency is set at 5 Hz or more).
Figure 1.1 Torque Characteristics Data
(Automatic torque boost: ON)
Figure 1.2 Example of Output Torque Characteristics
• Braking resistor connectable to the inverter
FRENIC-Mini series of inverters features a built-in braking transistor (for inverters of 0.4 kW or
larger), which makes it possible for an optional braking resistor to be connected to increase the
regenerative braking ability for conveyance and transportation machinery that requires strong braking
power. For inverters of 1.5 kW or larger, it is also possible to select a model that incorporates a built-in
braking resistor.
& Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.2.2 "Braking resistor built-in type" for details.
• Trip-free operation
The remarkably improved current limiting function (stall prevention) ensures trip-free operation even
for impact loads.
Figure 1.3 Example of Response for Impact Load Torque
• Stable operation even for a step load
The slip compensation function ensures stable operation even when the motor load fluctuates (step
load).
Figure 1.4 Example of Response for Step Load Torque (Refer to the note in Figure 1.2 for the test configuration.)
1-1
INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
Optimum performance for traversing conveyors
• Reduced motor instability at low speed
Fuji's unique control method improves voltage control performance and reduces motor instability at
low speed to about a half or under (at 1 Hz) compared with that of conventional inverters.
& Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.7 "Drive Command Controller" for details.
Figure 1.5 Example of Instability Characteristics
Default functions for fans and pumps
• Automatic energy-saving function provided as standard
To minimize the total loss (motor loss plus inverter loss), rather than just the motor loss as in the
predecessor models, FRENIC-Mini saves even more power when used with fans or pumps.
& Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.7 "Drive Command Controller" for details.
* Energy savings vary depending on the motor characteristics.
Figure 1.6 Example of Energy Savings
• PID control function
Permits motor operation while controlling temperature, pressure, or flow rate without using an
external device such as a temperature regulator.
& Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.8 "PID Frequency Command Generator" for details.
• Cooling fan ON/OFF control function
The inverter's cooling fan can be turned off while the fan or pump is stopped for noise reduction and
energy savings.
The ideal functions to serve a multiplicity of needs for small-capacity inverters
• Compatible with a wide range of frequency settings
You can select the optimum frequency setting method that matches your machine or equipment via the
keys or potentiometer), analog input (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V),
keypad ( /
multistep speed settings (0 to 7 steps) or via RS485 communications. (Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2
"Drive Frequency Command Generator" and Chapter 9, Section 9.2.1 "F codes" for details.)
1-2
1.1 Features
• High output frequency - up to 400 Hz
The inverter can be used with equipment such as centrifugal separators that require a high motor speed.
In this case, you need to check whether the machine operation in combination with the motor is
compatible or not.
• Two points can be set for a non-linear V/f pattern.
The addition of an extra point (total: 2 points) for the non-linear V/f pattern, which can be set as
desired, improves the FRENIC-Mini's drive capability, because the V/f pattern can be adjusted to
match a wider application area.
& Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.7 "Drive Command Controller" for details.
Compact size
• Side-by-side mounting
More than one FRENIC-Mini inverter can be mounted side-by-side without any gap inside your
system control panel, thereby reducing the amount of space required for installation. (Ambient
temperature: 40°C or lower)
(Example: Inverters of 3-phase 200 V, 0.75 kW or less)
• External dimensions compatible with Fuji FVR-C11S series
1-3
INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
This enables an overload early warning, lifetime forecast or other information signals to be output
during operation.
& Refer to function code E20 in Chapter 9, Section 9.2.2 "E codes (Extension terminal functions)."
Chap. 1
• A transistor output is provided
• RS485 communications card (option) can be installed internally
This card can be installed inside the inverter's body without changing the dimensions. RS485
communication is available as option.
& Refer to Chapter 5, "RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)."
RS485 communications
card (option)
(Example: Inverters of 3-phase 200 V, 0.75 kW or less)
• Models with built-in braking resistor are available on order
Inverters of 1.5 kW or over are available in a braking resistor built-in type. Requiring no installation or
wiring of an external braking resistor reduces the total mounting space.
& Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.2.2 "Braking resistor built-in type."
(Example: Inverters of 3-phase 200V, 1.5 kW)
Simplified operation and wiring
• Frequency setting potentiometer is standard equipment
The frequency can be adjusted easily by hand.
1-4
1.1 Features
Chap. 1
• Easy-to-remove/replace terminal block covers (for control circuit and main circuit)
INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
• LED monitor on the keypad displaying all types of data
You can access and monitor all types of inverter's data and information including output frequency, set
frequency, load shaft speed, output current, output voltage, alarm history, input power etc. using
built-in keypad with LED.
& Refer to Chapter 3, "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."
• Menu mode accessible from the keypad
You can easily access the menu mode including "Data setting," "Data checking," "Drive monitoring,"
"I/O checking," "Maintenance information," and "Alarm information."
& Refer to Chapter 3, "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."
1-5
Maintenance
FRENIC-Mini series features the following facilities useful for maintenance.
& Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.5 "Reading Maintenance Information" and the FRENIC-Mini
Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0791-E), Chapter 7 "MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION" for
details.
• The lifetime of the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir capacitor) can be estimated
The capacitor's condition compared with its initial state can be confirmed.
• Long-life cooling fan
Use of a long-life cooling fan (estimated service life: 7 years for operation at an ambient temperature
of 40°C) reduces maintenance cost.
• Recording and display of cumulative running time of the inverter
The inverter records and displays the accumulated running time of the inverter itself, the printed
circuit board and cooling fan.
• Alarm history for up to 4 latest alarms
The inverter records detailed information for up to 4 alarms that occurred most recently, which can
also be displayed on the LED.
& Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.6 "Reading alarm information."
• Lifetime forecast signal via transistor output
This signal is output when the reservoir capacitor in the DC link bus, the electrolytic capacitors on the
printed circuit board, or the cooling fans have been nearing the end of their service life.
& Refer to function code E20 in Chapter 9, Section 9.2.2 "E codes (Extension terminal functions)"
for details.
Interface for peripheral devices and comprehensive protective functions
• All models are equipped with an inrush current suppression circuit.
FRENIC-Mini series features an inrush current suppression circuit as standard in all models to reduce
the cost of peripheral devices such as input magnetic contactor.
• Terminals for a DC reactor (DCR) provided as standard
Terminals for connection of a DCR, which are necessary for suppressing harmonics, are provided as
standard in all models.
• Input/output phase loss protective function
FRENIC-Mini series can detect output phase loss at all times during starting and running. This feature
assists you for keeping operation of your system stable.
• Switchable sink/source
The input/output mode (sink/source) of the digital input terminals can be switched by means of an
internal jumper switch. No engineering change is required in other control devices including PLC.
• Motor can be protected by a PTC thermistor
The motor is protected by PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor which detects the
motor's temperature and stops the inverter before the motor is overheated.
1-6
1.1 Features
Chap. 1
Flexible through optionals
• Function code copy function
• Inverter support loader software available
The inverter support loader program (Windows-based), which simplifies the setting of function codes,
is provided as an option.
& Refer to Chapter 5, "RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)" for
details.
• Mounting on DIN rail
Using the rail-mounting base (option), the inverter can easily be mounted on a DIN rail (35 mm wide).
& Refer to Chapter 6, "SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT" for details.
• Easy replacement of older models with new ones
Using the mounting adapter (option) makes it possible to mount the latest models without drilling any
additional holes.
& Refer to Chapter 6, "SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT" for details.
• Remote operation
Using the optional RS485 communications card and remote keypad together with remote operation
extension cable enables you to easily operate the inverter from a remote location, such as outside the
control panel where the inverter is installed.
& Refer to Chapter 5, "RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)" and
Chapter 6, "SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT" for details.
Wide variations
The wide range of models available in the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters is certain to flexibly meet
your various system needs.
• The 400 V series is available in addition to the 200 V series (3-phase, single-phase).
• Models with built-in EMC filter and built-in braking resistors are also available.
• An optional RS485 communications card enables your system to feature network driven
management.
& Refer to Chapter 8, "SPECIFICATIONS" for details.
Global products
FRENIC-Mini series of inverters are designed for use in global market in conformity with the global
standards listed below.
• All standard models conform to the EC Directive (CE Marking), UL standards (UL-Listed)
and Canadian standards (cUL-Listed).
All standard FRENIC-Mini inverters conform to European and North American/Canadian standards,
enabling standardization of the specifications for machines and equipment used at home and abroad.
• If a model with a built-in EMC filter is used, the model conforms to the European EMC
Directive.
1-7
INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
The optional remote keypad includes a built-in copy facility, so you can copy function code data set in
a source inverter and duplicate it into a destination inverter.
1.2 Control System
This section gives you a general overview of inverter control systems and features specific to the
FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
As shown in Figure 1.8, single- or three-phase commercial power is converted to DC power in the
converter section, which is then used to charge the capacitor on the DC link bus. According to control
commands or signals generated in the control logic, the inverter modulates the electricity charged in
the capacitor to PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) format and feeds the output to the motor. The
modulation frequency is called "carrier frequency." As shown in Figure 1.7, the voltage waveform of
the modulated power source produces pulse train with positive and negative polarity synchronized
with the inverter's output command frequency. The inverter feeds the produced output as drive power
with sinusoidal current waveform like that of ordinary commercial power lines.
PWM voltage waveform
Current waveform
Figure 1.7 Output Voltage and Current Waveform of the Inverter
For the set frequency given in the control logic, the accelerator/decelerator processor calculates the
acceleration/deceleration rate required by run/stop control of the motor and transfers the calculated
results to the 3-phase voltage command processor directly or via the V/f pattern generator.
& Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.7 "Drive Command Controller" for details.
The FRENIC-Mini series features a simplified magnetic flux estimator which is added in the V/f
pattern processing section. This feature automatically controls the voltage level applied to the motor
according to the motor load so as to make the motor generate more stable and higher torque even
during low speed operation. This "Simplified Torque-Vector Control" is unique to Fuji inverters.
The control logic section, which is the very brain of the inverter, allows you to customize the inverter's
driving patterns using the function code settings.
& Refer to Chapter 4 "BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC" for details.
Figure 1.8 Simplified Control System Diagram of FRENIC-Mini
1-8
1.3 Recommended Configuration
After selecting the rated capacity, select appropriate peripheral equipment for the inverter, then
connect them to the inverter.
& Refer to Chapter 6, "SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT" and Chapter 8, Section 8.7
"Connection Diagrams" for details on the selection and connection of peripheral equipment.
Figure 1.9 shows the recommended configuration for an inverter and peripheral equipment.
Figure 1.9 Recommended Configuration Diagram
1-9
INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Mini
To control a motor with an inverter correctly, you should consider the rated capacity of both the motor
and the inverter and ensure that the combination matches the specifications of the machine or system
to be used. Refer to Chapter 7, "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES"
for details.
Chap. 1
1.3 Recommended Configuration
Chapter 2
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC-Mini series and an overview of terminal blocks,
including a description of the 7-segment LED monitor and keys on the keypad.
Contents
2.1
2.2
External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks ...................................................................................... 2-1
LED Monitor, Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad............................................................................... 2-2
2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks
2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks
(1) External and bottom views
Control circuit terminal
block cover
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Keypad
Nameplate
Main circuit terminal
block cover
Control circuit terminal
bock cover
Figure 2.1 External Views of FRENIC-Mini
Barrier for the RS485
communications port*
Control circuit wire port
DB, P1, P (+) and N (-) cable port
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, U, V, W,
grounding wire port
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, P1, P (+),
N(-) wire port
DB, U, V, W,
grounding wire
port
Heat sink
Cooling fan
(a) FRN0.75C1S-2o
(b) FRN1.5C1S-2o
(*When connecting the RS485 communications cable, remove the control circuit terminal block cover and snip off the barrier
provided in it using nippers.)
Note: A box (o) in model names replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
Figure 2.2 Bottom View of FRENIC-Mini
(2) Allocation of terminals
SINK/SOURCE jumper switch
RS485 communications card
connector
Control circuit terminal
block
DC reactor, braking resistor and
DC link bus terminal block
Grounding terminal
Grounding terminal
Power input terminal block
Inverter output terminal block
(FRN1.5C1S-2o)
Figure 2.3 Enlarged View of the Terminal Blocks
The above figures show three-phase power source models. The terminal allocation of the power input
terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, and grounding terminals for single-phase models differs from that shown
in above figures.
& Refer to Chapter 8 "SPECIFICATIONS" for details on terminal functions, allocation and
connection and to Chapter 6, Section 6.2.1 "Recommended wires" when selecting wires.
For
& details on the keys and their functions, refer to Section 2.2 "LED Monitor, Potentiometer and
Keys on the Keypad." For details on keying operation and function code setting, refer to Chapter
3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."
2-1
Chap. 2
Figures 2.1 and 2.2 show the external and bottom views of the FRENIC-Mini.
2.2 LED Monitor, Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad
As shown at the right, the keypad
consists of a 7-segment LED monitor,
a potentiometer (POT), and six keys.
The keypad allows you to run and stop
the motor, monitor running status, and
switch to the menu mode. In the menu
mode, you can set the function code
data to match your operating
requirements and monitor I/O signal
states, maintenance information, and
alarm information.
Program/Reset key
7-segment
LED monitor
Function/Data key
Down key
RUN key
Up key
Potentiometer
STOP key
Figure 2.4 Keypad
Table 2.1 Overview of Keypad Functions
Monitor, Potentiometer
and Keys
Functions
Four-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the running status, data
settings, and alarm status of the inverter according to the operation modes*.
In Running mode, the monitor displays running status information (e.g.,
output frequency, current, and voltage). In Programming mode, it displays
menus, function codes and their data. In Alarm mode, it displays an alarm
code which identifies the error factor if the protective function is activated.
Potentiometer (POT) which is used to manually set frequency, auxiliary
frequencies 1 and 2 or PID process command.
RUN key. Press this key to run the motor.
STOP key. Press this key to stop the motor.
/
UP/DOWN keys. Press these keys to select the setting items and change the
function data displayed on the LED monitor.
Program/Reset key. Press this key to switch the operation modes* of the
inverter.
Pressing this key in Running mode switches the inverter to Programming
mode and vice versa.
In Alarm mode, pressing this key after removing the error factor will switch
the inverter to Running mode.
Function/Data key.
Pressing this key in Running mode switches the information displayed
(output frequency (Hz), current (Amps) or voltage (V)).
Pressing this key in Programming mode displays the function code and sets
keys or the POT.
/
the data entered using
Pressing this key in Alarm mode displays information concerning the alarm
code currently displayed on the LED monitor.
* FRENIC-Mini features three operation modes--Running, Programming, and Alarm modes. Refer to
Chapter 3, Section 3.1 "Overview of Operation Modes."
2-2
2.2 LED Monitor, Potentiometer and Keys on the Keypad
n LED monitor
If one of LED4 through LED1 is blinking, it means that the cursor is at this digit, allowing you to
change it.
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
Figure 2.5 7-Segment LED Monitor
Table 2.2 Alphanumeric Characters on the LED Monitor
Character
7-segment
Character
7-segment
Character
7-segment
Character
7-segment
0
0
9
9
i
1
1
A
A
J
2
2
b
b
K
3
3
C
C
L
4
4
d
d
M
V
5
5
E
E
n
W
6
6
F
F
o
o
X
7
7
G
G
P
P
y
y
8
8
H
H
q
q
Z
Z
r
J
S
S
T
L
u
U
Special characters and symbols (numbers with decimal point, minus and underline)
0. - 9.
0. – 9.
n Repeat function of
/
-
-
/
_
_
keys
keys have a repeat function which helps you change displayed data speedily as follows:
Usually you press
/
keys once to increase or decrease the displayed value by 1, respectively.
If you hold down either key so as to activate the repeat function, the displayed value will keep
changing in steps of 1 speedily. Note that when changing some function code data during running of
the inverter (not always possible), the displayed data will keep changing more slowly. This is to ensure
safe and stable operation.
2-3
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
If the decimal point of LED1 is blinking, it means that the currently displayed data is a PID process
command, not the frequency data usually displayed.
Chap. 2
In Running mode, the LED monitor displays running status information (output frequency, current or
voltage); in Programming mode, it displays menus, function codes and their data; in Alarm mode, it
displays an alarm code which identifies the error factor if the protective function is activated.
n Continuous holding-down function for Program/Reset
key
Holding down the key longer (approx. one second or longer) moves the cursor on the LED monitor.
In Running mode, the cursor moves along digits; in Programming mode, it moves not only along digits
but to the next function code.
n Simultaneous keying
Simultaneous keying means depressing two keys at the same time (expressed by "+"). FRENIC-Mini
supports simultaneous keying as listed below.
(For example, the expression "
key.)
Operation modes
Running mode
+
keys" stands for pressing the
Simultaneous keying
+
key while holding down the
Used to:
Control entry to/exit from jogging operation.
keys
Change special function code data.
Programming mode
Alarm mode
+
keys
(Refer to codes F00 and H03 in Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES.")
+
keys
Switch to Programming mode.
2-4
Chapter 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation modes
(Running, Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor, monitor running
status, set function code data, display running information required for maintenance, and display alarm data.
Contents
3.1 Overview of Operation Modes.................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Running Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.1 Run/stop the motor.............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Set up the set frequency and others ..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.3 Monitor the running status .................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.4 Jog (inch) the motor ............................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.3 Programming Mode .................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.1 Setting the function codes--"Data Setting".......................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.2 Checking changed function codes--"Data Checking" ....................................................................... 3-13
3.3.3 Monitoring the running status--"Drive Monitoring" ......................................................................... 3-14
3.3.4 Checking I/O signal status--"I/O Checking" ..................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.5 Reading maintenance information--"Maintenance Information" ........................................................... 3-21
3.3.6 Reading alarm information--"Alarm Information"............................................................................ 3-22
3.4 Alarm Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and transferring the inverter to Running mode ................................................. 3-26
3.4.2 Displaying the alarm history ............................................................................................................. 3-26
3.4.3 Displaying the running information when an alarm occurs .............................................................. 3-27
3.4.4 Transferring to Programming mode .................................................................................................. 3-27
3.1 Overview of Operation Modes
3.1 Overview of Operation Modes
FRENIC-Mini features the following three operation modes:
■ Running mode
: This mode allows you to enter run/stop commands in regular operation. You
may also monitor the running status in realtime.
■ Alarm mode
* Alarm code: Shows the error factor that has activated the protective function. For
details, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.8 "Details of Protective Functions."
Figure 3.1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes. If the
inverter is turned ON, it automatically enters Running mode, making it possible to start or stop the
motor.
To make the transition between those operation modes, you need to press the specified keys as shown
below, except at the occurrence of an alarm. If an alarm occurs in Running mode, the inverter will
automatically switch to Alarm mode.
Figure 3.1 Status Transition between Operation Modes
3-1
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
: If an alarm occurs, the inverter automatically enters this Alarm mode in
which the corresponding alarm code* and its related information may be
displayed on the LED monitor.
Chap. 3
■ Programming mode : This mode allows you to set function code data and check a variety of
information relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
The figure below shows the transition between the running status monitoring screens in Running mode,
that between the menu screens in Programming mode, and that between the alarm code screens in
Alarm mode.
*1 The speed monitor may display the output frequency (Hz), set frequency (Hz), load shaft speed (r/min), line
speed (m/min.), and constant feeding rate time (min.) which can be selected by setting up function code E48.
*2 These PID-related information will appear only when the inverter is under the PID control. (Refer to Section
3.2.2.)
*3 This will appear only when timer operation is enabled by setting up function code C21. (Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.2.3 "C codes (Control functions of frequency).")
*4 This will appear only when the remote keypad (option) is set up for use.
Figure 3.2 Basic Screen Transition in Each Operation Mode
3-2
3.2 Running Mode
3.2 Running Mode
If the inverter is turned ON, it automatically enters Running mode in which you may:
By factory default, pressing the
key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing
key brings the motor to a decelerated stop. The
key is enabled only in Running mode.
the
Changing function code F02 data makes it possible to run the motor in the reverse direction by
pressing the
key, determine the motor rotational direction by entering input signals to the terminals,
/
keys.
and control the motor by pressing
3.2.2 Set up the set frequency and others
/
keys on the keypad, you may set up the desired set frequency
By using the potentiometer and
and PID process commands. It is also possible to set up the set frequency as frequency, load shaft
speed, line speed, and constant feeding rate time by setting function code E48.
Setting up the set frequency with the potentiometer on the keypad (factory default)
If you set function code F01 to "4: Potentiometer on the keypad" (factory default) and select frequency
setting-1 with function codes E01 through E03 (Hz2/Hz1 = OFF), then the potentiometer becomes
enabled to set up the set frequency. Setting function code C30 to "4: Potentiometer on the keypad" and
selecting frequency setting-2 (Hz2/Hz1 = ON) also produce the same effect.
Setting up the set frequency with
/
keys
/ keys
If you set function code F01 to "0: Keypad operation" and select frequency setting-1, then
become enabled to set up the set frequency in Running mode. In any other operation modes, those keys
remain disabled.
/
/
keys calls up the set frequency with the lowest digit blinking. Pressing
keys
Pressing
again makes it possible to change the set frequency. The new setting will be saved internally. Even if
the inverter is switched to any other frequency entry method and then returned to the keypad entry
method, the setting will be retained.
Further, even turning OFF the inverter will automatically save the setting into the non-volatile
memory. At the next time when the inverter is turned ON, the setting will become the default
frequency.
/
If you set function code F01 to "0: Keypad operation" but do not select frequency setting-1, then
keys cannot be used for setting up the set frequency. Pressing those keys will just display the
currently selected set frequency.
To set up the set frequency from any other displayed items, it is dependent on function code E48 data
(= 4, 5, or 6) "LED monitor details (Select speed monitor)" as listed in the following table.
3-3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
3.2.1 Run/stop the motor
Chap. 3
(1) Run/stop the motor
(2) Set up the set frequency and others
(3) Monitor the running status (e.g., output frequency, output current)
(4) Jog (inch) the motor
E48 data "LED monitor details
(Select speed monitor)"
Set frequency display
Conversion of displayed value
0: Output frequency (before slip
compensation)
Frequency setting
1: Output frequency (after slip
compensation)
Frequency setting
2: Set frequency
Frequency setting
4: Load shaft speed
Load shaft speed setting
Frequency setting x E50
5: Line speed
Line speed setting
Frequency setting x E50
6: Constant feeding rate time
Constant feeding rate
time
E50
Frequency setting ´ E39
If you set function code C30 to "0: Keypad operation" and select frequency setting-2, then
/
keys become also enabled to set up the set frequency.
n Make setting under PID control
To enable PID control, you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2.
/
keys are different from those
In the PID control mode, the items that can be set or checked with
under normal frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If the LED monitor
is set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), you may access manual feed commands (Set frequency) with
/
keys; if it is set to any other, you may access PID process commands with those keys.
& Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.8 "PID Frequency Command Generator" for details on the PID
control.
Setting the PID process command with the built-in potentiometer
Set function code E60 to "3: PID process command 1" and J02 to "1: PID process command 1." After
that, selecting PID control remote process command enables you to set the PID process command
using the built-in potentiometer.
Setting the PID process command with
/
keys
Set function code J02 to "0: Keypad operation" and set the LED monitor to the setting other than the
speed monitor (E43 = 0) in Running mode. This makes it possible to set the PID process command
/
keys. This setting is possible only in Running mode.
using
keys displays the PID process command with the lowest digit blinking on the LED
/
Pressing
/
keys again makes it possible to change the PID process command. Once the
monitor. Pressing
PID process command is modified, it will be saved internally. Even if the inverter is switched to any
other PID process command entry method and then returned to the keypad entry method, the setting
will be retained.
Further, even turning OFF the inverter will automatically save the setting into the non-volatile
memory. At the next time when the inverter is turned ON, the setting will become the default PID
process command.
Even if the PID process command is selected ((SS4) = ON) in the multistep frequency, it is still
possible to set the process command using the keypad.
When function code J02 has been set to any value except 0, pressing
process command currently selected (setting is not possible).
/
keys displays the PID
When the PID process command is displayed, the decimal point next to the lowest digit on the LED
display blinks to discriminate it from the frequency setting.
3-4
3.2 Running Mode
Setting up the set frequency with
/
To set the set frequency with
conditions:
keys under the PID control, you need to specify the following
/
keys under the PID control
- Set function code F01 to "0: Keypad operation."
- Set the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode.
The above setting is impossible in any operation mode except Running mode.
If you press
appear:
/
keys in any conditions other than those described above, the following will
Frequency
setting 1 (F01)
Frequency setting
from
communications
link
0
Disabled
Multistep
frequency
setting
PID control
cancelled
Disabled
PID enabled
Cancelled
Displayed using
/
keys
Frequency setting by keypad
PID enabled
PID output (as final frequency
command)
Cancelled
Manual speed command
currently selected (frequency
setting)
Other than the above
• When setting the frequency and others with
/
keys, the lowest digit on the display
will blink. Change the setting, starting from the lowest digit and the cursor will move
gradually to the next digit to be changed.
• When the data is to be changed rapidly, hold down the
key for 1 second or longer, and
the blinking cursor will move to the next digit where the data can be changed (cursor
movement).
3.2.3 Monitor the running status
In Running mode, the seven items listed below can be monitored. Immediately after the inverter is
key to switch
turned ON, the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed. Press the
between monitor items.
Table 3.1 Monitor Items
Monitor Items
Display Sample on
the LED monitor
Meaning of Displayed Value
Speed monitor
(Hz, r/min, m/min, min)
50.00
Refer to Table 3.2.
Output current (A)
1.90A
Detected value
Input power (kW)
0.40P
P: An alternative expression for kW
Output voltage (V)
200U
Commanded value
PID process command
10.00
PID feedback value (Note)
9.00
(Note)
Timer (sec) (Note)
(PID process command or PID feedback value) ´
(PID display coefficient A – B) + B
PID display coefficient A and B: Refer to function
codes E40 and E41
6
Remaining effective timer count
Note: The PID process command and PID feedback value are displayed only under the PID control using a process
command (J01 = 1 or 2). Further, the timer (for timer operation) is only displayed when timer is enabled (C21 = 1).
3-5
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
The setting procedure is the same as that for usual frequency setting.
Chap. 3
- Select frequency setting-1 (Frequency settings from communications link: Disabled, and Multistep
frequency settings: Disabled) as manual speed command.
Figure 3.3 shows the procedure example for selecting the desired monitor item.
*1 The speed monitor may display the output frequency (Hz), set frequency (Hz), load shaft speed (r/min), line
speed (m/min.), and contrast feeding rate time (min.) which can be selected by setting up function code E48.
*2 These PID-related information will appear only when the inverter is under the PID control. (Refer to Section
3.2.2.)
*3 This will appear only when timer operation is enabled by setting up function code C21. (Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.2.3 "C codes (Control functions of frequency).")
Figure 3.3 Monitor Item Selection Example
Table 3.2 lists the display items for the speed monitor that can be chosen with function code E48.
Table 3.2 Display Items on the Speed Monitor
Speed monitor items
Function code E48 data
Output frequency (before
slip compensation) (Hz)
(Factory default)
0
Pre-slip compensation frequency
Output frequency (after slip
compensation) (Hz)
1
Frequency actually being outputted
Set frequency (Hz)
2
Final set frequency
Load shaft speed (r/min)
4
Display value = Output frequency (Hz) x E50*
Line speed (m/min)
5
Display value = Output frequency (Hz) x E50*
Constant feeding rate time
(min)
6
*
Meaning of Displayed Value
Display value =
E50
*
Output frequency ´ E39
Output frequencies contained in these formulas are output frequencies before slip compensation.
3-6
3.2 Running Mode
3.2.4 Jog (inch) the motor
In Running mode, pressing
+
keys at the same time (simultaneous keying) can make the
inverter ready for jogging. The JoG appears on the LED monitor.
+
Using the external input signal command (JOG) also allows the transition between the ready-to-jog
state and usual running state.
functions)" for details.
During jogging, the jogging frequency (C20) and acceleration/deceleration time for jogging (H54)
will apply. They are exclusively prepared for jogging and required to be set up individually.
When jogging the motor from the keypad, the inverter will only run while the
key is held down,
key is released, the inverter will decelerate and stop the motor.
and contrarily the moment the
The transition (
+
keys) between the ready-to-jog state and usual running state is
enabled only when the inverter is not in operation.
3-7
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
& Refer to function codes E01 to E03 in Chapter 9, Section 9.2.2 "E codes (Extension terminal
Chap. 3
To return the inverter from the ready-to-jog state to the usual running state, you need to press
keys simultaneously.
3.3 Programming Mode
Pressing the
key in Running mode switches the inverter to Programming mode. This mode
provides the following functions which can be easily selected with the menu-driven system.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Data setting
Data checking
Drive monitoring
I/O checking
Maintenance information
Alarm information
Data copying
(Menu #1)
(Menu #2)
(Menu #3)
(Menu #4)
(Menu #5)
(Menu #6)
(Menu #7)
The table below lists the menus, letters that will appear on the LED monitor, and functions. The
leftmost digit (numerals) of each letter string indicates the corresponding menu number and the
remaining three digits indicate the menu contents.
When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on, the menu that was selected last
in Programming mode will be displayed.
Table 3.3 Menus Available in Programming Mode
Menu
Menu #1
"Data setting"
Menu #2
"Data checking"
LED monitor
shows:
Main functions
Refer to:
1.F_ _
F codes (Fundamental functions)
1.E_ _
E codes
(Extension terminal functions)
1.C_ _
C codes
(Control functions of frequency)
1.P_ _
P codes (Motor parameters)
1.H_ _
H codes
(High performance functions)
1.J_ _
J codes (Application functions)
1.y_ _
y codes (Link functions)
2. EP
Displays only function codes that have been
Section
changed from their factory defaults. You may refer
3.3.2
to or change those function codes data.
Selecting
each of these
function
codes enables
its data to be
displayed/
changed.
Menu #3
"Drive
monitoring"
3.oPE
Menu #4
"I/O checking"
4. _o
Menu #5
"Maintenance
information"
5.CHE
Menu #6
"Alarm
information"
6.AL
Displays the latest four alarm codes. You may refer
Section
to the running information at the time when the
3.3.6
alarm occurred.
7.CPy
Allows you to read or write function code data, as
well as verifying it.
NOTE: To use this function, a remote keypad
(option) is necessary.
Menu #7
"Data copying"
Displays the running information required for
maintenance or test running.
Section
3.3.1
Displays external I/O signal information.
Displays maintenance information including
cumulative running time.
3-8
Section
3.3.3
Section
3.3.4
Section
3.3.5
3.3 Programming Mode
Limiting menus to be displayed
The menu-driven system has a limiter function (specified by function code E52) that limits menus to
be displayed for the purpose of simple operation. The factory default is to display Menu #1 "Data
setting" only, allowing no switching to any other menu.
Function Code E52 – Keypad (Mode Selection)
Menus selectable
Menu #1 "Data setting" (factory default)
1: Function code data check mode
Menu #2 "Data checking"
2: Full-menu mode
Menu #1 through #6 (#7*)
* Menu #7 appears only when the remote keypad (option) is set up for use.
If the full-menu mode is selected, pressing the
/
keys will cycle through menus. With
key, you may select the desired menu. Once all of the menus have been cycled
the
through, the display will return to the first menu.
3.3.1 Setting the function codes--"Data Setting"
Menu #1 "Data setting" in Programming mode allows you to set function codes for making the
inverter functions match your needs.
The table below lists the function codes available in the FRENIC-Mini. The function codes are
displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad as shown below.
ID number in each function code group
Function code group
Table 3.4 List of FRENIC-Mini Function Codes
Function code group
Function code
Function
Description
F codes
(Fundamental functions)
F00 to F51
Basic functions
To be used for basic motor running.
E codes
(Extension terminal
functions)
E01 to E99
Terminal
functions
To be used to select the functions of
the control circuit terminals.
To be used to set functions related to
the LED monitor display.
C codes
(Control functions of
frequency)
C01 to C52
Control functions
To be used to set application
functions related to frequency
settings.
P codes
(Motor parameters)
P02 to P99
Motor parameters
To be used to set specific parameters
for the motor capacity, etc.
H codes
(High performance
functions)
H03 to H98
High level
functions
To be used for high added value
functions and complicated control,
etc.
J codes
(Application functions)
J01 to J06
Application
functions
To be used for PID control.
y codes
(Link functions)
y01 to y99
Link functions
To be used for communications.
& Refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details on the function codes.
3-9
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
0: Function code data setting mode
Chap. 3
Function code data (E52)
Function codes that require simultaneous keying
To change data for function codes F00 (Data Protection) and H03 (Data Initialization), simultaneous
keying operation is necessary-- +
keys or
+
keys. This prevents data from being lost by
mistake.
Changing, validating, and saving of function code data during running
Some function code data can be changed while the motor is running and some cannot. Further,
amongst the function codes whose data can be changed while the motor is running, there are some for
which the changes can be validated immediately and others for which they cannot. Refer to the
"Change when running" column in Chapter 9, Section 9.1 "Function Code Tables."
3-10
3.3 Programming Mode
Figure 3.4 shows the status transition for Menu #1 "Data setting" and Figure 3.5 shows an example of
the function code data changing procedure.
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.4 Status Transition Diagram for "Data Setting"
3-11
Figure 3.5 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure
Basic key operation
This section will give a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the function
code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3.5.
This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default of
keys operation (F01 = 0)."
"Potentiometer operation on the keypad (F01 = 4)" to " /
(1) With the menu displayed, use
example, select 1.F_ _).
/
keys to select the desired function code group. (In this
key to display the function codes in the function code group selected in (1). (In this
(2) Press the
example, function code F00 will appear.)
Even if the function code list for a particular function code group is displayed, it is possible to
transfer the display to a different function code group using
/
keys.
(3) Select the desired function code using
function code F01.)
/
keys and press the
key. (In this example, select
The data of this function code will appear. (In this example, data 4 of F01 will appear.)
(4) Change the function code data using
to change data from 4 to 0.)
(5) Press the
/
keys. (In this example, press the
key four times
key to establish the function code data.
The SAUE will appear and the data will be saved in the non-volatile memory. The display will
return to the function code list, then move to the next function code. (In this example, F02.)
Pressing the
key before the
key cancels the change made to the data. The data reverts to
the previous value, the display returns to the function code list, and the original function code
reappears.
(6) Press the
key to return to the menu from the function code list.
Cursor movement: You may move the cursor when changing function code data in the same
way as with the frequency settings. Refer to Section 3.2.2 "Set up the set frequency and
others."
3-12
3.3 Programming Mode
3.3.2 Checking changed function codes--"Data Checking"
Menu #2 "Data checking" in Programming mode allows you to check function code data that have
been changed. Only data that has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED
monitor. You may refer to the function code data and change again if necessary. Figure 3.6 shows the
status transition diagram for "Data checking."
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
* Pressing the
key when the E 52 data is displayed will take you back to F 01.
Figure 3.6 Data Checking Status Transition Diagram (Changes made only to F01, F05, E52)
Basic key operation
The basic key operation is the same as for Menu #2 "Data setting."
To monitor Menu #2 "Data checking," it is necessary to set function code E52 data to 1
(Function code data check mode) or 2 (Full-menu mode).
3-13
3.3.3 Monitoring the running status--"Drive Monitoring"
Menu #3 "Drive monitoring" is used to check the running status during maintenance and test running.
The display items for "Drive monitoring" are listed in Table 3.5. Using keys, you may check those
items in succession. Figure 3.7 shows the status transition diagram for "Drive monitoring."
Table 3.5 Drive Monitoring Display Items
LED monitor
shows:
Contents
Unit
Description
3_00
Output
frequency
Hz
Output frequency before slip compensation
3_01
Output
frequency
Hz
Output frequency after slip compensation
3_02
Output
current
A
Present output current
3_03
Output
voltage
V
Present output voltage
3_05
Set frequency
Hz
Present set frequency
3_06
Rotational
direction
N/A
Displays the rotational direction specified by a run
command being outputted.
F: forward; R: reverse, – – – –: stop
3_07
Running
status
N/A
Displays the running status in hex. format. Refer to
"Displaying running status" on the page 3-16.
3_09
Load shaft
speed
(line speed)
r/min
(m/min)
The unit for load shaft speed is r/min and that for line speed
is m/min.
Display value = (Output frequency Hz before slip
compensation) ´ (Function code E50)
is displayed for 10000 (r/min or m/min) or more.
is displayed, the data is overflowing, which
When
means that the function code should be reviewed. For
example:
Load shaft speed = Displayed data ´ 10 (r/min)
3_10
PID process
commands
N/A
These commands are displayed through the use of function
code E40 and E41 (PID display coefficient A and B).
Display value = (PID process command) ´ (PID display
coefficient A - B) + B
If PID control is disabled, "– – – –" appears.
3_11
PID feedback
value
N/A
This value is displayed through the use of function code
E40 and function code E41 (PID display coefficient A and
B).
Display value = (PID feedback value) ´ (PID display
coefficient A - B) + B
If PID control is disabled, "– – – –" appears.
3-14
3.3 Programming Mode
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.7 Drive Monitoring Status Transition
Basic key operation
(1) With the menu displayed, use
/
keys to select "Drive monitoring" (3.oPE).
(2) Press the
key to display the desired code in the monitoring items list (e.g. 3_00).
(3) Use
keys to select the desired monitoring item, then press the
/
key.
The running status information for the selected item will appear.
(4) Press the
menu.
key to return to the monitoring items list. Press the
key again to return to the
If the menu cannot switch to any other one, set function code E52 to 2 (Full-menu mode).
3-15
Displaying running status
To display the running status in hexadecimal format, each state has been assigned to bit 0 to 15 as
listed in Table 3.6. Table 3.7 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the
LED monitor display. Table 3.8 gives the conversion table from 4-bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table 3.6 Running Status Bit Allocation
Bit
Notation
15
14
13
12
BUSY
WR
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
ALM
DEC
ACC
IL
VL
TL
NUV
4
3
2
1
0
BRK
INT
EXT
REV
FWD
Content
1 when function code data is being written.
Always 0.
Always 0.
1 when communications is effective (when run commands and set frequencies
commands are issued via communications).
1 when an alarm has occurred.
1 during deceleration.
1 during acceleration.
1 during current limitation.
1 under voltage control.
Always 0.
1 when DC link bus voltage has increased up to the specified level (0 for
undervoltage).
Always 0.
1 when the inverter output is shut down.
1 during DC braking.
1 during running in the reverse direction.
1 during running in the forward direction.
RL
Table 3.7 Running Status Display
LED No.
LED4
Bit
15
Notation
BUSY
Example
Binary
1
14
13
WR
0
0
LED3
12
11
7
6
RL ALM DEC ACC
IL
VL
TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
0
1
0
0
0
Hexadecimal
on the
LED
monitor
3-16
9
1
5
LED1
8
0
10
LED2
1
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
1
3.3 Programming Mode
Hexadecimal expression
A 16-bit binary number is expressed in hexadecimal format (4 bits). Table 3.8 shows the expression
corresponding to decimals. The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor.
Table 3.8 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion
Hexadecimal Decimal
Binary
Hexadecimal Decimal
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
8
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
9
9
0
0
1
0
2
2
1
0
1
0
A
10
0
0
1
1
3
3
1
0
1
1
b
11
0
1
0
0
4
4
1
1
0
0
C
12
0
1
0
1
5
5
1
1
0
1
d
13
0
1
1
0
6
6
1
1
1
0
E
14
0
1
1
1
7
7
1
1
1
1
F
15
3.3.4 Checking I/O signal status--"I/O Checking"
With Menu #4 "I/O checking," you may display the status of external I/O signals without using a
measuring instrument. External signals that can be displayed include digital I/O signals and analog I/O
signals. Table 3.9 lists check items available. The status transition for I/O checking is shown in Figure
3.8.
Table 3.9 I/O Check Items
LED monitor
shows:
Display contents
Description
4_00
I/O signals on the
control circuit
terminals
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals. Refer to "[1]
Displaying control I/O signal terminals" on page 3-19 for details on
the display contents.
4_01
I/O signals on the
control circuit
terminals under
communication
control
Shows the ON/OFF state for the digital input terminals that received
a command via RS485 communications. Refer to "[1] Displaying
control I/O signal terminals" on page 3-19 and "[2] Displaying
control I/O signal terminals under communication control" on page
3-20 for details on the display contents.
4_02
Input voltage on
terminal [12]
Shows the input voltage on terminal [12] in volts (V).
4_03
Input current on
terminal [C1]
Shows the input current on terminal [C1] in milliamperes (mA).
4_04
Output voltage to
analog meters
[FMA]
Shows the output voltage on terminal [FMA] in volts (V).
3-17
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
0
Chap. 3
Binary
Figure 3.8 Status Transition of I/O Check
Basic key operation
(1) With the menu displayed, use
(2) Press the
(3) Use
/
/
keys to select "I/O check"(4. _o)
key to display the codes for the I/O check item list. (e.g. 4_00)
keys to select the desired I/O check item, then press the
key.
The corresponding I/O check data will appear. For control circuit I/O terminals, use
to select one of the two different display methods.
(4) Press the
key to return to the I/O check item list. Press the
/
keys
key again to return to the menu.
If the menu cannot switch to any other one, set function code E52 to 2 (Full-menu mode).
3-18
3.3 Programming Mode
[ 1 ] Displaying control I/O signal terminals
The I/O signal status of control circuit terminals may be displayed with ON/OFF of the LED segment
or in hexadecimal display.
■ Display I/O signal status with ON/OFF of the LED segment
Table 3.10 Segment Display for External Signal Information
Segment
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
a
[30A/B/C]
[Y1]–[Y1E]
–
[FWD]–[CM] or
[FWD]–[PLC]*2
b
–
–
–
[REV]–[CM]or
[REV]–[PLC]*2
c
–
–
–
[X1]–[CM] or
[X1]–[PLC]*2
d
–
–
–
[X2]–[CM] or
[X2]–[PLC]*2
e
–
–
–
[X3]–[CM] or
[X3]–[PLC]*2
f
–
–
(XF)*1
–
g
–
–
(XR)*1
–
dp
–
–
(RST)*1
–
– : No correlating control circuit terminals
*1
(XF), (XR), and (RST) are reserved for communications. Refer to "[ 2 ] Displaying control
I/O signal terminals under communication control."
*2
Terminal [CM] if the jumper switch is set for a sink; terminal [PLC] if the jumper switch is
set for a source.
3-19
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This LED monitor displays hardware terminal information, which means that it may not
light when it is in reverse logic (refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details), even
when it is active.
Chap. 3
As shown in Table 3.10 and the figure below, segments "a" to "e" on LED1 light when the digital input
terminals ([FWD], [REV], [X1], [X2], and [X3]) are short-circuited (ON) with the terminal [CM] and
do not light when they are opened (OFF). Segment "a" on LED3 lights when the circuit between
output terminal [Y1] and terminal [Y1E] is closed (ON) and does not light when the circuit is open
(OFF). LED4 is for terminals [30A], [30B], [30C]. Segment "a" on LED4 lights when the circuit
between terminals [30C] and [30A] are short-circuited (ON) and does not light when they are opened.
■ Displaying I/O signal status in hexadecimal format
Each I/O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as listed in Table 3.11. An unassigned bit is
interpreted as "0." Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4-digit hexadecimals ("0" to
"F" each).
With the FRENIC-Mini, digital input terminals [FWD] and [REV] are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1,
respectively. Terminals [X1] through [X3] are assigned to bits 2 through 4. The value "1" is set for
each bit when the assigned input terminal is short-circuited (ON) with terminal [CM]. The value "0"
when it opens (OFF). For example, when [FWD] and [X1] are ON and all others are OFF, the display
on LED4 to LED1 would be 0005.
Bit 0 is assigned to digital output terminal [Y1]. The value "1" is set when the terminal is shortcircuited with [Y1E], and the value "0" is set when it opens. The status of the mechanical relay contact
output terminal [30A], [30B] and [30C] are assigned to bit 8. The value "1" is set when the circuit
between output terminals [30A] and [30C] is closed and the value "0" when the circuit between [30B]
and [30C] is closed. For example, if [Y1] is ON and the circuit between [30A] and [30C] are shortcircuited with each other, then the display for LED4 to LED1 would be 0101.
How the hexadecimal display is configured for the terminals to which bits 0 to 15 are assigned and the
7-segment LED is shown below.
Table 3.11 Segment Display for I/O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format
LED No.
15
14
13
LED3
LED2
LED1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
Input terminal (RST)* (XR)* (XF)* -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[X3] [X2] [X1] [REV] [FWD]
Output terminal
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[30A/C]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Y1]
Binary
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Example
Bit
LED4
3
2
1
0
Hexadecimal
on the
LED
monitor
– : No correlating control terminals
* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are reserved for communications. Refer to "[ 2 ] Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
communication control" below.
[ 2 ] Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communication control
There are two control circuit input displays under communications link control – "display with
ON/OFF of the LED segment" and "in hexadecimal format" for input commanded from RS485
communications link. The content is similar to that of the control circuit I/O signal terminal status
display; however, (XF) and (XR) are added as inputs and nothing is assigned as output terminals.
& Refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for details on command inputs
through RS485 communication.
3-20
3.3 Programming Mode
3.3.5
Reading maintenance information--"Maintenance Information"
Menu #5 "Maintenance information" in Programming mode contains information necessary for
performing maintenance on the inverter. Table 3.12 lists the maintenance information display items
and Figure 3.9 shows the status transition for maintenance information.
LED monitor
shows:
Description
5_00
Accumulated run
time
Shows the accumulated power-ON time of the inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours. When the total ON-time is less than 10,000
hours (display: 0.001 to 9.999), it is possible to check data in hourly
units.
When the total time is 10,000 hours or more (display: 10.00 to 65.53),
the display will change to units of 10 hours. When the total time
exceeds 65,535 hours, the display will be reset to 0 and the count will
start again.
5_01
DC link bus
voltage
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter.
Unit: V (volts)
5_03
Max. temperature
of heat sink
Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour.
Unit: ºC
5_04
Max. effective
current
Shows the maximum effective current for every hour.
Unit: A (amperes)
5_05
Capacitance of the
DC link bus
capacitor
Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor, based on
the capacitance when shipped as 100%. Refer to the FRENIC-Mini
Instruction
Manual
(INR-SI47-0791-E),
Chapter
7
"MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION" for details.
Unit: %
5_06
Accumulated run
time of electrolytic
capacitor on the
printed circuit
board/s
Shows the accumulated run time of the capacitor mounted on the
printed circuit board/s.
The display method is the same as for "Accumulated run time" above.
However, when the total time exceeds 65,535 hours, the count stops
and the display remains at 65.53.
5_07
Accumulated run
time of the cooling
fan
Shows the accumulated run time of the cooling fan.
If the cooling fan ON/OFF control (function code H06) is effective,
the time when the fan is stopped is not counted.
The display method is the same as for "Accumulated run time" above.
However, when the total time exceeds 65,535 hours, the count stops
and the display remains at 65.53.
5_08
Number of startups
The motor run times (the number of times the inverter run command
is set to ON) are calculated and displayed.
1.000 indicates 1,000 times. When any number ranging from 0.001 to
9.999 is displayed, the display increases by 0.001 per startup, and
when any number from 10.00 to 65.53 is displayed, the display
increases by 0.01 every 10 startups.
5_11
No. of RS485
errors
Shows the total number of times RS485 communications error has
occurred after the power is turned ON.
Once the number of errors exceeds 9.999, the display (count) returns
to 0.
5_12
RS485 error
contents
Shows the latest error that has occurred with RS485 communications
in hexadecimal format.
Refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448).
5_14
ROM version of
inverter
Shows the ROM version of the inverter as a 4-digit display.
5_16
ROM version of
keypad
Shows the ROM version of the keypad as a 4-digit display. (For
remote keypad only.)
3-21
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Display contents
Chap. 3
Table 3.12 Maintenance Display Items
* The part in the dotted-line box is applicable only when a remote keypad is set up for operation.
Figure 3.9 Status Transition of Maintenance Information
Basic key operations
(1) With the menu displayed, use
/
keys to select "Maintenance information" (5.CHE).
(2) Press the
key to display the list of maintenance item codes (e.g. 5_00).
(3) Use
keys to select the desired maintenance item, then press the
/
key.
The data of the corresponding maintenance item will appear.
(4) Press the
menu.
key to return to the list of maintenance items. Press the
key again to return to the
If the menu cannot switch to any other one, set function code E52 to 2 (Full-menu mode).
3.3.6 Reading alarm information--"Alarm Information"
Menu #6 "Alarm information" in Programming mode shows the cause of the past 4 alarms as alarm
codes. Further, it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter
when the alarm occurred. Table 3.13 shows the contents of the alarm information and Figure 3.10
shows the status transition of the alarm information.
3-22
3.3 Programming Mode
Table 3.13 Alarm Information Contents
LED monitor
shows: (Item No.)
Display contents
Description
Output frequency before slip compensation
6_01
Output current
Present output current
6_02
Output voltage
Present output voltage
6_04
Set frequency
Present set frequency
6_05
Rotational direction
This shows the rotational direction of a run command being
output.
F: forward; R: reverse; – – – –: stop
6_06
Running status
This shows the running status as a hexadecimal display. Refer
to Displaying running status in Section 3.3.3 "Monitoring the
running status."
6_07
Accumulated
running time
Shows the cumulative power-ON time of the inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours. When the total ON time is less than
10,000 hours (display: 0.001 to 9.999), it is possible to check
data in hourly units. When the total time is 10,000 hours or
more (display: 10.00 to 65.53), the display will change to units
of 10 hours. When the total time exceeds 65,535 hours, the
display returns to 0 and the count will start again.
6_08
No. of startups
The motor run times (the number of times the inverter run
command is set to ON) are calculated and displayed.
1.000 indicates 1,000 times. When any number from 0.001 to
9.999 is displayed, the display increases by 0.001 per startup,
and when any number from 10.00 to 65.53 is displayed, the
display increases by 0.01 every 10 startups.
6_09
DC link bus voltage
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter's main circuit.
Unit: V (volts)
6_11
Max. temperature of
heat sink
Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink.
Unit: ºC
6_12
Terminal I/O signal
status (displayed
with the ON/OFF of
LED segments)
6_13
Terminal input signal
status (in
hexadecimal format)
6_14
Terminal output
signal status (in
hexadecimal display)
6_15
No. of consecutive
occurrences
This is the number of times the same alarm has occurred
consecutively.
6_16
Overlapping alarm 1
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (1)
(– – – – is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
6_17
Overlapping alarm 2
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (2)
(– – – – is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
6_18
Terminal I/O signal
status under
communication
control (displayed
with the ON/OFF of
LED segments)
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals under
communication control. Refer to Section 3.3.4 "[2] Displaying
control I/O signal terminals under communication control"
for details.
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals. Refer to
Section 3.3.4 "[1] Displaying control I/O signal terminals" for
details.
3-23
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Output frequency
Chap. 3
6_00
Table 3.13 Continued
LED monitor
shows: (Item No.)
6_19
6_20
Display contents
Terminal input signal
status under
communication
control (in
hexadecimal format)
Terminal output
signal status under
communication
control (in
hexadecimal display)
Description
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals under
communication control. Refer to Section 3.3.4 "[2] Displaying
control I/O signal terminals under communication control"
for details.
When the same alarm occurs a number of times in succession, the alarm information for the
first time is retained and the information for the following alarms is not updated.
3-24
3.3 Programming Mode
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.10 Status Transition of Alarm Information
Basic key operations
(1) With the menu displayed, use
(2) Press the
/
keys to select "Alarm information" (6.AL).
key to display the alarm list code (e.g. 1.0L1).
In the list of alarm codes, the alarm information for the last 4 alarms will be saved as an alarm
history.
(3) Each time
/
keys are pressed, the last four alarms are displayed in order from the most
recent one as "1," "2," "3 " and "4."
(4) Press the
key while the alarm code is displayed, and the corresponding alarm item number
(e.g. 6_00) and data (e.g. Output frequency) will be displayed continuously in turn for 1 second
each. It is possible to display the item number (e.g. 6_01) and data (e.g. Output current) for each
/
keys.
desired alarm using
(5) Press the
key to return to the alarm list. Press the
key again to return to the menu.
If the menu cannot switch to any other one, set function code E52 to 2 (Full-menu mode).
3-25
3.4 Alarm Mode
When the protective function is activated to issue an alarm, the inverter automatically transfers to
Alarm mode and the alarm code will appear in the LED monitor. Figure 3.11 shows the status
transition of Alarm mode.
Figure 3.11 Status Transition of Alarm Mode
3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and transferring the inverter to Running
mode
Remove the cause of the alarm and press the
key to release the alarm and return to Running mode.
The
key is enabled only when the alarm code is displayed.
3.4.2
Displaying the alarm history
It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed.
/
keys while the current alarm code is
Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing
displayed.
3-26
3.4 Alarm Mode
3.4.3 Displaying the running information when an alarm occurs
If an alarm occurs, you may check various running status information (output frequency and output
key when the alarm code is displayed. The item number and data for
current, etc.) by pressing the
each running information is displayed in alternation.
key while the running information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes.
Pressing the
key continuously a number of times while the running information is
displayed after removing the cause of the alarm will cause the inverter to transit to the alarm
code display, and the next alarm to be released. If a run command had been input at this
stage, the motor will start up.
3.4.4 Transferring to Programming mode
Further, it is also possible to transfer the inverter to Programming mode by pressing
+
keys
simultaneously while the alarm is displayed and to then check and adjust the function code data.
3-27
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Pressing the
Chap. 3
Further, you can switch between the various running information using
/
keys. Detailed running
information is the same as for Menu #6 "Alarm information" in Programming mode. Refer to Table
3.13 in Section 3.3.6 "Reading alarm information."
Part 2 Driving the Motor
Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
Chapter 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
Contents
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings ......................................................................... 4-1
Drive Frequency Command Generator ....................................................................................................... 4-2
Drive Command Generator ......................................................................................................................... 4-4
Terminal Command Decoders..................................................................................................................... 4-6
Digital Output Selector ............................................................................................................................. 4-10
Analog Output (FMA) Selector ................................................................................................................ 4-12
Drive Command Controller....................................................................................................................... 4-14
PID Frequency Command Generator........................................................................................................ 4-16
4.1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings
FRENIC-Mini inverters are equipped with a number of function codes to match a variety of motor operations
required in your system. Refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details of the function codes.
The function codes have functional relationship with each other. Several special function codes also work
with execution priority with each other depending upon their data settings.
This chapter contains the main block diagrams for control logic in the inverter and describes the relationship
between the inverter's logic and function codes. It is important to fully understand this relationship and to set
the function code data correctly.
Table 4.1 lists the symbols commonly used in the block diagrams and their meanings with some examples.
Table 4.1 Symbols and Meanings
Symbol
Meaning
[FWD],[Y1]
(etc.)
Input/output signals to/from
the inverter's control
terminal block.
(FWD),(REV)
(etc.)
Control commands assigned
to the control terminal block
input signals.
Symbol
Meaning
Function code.
Switch controlled by a
function code. Numbers
assigned to the terminals
express the function code
data.
Internal control command
for inverter logic.
Switch controlled by an
internal control command. In
the example shown at the
left, the link operation
command (LE) is assigned to
one of the digital input
terminals from [X1] to [X3],
which then controls the
switch.
High limiter: Limits peak
value by a constant or by
data set to the function code.
Low limiter: Limits the
bottom value by a constant
or by data set to the function
code.
Low-pass filter: Features
appropriate characteristics
by changing the time
constant through the
function code data.
Zero limiter: Keeps data
from dropping to a negative
value.
AND logic: In normal logic
systems, only if A = ON and
B = ON, then C = ON.
Otherwise, C = OFF.
Gain multiplier for set
frequencies given by current
and/or voltage input or for
analog output signals.
OR logic: In normal logic
systems, if any inputs are
ON, then C = ON. Only if all
inputs are OFF, then C =
OFF.
C =A´ B
Adder for 2 signals or
values. C = A + B
If B is negative then C = A –
B.
NOT logic: In normal logic
systems, if A = ON, then B =
OFF and vice versa.
4-1
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
4.1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their
Meanings
Chap. 4
The block diagrams contained in the chapter show only function codes having mutual relation. For the
function codes that work stand-alone and for details of individual function codes, refer to Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES."
4.2 Drive Frequency Command Generator
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram for Drive Frequency Command Generator
4-2
4.2 Drive Frequency Command Generator
Figure 4.1 shows the processes that generate the final drive frequency command from the frequency settings
given by various means and those switched/modified by function codes. If PID process control takes effect
(J01=1 or 2), the drive frequency generation will differ from that shown in this diagram. (Refer to Section 4.8
"PID Frequency Command Generator.")
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
/
key on the keypad may take a different format by means of the data
- Frequency settings using the
setting for function code E48. Refer to function code E48 in Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details.
- Settings for both gain and bias will take effect concurrently only for frequency setting 1 (F01). For
frequency setting 2 (C30) and auxiliary frequency settings 1 and 2 (E60 to E62), only the gain will take
effect.
- Switching between normal and inverse operation is only effective for frequency setting from the analog
/
key are
input signal (terminal [12], [C1] or built-in potentiometer). Frequency settings from the
only valid for normal operation.
- The command formats for frequency settings by S01 and S05 for the communications link facility take a
different form, as follows:
-
S01: the setting range is –32768 to +32767, where the maximum output frequency is obtained at
±20000.
-
S05: the setting range is 0.00 to 655.35 Hz in 0.01 Hz step, or 0.1 Hz step for over 600 Hz.
-
Priority level for setting for S01 is higher than that for S05. If a value other than 0 is set for S01,
then the data set to S01 will take effect. If S01 = 0, then the setting for S05 will take effect.
-
Refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for details.
4-3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
- Gain for the built-in potentiometer cannot be changed by any function code or other means.
Chap. 4
- [C1] input as a frequency settings signal will always be interpreted as "0" when the current input signal
terminal [C1] is specified for the thermistor (H26 = 1).
4.3 Drive Command Generator
Figure 4.2 Drive Command Generator
4-4
4.3 Drive Command Generator
The drive command generator shown in Figure 4.2 produces final drive commands (FWD: Drive the motor in
the forward direction) and (REV: Drive the motor in reverse direction) from the run commands that are given
by various means and modified/switched by function codes.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
/
key, the generator holds the command ON upon depression of
- For the run command given by the
the
key and releases it upon depression of the
key except during jogging operation.
- S06 (2-byte data for bit 15 through bit 0 can be manipulated), the operation command by the
communications link, includes:
- Bit 0: assigned to (FWD)
- Bit 1: assigned to (REV)
- Bits 13 and 14: programmable bits equivalent to the terminal inputs [FWD] and [REV]
- In the block diagram, all of these are noted as operation commands. The data setting for function code
E98 to specify the terminal signal property for [FWD] and E99 for [REV] determine which bit value
should be selected as the run command. If bits 13 and 14 have the same setting to specify the property
for (FWD) or (REV), the output of bit 13-14 processor logic will follow the truth table listed in Figure
4.2.
- If either one of bits 13 and 14 is ON (1 as logic value), the OR logic will make the link command (LE)
turn ON.
-
If both run commands (FWD) and (REV) come ON concurrently, the logic forces the internal run
commands <FWD> and <REV> to immediately turn OFF.
-
key priority
If you set 1 or 3 to function code H96 (STOP key priority/Start Check) to make the
key forces the internal run commands <FWD> and <REV> to
effective, then depressing the
immediately turn OFF.
-
If you have enabled operation via the timer, inputting any run command starts the timer. The internal run
command <FWD> or <REV> and hold command (HLD) triggered by keypad will be automatically
turned OFF after the time preset in the timer has elapsed.
-
If the set frequency is lower than the start frequency (F23) or the stop frequency (F25), the internal run
commands will remain OFF.
4-5
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
/
key on the
- Setting 0 (zero) for function code F02 allows you to operate the inverter using the
built-in keypad for the run command, while the (FWD) and (REV) commands determine direction of
motor rotation. The logic shown in the block diagram shows you that if the run command from the
key
and either the (FWD) or (REV) command are given, then the internal run command <FWD> or <REV>
decoded internally by the logic turns ON.
Chap. 4
- The hold command (HLD) holds the run forward/reverse commands (FWD)/(REV) until it is turned OFF.
This allows you to run the inverter in "3-Wire Operation." Refer to the function code E01 in Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES" for details.
If you do not assign a hold command (HLD) to any digital input terminals, then the "2-Wire Operation"
using the (FWD) and (REV) command will be active.
4.4 Terminal Command Decoders
Figures 4.3 (a) through (d) show five types of the terminal command decoder for the digital input signals.
Figure 4.3 (a) Terminal Command Decoder (General)
4-6
4.4 Terminal Command Decoders
Chap. 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Figure 4.3 (b) Terminal Command Decoder (Terminal Signal Inputs)
Figure 4.3 (c) Terminal Command Decoder (Terminal Signal Input Excluding Negative Logic)
4-7
Figure 4.3 (d) Terminal Command Decoder (ORing with Link Commands/Ignoring Link Commands)
4-8
4.4 Terminal Command Decoders
Programmable digital input terminals [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD] and [REV] can be assigned to internal
terminal commands such as (FWD) or (REV) decoded by data settings of related function codes as shown in
the block diagrams in Figures 4.3 (a) through 4.3 (d). In the decoders, negative logic input signals are also
applicable if you set data of 1000s to the function code.
The contents of the block diagram are divided into five groups, depending on whether inputs are assigned for
the same internal terminal commands respectively or the commands issued from the communications facility
(linked operation) specify the internal commands. Each of the diagrams shown in Figure 4.3 has following
role.
- Figure 4.3 (c) The terminal command decoder (terminal signal input excluding negative logic) shows
process to produce (FWD) and (REV) commands. In this process, settings via the
communications facility do not take effect. In the next process of the drive command
generator, however, they may take effect. (Refer to the block diagram in Section 4.3,
"Drive Command Generator.") To keep the inverter operation safe, any negative logic
input for the (FWD) and (REV) commands cannot be applied.
- Figure 4.3 (d) The upper part of the terminal command decoder (ORing with link commands/ignoring
link commands) shows the process to produce commands by ORing signals issued from
the communications facility and the control signal input terminal block (Logical Oring. If
any of input signals is ON, then the command becomes ON.).
- Figure 4.3 (d) The lower part of the terminal command decoder (ORing with link commands/ignoring
link commands) shows the process to produce commands by forcing the inverter to ignore
signals issued from the communications facility even if link operation ((LE): link
operation command) has been turned ON.
4-9
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
- Figure 4.3 (b) The terminal command decoder (terminal signal inputs) shows the process to decode
internal terminal commands dedicated to the control signal input applied to the inverter's
terminal block. These commands cannot be changed via the communications facility (link
operation command).
Chap. 4
- Figure 4.3 (a) The terminal command decoder (general) shows the decoding process of the internal
commands functioning with the negative logic inputs. This is switchable with inputs from
the communications facility (for example, link operation commands received through
RS485 communications).
4.5 Digital Output Selector
Figure 4.4 Digital Output Signal Selector
4-10
4.5 Digital Output Selector
The block diagram shown in Figure 4.4 shows you the processes to select the internal logic signals for
feeding to two digital output signals [Y1] and [30A/B/C]. The output terminals [Y1] (a transistor switch) and
[30A/B/C] (mechanical relay contacts) are programmable. You can assign various functions to these
terminals using function codes E20 and E27. Setting data of 1000s allows you to use these terminals for the
negative logic system.
Chap. 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
4-11
4.6 Analog Output (FMA) Selector
Figure 4.5 Analog Output (FMA) Selector
4-12
4.6 Analog Output (FMA) Selector
The block diagram shown in Figure 4.5 shows the process for selecting and processing the analog signals to
be outputted to the analog output terminal [FMA]. Function code F31 determines the signals to be outputted
to [FMA]. Function code F30 scales the output signal to a level suitable for the meters to be connected to the
[FMA] terminal.
The output voltage range is 0 to 10 VDC and the maximum allowable load current is 2 mA. This is capable of
driving two analog voltmeters with a common rating.
The test analog output is full-scale voltage output that adjusts the scale of the connected meter.
Chap. 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
4-13
4.7 Drive Command Controller
Figure 4.6 Drive Command Controller and Related Part of the Inverter
4-14
4.7 Drive Command Controller
The simplified block diagram shown in Figure 4.6 explains the process in which the inverter drives the motor
according to the internal run command <FWD>/<REV> from the frequency generator, or the PID frequency
command from the PID controller, and the run commands.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
- The logic shown in the left part of the block diagram processes the drive frequency command so as to
invert (´(-1)) the command for reverse rotation of the motor or to replace it with 0 (zero) for stopping the
motor.
- If the overload prevention control feature is active, then the logic automatically switches the output
frequency to one of overload suppression control and controls the inverter using the switched frequency.
However, if the current limit control is active (F43 ¹ 30, H12 = 1), the overload prevention control
automatically becomes inactive.
- If the current limit control is active, then the logic automatically switches the output frequency to one of
current limit control and controls inverter using the switched frequency.
- The slip compensation facility adds frequency components calculated from the load based on the preset
rated slip frequency inside the inverter to the frequency currently commanded. The logic adjusts the error
between the rated slip frequency of the motor currently under load and the preset frequency according to
the set data of function code P09 that controls slip compensation gain for the motor.
- The voltage processor determines the output voltage of the inverter. The processor adjusts the output
voltage to control the motor output torque.
- If DC braking control is active, the logic switches the voltage and frequency control components to ones
determined by the DC braking block to feed the proper power to the motor for DC braking.
4-15
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
- Acceleration/deceleration time is selectable from acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2, or
acceleration/deceleration time for jogging operation. The suppression of the regenerative braking feature
may multiply the commanded acceleration/deceleration time by 3. Refer to role of function code H69 in
the block diagram.
Chap. 4
- The accelerator/decelerator processor determines the output frequency of the inverter by referring to the
set data of related function codes. If the output frequency exceeds the peak frequency given by function
code F15, the controller limits the output frequency at the peak.
4.8 PID Frequency Command Generator
Figure 4.7 PID Frequency Command Generator
4-16
4.8 PID Frequency Command Generator
The block diagram shown in Figure 4.7 shows the PID frequency command generator that becomes active
when the PID control is enabled (J01= 1 or 2). The logic shown generates the final frequency command
according to the PID process command given by various means of setting and feedback, or frequency settings
as a speed command given manually, and various means of switching.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
- Switching of data settings for frequency 2 (C30), auxiliary frequencies 1 and 2 (E60 to E62) as manual
speed commands will be disabled.
- For selecting analog input (terminal [12], [C1], or built-in POT) as the PID process command, you need to
set proper data for function codes E60 to E62 and J02.
- To switch the operation between normal and inverse, the logic inverses polarity of deviation between the
PID command and its feedback (turning (INV) command ON/OFF, or setting J01 = 1 or 2).
- Refer to Section 4.2 " Drive Frequency Command Generator" for explanations of common items.
4-17
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
- For the multistep frequency, setting data 4 (C08) is exclusively applicable to PID process command.
Chap. 4
- For multistep frequency settings, settings 1 to 3 are exclusively applicable to the manual PID speed
command.
Chapter 5
RUNNING THROUGH RS485
COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS485 communications facility. Refer
to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for details.
Contents
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Common specifications ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Connector specifications ..................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Connection .......................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication
Mounting an optional RS485 communications card on the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters enables
the following:
n Operation from a remote keypad
A remote keypad can be connected to the RS485 communications card using the extension cable. You
may install the remote keypad to the easy-to-access front of the control panel. The maximum length of
the extension cable is 20 m.
n Operation by FRENIC Loader
n Operation from the host equipment
Protocols for managing a network including inverters include the Modbus RTU protocol (compliant to
the protocol established by Modicon Inc.) that is widely used in FA markets and the Fuji generalpurpose protocol that supports the FRENIC-Mini and conventional series of inverters.
For the remote keypad, the inverter uses the dedicated protocol that automatically switches
the operation source to the remote keypad, so no function code setting is required.
For FRENIC loader, however, you need to set up function code H30 for some
communications conditions although the dedicated protocol is used.
5-1
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
Host equipment such as a PLC or personal computer can be connected to the RS485 communications
card. It may act as a master device that controls the inverter as a slave device.
Chap. 5
The Windows-based PC can be connected to the RS485 communications card. Through the RS485
communications facility, you may run FRENIC Loader in the PC to edit the function code data and
monitor the running status information of the inverter.
5.1.1 Common specifications
Items
Specifications
Modbus RTU
Protocol
FGI-BUS
Compliance
Fuji general-purpose
inverter protocol
No. of supporting
stations
Host device: 1
Inverters:
up to 31
Electrical
specifications
EIA RS485
Connection to RS485
8-wire RJ-45 connector
Synchronization
Start-Stop system
Transmission mode
Half-duplex
Modicon Modbus
RTU-compliant
(only in RTU mode)
FRENIC Loader
Dedicated protocol
(Not disclosed)
Transmission speed
2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps
Max. transmission
cable length
500 m
No. of available
station addresses
1 to 31
1 to 247
1 to 255
Message frame format
FGI-BUS
Modbus RTU
FRENIC loader
Frame
synchronization
Detection SOH (Start
Of Header) character
Detection of no-data
transmission time for 3byte period
Start code 96H
detection
Frame length
16 bytes (fixed) in
normal transmission
8 or 12 bytes in highspeed transmission
Variable length
Variable length
Max. transfer data
Write: 1 word
Read: 1 word
Write: 50 words
Read: 50 words
Write: 41 words
Read: 41 words
Messaging system
Polling/Selecting/Broadcast
Command message
Transmission
character format
ASCII
Binary
Binary
Character length
8 or 7 bits
(selectable by the
function code)
8 bits (fixed)
8 bits (fixed)
Parity
Even, Odd, or None
(selectable by the function code)
Stop bit length
1 or 2 bits
(selectable by the
function code)
No parity:
2 bits
Even or Odd parity:
1 bit
1 bit (fixed)
Error checking
Sum-check
CRC-16
Sum-check
5-2
Even
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication
5.1.2 Connector specifications
The RS485 communications card is equipped with an RJ-45 connector whose pin assignment is listed
in the table below.
Pin
Signal name
Function
Remarks
Vcc
Power source for the remote keypad
5V
2 and 7
GND
Reference voltage level
GND
3 and 6
NC
Not used.
4
DX-
RS485 data (-)
Built-in terminator: 112 W
5
DX+
RS485 data (+)
Open/close by SW1
5.1.3 Connection
You need to select devices suitable for your network configuration, referring to the figure shown
below.
5-3
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
The RJ-45 connector has power source pins (pins 1 and 8) designed for the remote keypad.
When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector, take care not to use those pins.
Failure to do so may cause a short-circuit.
Chap. 5
1 and 8
Converter
Equipment such as personal computers is not equipped with an RS485 communications port but with
an RS232C port, so an RS485/RS232C converter is required to connect them to the RS485
communications card. It is recommended that insulated converters such as RS485/RS485 converters
(KS-485PTI by System Sacomm, Inc.) be used for eliminating electric noise.
Multi-drop branch connector
The RS485 communications port of the communications card uses an RJ-45 connector. For multi-drop
connection of inverters, multi-drop branch connectors (MS8-BA-JJJ by SK Koki Co.) are required.
Cable
For the connection of the remote keypad, use an 8-wire straight cable with an RJ-45 connector.
(Remote keypad extension cable option: CB-5S)
For the connection of other equipment or connection of FRENIC-Mini inverters with each other, use a
cable that has signal wires only. (EIA568-compliant 10BASE-T)
-
No converter is required for connection of the remote keypad.
-
To connect the FVR-E11S series of general-purpose inverters to the FRENIC-Mini
series, take necessary measures for the difference of the pin assignment between FVRE11S and FRENIC-Mini series to avoid a short-circuited failure.
5-4
Part 3 Peripheral Equipment
and Options
Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
CHAPTER 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Mini's
configuration with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.
Contents
6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Mini ................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Recommended wires ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Crimp terminals................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Peripheral Equipment.................................................................................................................................. 6-7
[ 1 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) and
magnetic contactor (MC)............................................................................................................... 6-7
[ 2 ] Surge killers................................................................................................................................. 6-11
[ 3 ] Arresters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-11
[ 4 ] Surge absorbers............................................................................................................................ 6-12
6.4 Selecting Options ...................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options............................................................................................................ 6-13
[ 1 ] Braking resistors .......................................................................................................................... 6-13
[ 2 ] DC reactors (DCRs)..................................................................................................................... 6-16
[ 3 ] AC reactors (ACRs)..................................................................................................................... 6-18
[ 4 ] Output circuit filters (OFLs)........................................................................................................ 6-19
[ 5 ] Ferrite ring reactors for reducing radio noise (ACL)................................................................... 6-20
[ 6 ] Options for 100 V single-phase power supply............................................................................. 6-21
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications ...................................................................................... 6-22
[ 1 ] External potentiometer for frequency setting .............................................................................. 6-22
[ 2 ] RS485 communications card "OPC-C1-RS" ............................................................................... 6-23
[ 3 ] Remote keypad "TP-E1" ............................................................................................................. 6-23
[ 4 ] Extension cable for remote operation .......................................................................................... 6-24
[ 5 ] Copy adapter "CPAD-C1A" ........................................................................................................ 6-24
[ 6 ] Inverter support loader software.................................................................................................. 6-24
6.4.3 Extended installation kit options ....................................................................................................... 6-25
[ 1 ] Mounting adapters ....................................................................................................................... 6-25
[ 2 ] Rail mounting bases..................................................................................................................... 6-26
[ 3 ] NEMA1 kit .................................................................................................................................. 6-27
6.4.4 Meter options .................................................................................................................................... 6-28
[ 1 ] Frequency meters......................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Mini
6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Mini
This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC-Mini
series of inverters and includes a configuration example for reference. Refer to Figure 6.1 for a quick
overview of available options.
Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.1 Quick Overview of Options
6-1
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
This section contains information needed to select wires for connecting the inverter to commercial
power lines, motor or any of the optional/peripheral equipment. The level of electric noise issued from
the inverter or received by the inverter from external sources may vary depending upon wiring and
routing. To solve such noise-related problems, refer to Appendix A "Advantageous Use of Inverters
(Notes on electrical noise)."
Select wires that satisfy the following requirements:
-
Sufficient capacity to flow the rated average current (allowable current capacity).
Protective device coordination with an overcurrent circuit breaker such as an MCCB in the
overcurrent zone for overcurrent protection.
Voltage loss due to the wire length is within the allowable range.
Suitable for the type and size of terminals of the optional equipment to be used.
Recommended wires are listed below. Use these wires unless otherwise specified.
■ 600V class of vinyl-insulated wires (IV wires)
Use this class of wire for the power circuits. This class of wire is hard to twist, so using it for the
control signal circuits is not recommended. Maximum ambient temperature for this wire is 60°C.
■ 600V heat-resistant PVC insulated wires or 600V polyethylene insulated wires (HIV wires)
As wires in this class are smaller in diameter and more flexible than IV wires and can be used at a
higher ambient temperature (75°C), they can be used for both of the main power and control signal
circuits. To use this class of wire for the control circuits, you need to correctly twist the wires and keep
the wiring length for equipment being connected as short as possible.
■ 600V cross-linked polyethylene-insulated wires (FSLC wires)
Use this class of wire mainly for power and grounding circuits. These wires are smaller in diameter
and more flexible than those of the IV and HIV classes of wires, meaning that these wires can be used
to save on space and increase operation efficiency of your power system, even in high temperature
environments. The maximum allowable ambient temperature for this class of wires is 90°C. The
(Boardlex) wire range available from Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. satisfies these requirements.
■ Shielded-Twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic/electric equipment
Use this category of cables for the control circuits of the inverter so as to prevent the signal lines from
being affected by noise from external sources, including the power input/output lines of the inverter
themselves. Even if the signal lines are inside the power control cabinet, always use this category of
cables when the length of wiring is longer than normal. Cables satisfying these requirements are the
Furukawa's BEAMEX S shielded cables of the XEBV and XEWV ranges.
6-2
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
Currents Flowing across the Inverter Terminals
Table 6.1 summarizes average (effective) electric currents flowing across the terminals of each
inverter model for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment, options and electric wires
for each inverter--including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating.
Table 6.1 Currents Flowing through Inverter
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
w/ DCR
w/o DCR
w/ DCR
w/o DCR
0.57
1.1
0.70
-
0.51 (0.55)
1.1 (1.1)
0.62 (0.67)
0.2
0.93
1.7
1.1
-
0.85 (0.92)
1.7 (1.8)
1.0 (1.1)
-
0.4
1.6
3.0
2.0
1.2
1.5 (1.6)
3.0 (3.0)
1.8 (2.0)
1.2
0.75
3.0
5.1
3.7
1.6
2.8 (3.0)
5.0 (5.3)
3.4 (3.7)
1.6
1.5
5.7
9.4
7.0
3.6
5.2 (5.6)
9.0 (9.5)
6.3 (6.9)
3.6
Braking resistor
DC link
circuit current
bus current (A)
(A)
Input RMS current (A)
DC reactor (DCR)
Braking resistor
DC link
circuit current
bus current (A)
(A)
-
2.2
8.3
13.0
10.2
3.5
7.6 (8.3)
12.3 (13.2)
9.3 (10.1)
3.5
3.7, 4.0
14.0
22.2
17.2
4.1
12.7 (13.9)
20.6 (22.2)
15.6 (17.0)
4.1
0.4
0.81 (0.85)
1.6 (1.7)
0.99 (1.0)
0.8
0.74 (0.85)
1.7 (1.7)
0.91 (1.0)
0.8
0.75
1.5 (1.6)
2.9 (3.0)
1.8 (1.9)
1.1
1.4 (1.6)
3.0 (3.0)
1.7 (2.0)
1.1
1.5
2.9 (3.0)
5.7 (5.7)
3.5 (3.6)
1.8
2.6 (3.0)
5.1 (5.9)
3.2 (3.6)
1.8
2.2
4.2 (4.4)
7.9 (7.9)
5.1 (5.3)
1.8
3.8 (4.3)
7.1 (8.2)
4.6 (5.3)
1.8
3.7, 4.0
7.0 (7.3)
12.5 (13.0)
8.6 (9.0)
2.1
6.4 (7.3)
11.1 (12.9)
7.8 (8.9)
2.1
0.1
1.1
1.8
1.1
-
1.0 (1.1)
1.8 (1.8)
1.0 (1.1)
-
0.2
2.0
3.2
2.0
-
1.8 (1.9)
3.1 (3.2)
1.8 (1.9)
-
0.4
3.5
5.2
3.5
0.82
3.1 (3.4)
5.0 (5.4)
3.1 (3.4)
0.82
1.4
0.75
6.4
9.5
6.4
1.4
5.8 (6.3)
9.1 (9.7)
5.8 (6.3)
1.5
11.7
16.0
11.7
1.4
10.5 (11.3)
15.5 (16.4)
10.5 (11.3)
1.4
2.2
17.5
24.2
17.5
1.7
15.8 (17.0)
23.4 (24.8)
15.8 (17.0)
1.7
- Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model. The input route mean
square (RMS) current is calculated according to the following conditions:
Power source capacity: 500 kVA; power source internal impedance: 5%
- The current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply voltage,
such as 230 VAC and 380 VAC.
- The braking current is always constant, independent of braking resistor specifications, including
built-in, standard and 10%ED models.
6-3
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Singlephase
200 V
220 V (200 V)/440 V (380 V), 60 Hz
0.1
Input RMS current (A)
DC reactor (DCR)
Chap. 6
Threephase
400 V
200 V/400 V (380 V), 50 Hz
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
6.2.1 Recommended wires
Tables 6.2 and 6.3 list the recommended wires according to the internal temperature of your power control
cabinet.
■ If the internal temperature of your power control cabinet is 50°C or below
Table 6.2 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)
Applicable
Power
motor
supply
rating
voltage
(kW)
Threephase
200 V
Three
-phase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Recommended wire size (mm2)
Inverter type
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
FRN0.1C1n-2o
FRN0.2C1n-2o
FRN0.4C1n-2o
FRN0.75C1n -2o
FRN1.5C1n-2o
FRN2.2C1n-2o
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
FRN0.4C1n-4o
FRN0.75C1n -4o
FRN1.5C1n-4o
FRN2.2C1n-4o
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
FRN0.1C1n-7o
FRN0.2C1n-7o
FRN0.4C1n-7o
FRN0.75C1n -7o
1.5
2.2
Main circuit power input [L1/R , L2/S , L3/T] or [L1/L, L2/N]
Inverter output [U , V , W]
w/ DC reactor (DCR)
w/o DC reactor (DCR)
Current
Current
Current
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
0.8
0.57
1.1
1.5
0.93
1.8
2.0
2.0
3.0
1.6
3.1
(2.5)
(2.5)
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.5
3.0
5.3
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
8.0
5.7
9.5
11
8.3
13.2
3.5
14.0
5.5
22.2
17
(4.0)
1.5
0.85
1.7
2.5
1.6
3.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.7
3.0
5.9
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
5.5
4.4
8.2
7.3
2.0
(2.5)
FRN1.5C1n-7o
FRN2.2C1n-7o
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
3.5
(4.0)
1.1
2.0
3.5
6.4
11.7
17.5
2.0
(2.5)
3.5
(4.0)
5.5
(6.0)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
3.5
(4.0)
13.0
9
1.8
3.3
5.4
9.7
0.8
1.5
3.0
5.0
16.4
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
24.8
8.0
11
Table 6.2 Cont. (for DC reactor, braking resistor, control circuits, and inverter grounding)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Three
-phase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Inverter type
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
FRN0.1C1n-2o
FRN0.2C1n-2o
FRN0.4C1n-2o
FRN0.75C1n-2o
FRN1.5C1n-2o
FRN2.2C1n-2o
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
FRN0.4C1n-4o
FRN0.75C1n-4o
FRN1.5C1n-4o
FRN2.2C1n-4o
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
FRN0.1C1n-7o
FRN0.2C1n-7o
FRN0.4C1n-7o
FRN0.75C1n-7o
FRN1.5C1n-7o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
Recommended wire size (mm2)
DC reactor
Braking resistor
Control circuit
[P1, P(+)]
[P(+), DB]
Current
Current
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
0.70
1.1
2.0
2.0
1.2
2.0
2.0
(2.5)
3.7
1.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
(2.5)
(2.5)
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.0
3.6
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
10.2
3.5
3.5
17.2
4.1
(4.0)
1.0
0.8
1.9
1.1
3.6
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
(2.5) (2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5) (2.5) (2.5)
5.3
1.8
9.0
2.0
(2.5)
3.5
(4.0)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
1.1
2.0
3.5
6.4
11.7
17.5
Inverter grounding
[G]
Allowable temp.*1
60°C 75°C 90°C
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.1
-
2.0
(2.5)
-
2.0
(2.5)
-
-
2.0
(2.5)
0.82
1.4
1.4
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.7
2.0
(2.5)
3.5
(4.0)
*1 Assuming the use of bare wiring (without rack or duct): 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires for 60°C, 600 V
class of polyethylene-insulated HIV wires for 75°C, and 600 V class of polyethylene-insulated cross-link wires for
90°C.
Notes: 1) A box (n) in the above tables replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above tables replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
3) Values in parentheses ( ) in the above tables denote wire sizes for the European version.
& If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ
from those listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6.1 and
Appendices, App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."
6-4
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
■ If the internal temperature of your power control cabinet is 40°C or below
Table 6.3 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
FRN0.1C1n-2o
FRN0.2C1n-2o
FRN0.4C1n-2o
FRN0.75C1n-2o
FRN1.5C1n-2o
FRN2.2C1n-2o
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
FRN0.4C1n-4o
FRN0.75C1n-4o
FRN1.5C1n-4o
FRN2.2C1n-4o
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
FRN0.1C1n-7o
FRN0.2C1n-7o
FRN0.4C1n-7o
FRN0.75C1n-7o
FRN1.5C1n-7o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
7.3
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
1.1
2.0
3.5
6.4
11.6
2.0
(2.5)
17.5
3.5
(4.0)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
13.0
9
1.8
3.3
5.4
9.7
16.4
0.8
1.5
3.0
5.0
8.0
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
24.8
11
Table 6.3 Cont. (for DC reactor, braking resistor, control circuit, and inverter grounding)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Three
-phase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Inverter type
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7, 4.0
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
FRN0.1C1n-2o
FRN0.2C1n-2o
FRN0.4C1n-2o
FRN0.75C1n-2o
FRN1.5C1n-2o
FRN2.2C1n-2o
FRN3.7C1n-2o
FRN0.4C1n-4o
FRN0.75C1n-4o
FRN1.5C1n-4o
FRN2.2C1n-4o
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
FRN0.1C1n-7o
FRN0.2C1n-7o
FRN0.4C1n-7o
FRN0.75C1n-7o
FRN1.5C1n-7o
FRN2.2C1n-7o
Recommended wire size (mm2)
DC reactor
Braking resistor
Control circuit
[P1, P(+)]
[P(+), DB]
Current
Current
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
0.7
1.1
2.0
1.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
3.7
1.6
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.0
3.6
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
10.2
3.5
17.2
4.1
1.0
0.8
1.9
1.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.6
1.8
0.5
0.5
0.5
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
5.3
1.8
9.0
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
1.1
2.0
3.5
6.4
11.7
17.5
Inverter grounding
[G]
Allowable temp.*1
60°C 75°C 90°C
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
2.1
2.0
(2.5)
2.0
(2.5)
-
-
2.0
(2.5)
0.82
1.4
1.4
1.7
0.5
0.5
0.5
*1 Assuming the use of bare wiring (without rack or duct): 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires for 60°C, 600 V
class of polyethylene-insulated HIV wires for 75°C, and 600 V class of polyethylene-insulated cross-link wires for
90°C.
Notes: 1) A box (n) in the above tables replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above tables replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
3) Values in parentheses ( ) in the above tables denote wire sizes for the European version.
& If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ
from those listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6.1 and
Appendices, App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."
6-5
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Singlephase
200 V
Inverter type
Main circuit power input [L1/R , L2/S , L3/T] or [L1/L, L2/N]
Inverter output [U , V , W]
w/ DC reactor (DCR)
w/o DC reactor (DCR)
Current
Current
Current
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
Allowable temp.*1
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
60°C 75°C 90°C
(A)
0.8
0.57
1.1
1.5
0.93
1.8
3.0
2.0
1.6
3.1
(2.5)
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.5
3.0
5.3
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
8.0
5.7
9.5
11
8.3
13.2
3.5
14.0
22.2
17
(4.0)
1.5
0.85
1.7
2.5
1.6
3.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.7
3.0
5.9
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
(2.5)
5.5
4.4
8.2
Chap. 6
Three
-phase
400 V
Recommended wire size (mm2)
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
6.2.2 Crimp terminals
Table 6.4 lists the recommended ring tongue crimp terminals that can be specified by the wires and
screws to be used for your inverter model.
Table 6.4 Crimp Terminal Size
Wire size (mm2)
0.5
0.75
1.25
2.0
3.5/5.5
Terminal screw size
Ring tongue crimp terminal
M3.5
1.25 - 3.5
M4
1.25 - 4
M3.5
1.25 - 3.5
M4
1.25 - 4
M3.5
1.25 - 3.5
M4
1.25 - 4
M3.5
2 - 3.5
M4
M4
2-4
4 - 5.5
& Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.4.3 "Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications" to
select the correct terminal screw size.
6-6
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
[ 1 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB) and magnetic contactor (MC)
[ 1.1 ] Functional overview
■ MCCBs and ELCBs*
*With overcurrent protection
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) are designed to protect the power circuits between the power
supply and inverter's main circuit terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T for three phase, or L1/L and L2/N
for single-phase power source) from overload or short-circuit, which in turn prevents secondary
accidents caused by the inverter malfunctioning.
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs) function in the same way as MCCBs.
■ MCs
At the power source side
Insert an MC in the power source side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power source (generally, commercial/factory power lines)
with the protective function built into the inverter, or with the external signal input.
(2)
Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop
command due to internal/external circuit failures.
(3) Cut off the inverter from the power source when the MCCB inserted in the power source side
cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose. For the purpose only, it is recommended
that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON/OFF manually.
When your system requires starting/stopping the motor(s) driven by the inverter with the
MC, the frequency of the starting/stopping operation should be once or less per hour. The
more frequent the operation, the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor/s used in the
DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow. It is
recommended that terminal commands (FWD), (REV) and (HLD) for 3-wire operation or
the keypad be used for starting/stopping the motor.
At the output side
Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Prevent externally turned-around current from being applied to the inverter power output
terminals (U, V, and W) unexpectedly. An MC should be used, for example, if a circuit that
switches the motor driving power source between the inverter output and commercial power
lines is connected to the inverter.
As application of the external current to the inverter's secondary (output) circuits may break
the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs), MCs should be used in the power control
system circuits to switch the motor drive power source to the commercial power lines after
the motor has come to a complete stop. Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied
to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation, or similar.
(2) Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter.
(3) Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been
activated.
6-7
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
An MC can be used at both the power input and output sides of the inverter. At each side, the MC
works as described below. When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter, the MC can also switch
the motor drive power source between the inverter output and commercial power lines.
Chap. 6
Built-in overcurrent/overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its
input/output lines.
Driving the motor using commercial power lines
MCs can also be used to switch the power source of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial
power source.
Select the MC so as to satisfy the rated currents listed in Table 6.1, which are the most critical RMS
currents for using the inverter. For switching the motor drive source between the inverter output and
commercial power lines, use the MC of class AC3 specified by JIS C8325 in the commercial line side.
[ 1.2 ] Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers
Figure 6.2 shows a connection example for MCCB or ELCB (with overcurrent protection) in the
inverter input circuit. Table 6.5 lists the rated current for the MCCB and corresponding inverter
models. Table 6.6 lists the applicable grades of ELCB sensitivity.
Insert an MCCB or ELCB (with overcurrent protection) recommended for each inverter for its input
circuits. Do not use an MCCB or ELCB of a higher rating than that recommended.
Doing so could result in a fire.
Molded case circuit breaker/
earth leakage circuit breaker
Magnetic contactor
Figure 6.2 External Views of Molded Case Circuit Breaker/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker, Magnetic
Contactor and Connection Example
6-8
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
Table 6.5 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
and Magnetic Contactor
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
-
Magnetic contactor type
MC1 (for input circuit)
DC reactor (DCR)
DC reactor (DCR)
w/ DCR
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
5 (6)
w/o DCR
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o
3.7
4.0
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-7o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-7o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-7o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-7o
10
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-7o
15 (16)
20 (25)
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
20 (25)
30 (35)
20 (25)
w/o DCR
5 (6)
10
10
w/ DCR
Magnetic contactor type
MC2 (for output circuit)
SC-05
SC-05
SC-05
15 (16)
20 (25)
30 (35)
SC-5-1
5 (6)
5 (6)
10
SC-05
SC-05
SC-05
15 (16)
10
5 (6)
20 (25)
5 (6)
10
15 (16)
SC-05
SC-05
SC-05
SC-5-1
The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and ELCBs to be used in the power control cabinet
with an internal temperature of lower than 50°C. The rated current is factored by a correction
coefficient of 0.85 as the MCCBs' and ELCBs' original rated current is specified when using them in an
ambient temperature of 40°C or lower. Select an MCCB and/or ELCB suitable for the actual shortcircuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems.
- For the selection of the MC type, it is assumed that the 600V HIV (allowable ambient
temperature: 75°C) wires for the power input/output of the inverter are used. If an MC type for
another class of wires is selected, the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter and
the MC type should be taken into account.
-
Use ELCBs with overcurrent protection.
-
To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter, use an MCCB
and/or ELCB with the rated current listed in the above table. Do not use an MCCB or ELCB with a
rating higher than that listed.
Notes: 1) A box (n) in the above table replace S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
3) Values in parentheses ( ) in the above table denote rated currents for the European version.
6-9
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Singlephase
200 V
Inverter type
MCCB, ELCB
Rated current (A)
Chap. 6
Threephase
400 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Table 6.6 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of ELCBs (with
overcurrent protection) and wiring length of the inverter output circuits. Note that the sensitivity levels
listed in the table are estimated values based on the results obtained by the test setup in the Fuji
laboratory where each inverter drives a single motor.
Table 6.6 Rated Current Sensitivity of Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7, 4.0
5.5
7.5
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7, 4.0
5.5
7.5
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
Rated current
of applicable
motor
(A)
0.68
1.4
2.3
3.6
6.5
9.2
15
22
29
1.2
1.8
3.3
4.6
7.5
11
14.5
0.68
1.4
2.3
3.6
6.5
9.2
Wiring length and current sensitivity
10m
30m
50m
100m
100mA
30mA
30mA
100mA
30mA
200m
200mA
100mA
300m
200mA
500mA
200mA
-
Values listed above were obtained using Fuji ELCB EG or SG series applied to the test setup.
-
The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard motor (4 poles, 50 Hz and
200 V 3-phase).
-
The leakage current is calculated based on grounding of the single wire for 200V D type and the neutral
wire for 400V Y type power lines.
-
Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600V class of
vinyl-insulated IV wires are used in a metal conduit laid directly on the earth.
-
Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor. If more than one motor is to
be connected to a single inverter, the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the
inverter and motors.
6-10
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
[ 2 ] Surge killers
A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightning and noise from the power supply lines.
Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment, including inverters, from
damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and/or noise.
The applicable model of surge killer is the FSL-323. Figure 6.3 shows its external dimensions and a
connection example. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese edition only)" for
details. These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Chap. 6
[ 3 ] Arresters
An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines. Use of an
arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage or
malfunctioning caused by such surges and/or noise.
Applicable arrester models are the CN23232 and CN2324E. Figure 6.4 shows their external
dimensions and connection examples. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese
edition only)" for details. These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Figure 6.4 Arrester Dimensions and Connection Examples
6-11
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.3 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Connection Example
[ 4 ] Surge absorbers
A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective
protection of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors, mini-control
relays and timers.
Applicable surge absorber models are the S2-A-O and S1-B-O. Figure 6.5 shows their external
dimensions. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese edition only)" for details.
The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Figure 6.5 Surge Absorber Dimensions
6-12
6.4 Selecting Options
6.4 Selecting Options
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options
[ 1 ] Braking resistors
A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor and converts
it to heat for consumption. Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of
the inverter.
& Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2 "Selecting a Braking Resistor."
[ 1.1 ] Standard model
Table 6.7 Braking Resistor (Standard Model)
Power
supply
voltage
Inverter type
Option
Max. braking torque (%)
Continuous braking (100%
Braking resistor
50 Hz
torque conversion value)
Q'ty
Resistance
(W)
1
100
1
40
1
33
DB0.75-4
1
200
DB2.2-4
1
160
DB3.7-4
1
130
1
100
1
40
Type
FRN0.4C1n-2o
DB0.75-2
Three- FRN0.75C1n-2o
phase FRN1.5C1n-2o
DB2.2-2
200 V FRN2.2C1n-2o
FRN3.7C1n-2o DB3.7-2
FRN0.4C1n-4o
FRN0.75C1n-4o
ThreeFRN1.5C1n-4o
phase
400 V FRN2.2C1n-4o
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
FRN0.4C1n-7o
DB0.75-2
SingleFRN0.75C1n-7o
phase
200 V FRN1.5C1n-7o DB2.2-2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
(N·m)
150
150
150
60 Hz
(N·m)
Discharging
capability
(kWs)
Braking time
(s)
Average
loss
(kW)
0.044
22
45
0.068
18
0.075
10
Duty cycle
(%ED)
4.02
3.32
9
7.57
6.25
17
15.0
12.4
34
22.0
18.2
33
30
0.077
7
37.1
30.5
37
20
0.093
5
0.044
22
45
0.068
18
4.02
3.32
9
7.57
6.25
17
15.0
12.4
34
0.075
10
22.0
18.2
33
30
0.077
7
37.1
30.5
37
20
0.093
5
0.044
22
45
0.068
18
0.075
10
30
0.077
7
4.02
3.32
9
7.57
6.25
17
15.0
12.4
34
22.0
18.2
33
Notes: 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
6-13
Repetitive braking
(100 sec or less cycle)
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.6 Braking Resistor (Standard Model) and Connection Example
Chap. 6
The standard model of a braking resistor integrates a facility that detects the temperature on the heat
sink of the resistor and outputs a digital ON/OFF signal if the temperature exceeds the specified level
(as an overheating warning signal). To ensure that the signal is recognized at one of the digital input
terminals of the FRENIC-Mini, assign the external alarm (THR) to any of terminals [X1] to [X3],
[FWD] and [REV]. Connect the assigned terminal to terminal [1] of the braking resistor. Upon
detection of the warning signal (preset detection level: 150°C), the inverter simultaneously transfers to
Alarm mode, displays alarm 0H2 on the LED monitor and shuts down its power output.
[ 1.2 ] 10%ED model
Figure 6.7 Braking Resistor (10 %ED Model) and Connection Example
Table 6.8 Braking Resistor (10 %ED Model)
Power
supply
voltage
Inverter type
Option
Max. braking torque (%)
Continuous braking (100%
Braking resistor
50 Hz
torque conversion value)
Type
FRN0.4C1n-2o
DB0.75-2C
Three- FRN0.75C1n-2o
phase FRN1.5C1n-2o
DB2.2-2C
200 V FRN2.2C1n-2o
FRN3.7C1n-2o DB3.7-2C
FRN0.4C1n-4o
DB0.75-4C
FRN0.75C1n-4o
ThreeFRN1.5C1n-4o
phase
DB2.2-4C
400 V FRN2.2C1n-4o
FRN3.7C1n-4o
DB3.7-4C
FRN4.0C1n-4o
FRN0.4C1n-7o
DB0.75-2C
SingleFRN0.75C1n-7o
phase
200 V FRN1.5C1n-7o DB2.2-2C
FRN2.2C1n-7o
Q'ty
Resistance
(W)
1
100
1
40
1
33
1
200
1
160
1
130
1
100
1
40
150
150
150
60 Hz
Repetitive braking
(100 sec or less cycle)
Average
loss
(kW)
0.02
0.0375
0.075
0.11
0.185
0.02
(N·m)
(N·m)
4.02
7.57
15.0
22.0
37.1
4.02
3.32
6.25
12.4
18.2
30.5
3.32
Discharging
capability
(kWs)
9
17
34
33
37
9
7.57
6.25
17
15.0
12.4
34
22.0
18.2
33
30
0.11
37.1
30.5
37
20
0.185
45
0.0375
4.02
3.32
9
7.57
6.25
17
15.0
12.4
34
22.0
18.2
33
Braking time
(s)
45
30
20
45
Duty cycle
(%ED)
10
0.0375
0.075
10
0.02
0.075
30
10
0.11
Notes: 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
The 10 %ED braking resistor does not support overheating detection or warning output, so an
electronic thermal overload relay needs to be set up using function codes F50 and F51 to protect the
braking resistor from overheating.
6-14
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 1.3 ] Compact model
Figure 6.8 Braking Resistor (Compact Model) and Connection Example
Table 6.9 Braking Resistor (Compact Model)
Item
Model: TK80W120W
Capacity (kW)
0.08
Resistance (W)
120
Applicable inverter model
FRN0.4
C1n-2¨
FRN0.75
C1n-2¨
FRN1.5
C1n-2¨
FRN2.2
C1n-2¨
FRN3.7
C1n-2¨
Applicable motor output
(kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7, 4.0
Average braking torque (%)
150
150
150
100
100
Allowable
duty cycle (%)
15
5
5
5
5
Allowable
continuous
braking time
15 sec
15 sec
10 sec
10 sec
10 sec
Allowable
braking
properties
Braking unit
Not required
Notes: 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
This braking resistor is not suitable for use with the 400V class of inverters.
6-15
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Resistor
200 V
class
Chap. 6
Power
supply
voltage
[ 2 ] DC reactors (DCRs)
A DCR is mainly used for power supply normalization and for supplied power factor improvement
(for reducing harmonic components).
■ For power supply normalization
-
Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or
more the rated inverter capacity. In this case, the percentage-reactance of the power source
decreases, and harmonic components and their peak levels increase. These factors may break
rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the
capacitor (which can shorten the inverter's service life).
-
Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when phase-advancing capacitors are
being turned ON/OFF.
-
Use a DCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power source exceeds 2%.
Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
´ 67
3 - phase average voltage (V)
■ For supplied power factor improvement (for suppressing harmonics)
Generally a capacitor is used to improve the power factor of the load, however, it cannot be used in a
system that includes an inverter. Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter's power source so as
to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and improve the power factor of inverter.
Using a DCR improves the input power factor to approximately 95%.
· At the time of shipping, a short bar is connected across terminals P1 and P (+) on the
terminal block. Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR.
· If a DCR is not going to be used, do not remove the jumper bar.
For three-phase 200 V/400 V or single-phase 200 V
Figure 6.9 External View of a DC Reactor (DCR) and Connection Example
6-16
6.4 Selecting Options
Table 6.10 DC Reactors (DCRs)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Rated current
(A)
Inductance
(mH)
Coil resistance
(mW)
DCR2-0.2
1.5
20
660
Type
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
Generated loss
(W)
0.8
1.6
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
DCR2-0.4
3.0
12
280
1.9
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
DCR2-0.75
5.0
7.0
123
2.8
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o
DCR2-1.5
8.0
4.0
57.5
4.6
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o
DCR2-2.2
11
3.0
43
6.7
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
DCR2-3.7
18
1.7
21
8.8
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
DCR4-0.4
1.5
50
970
2.0
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o
DCR4-0.75
2.5
30
440
2.5
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o
DCR4-1.5
4.0
16
235
4.8
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o
DCR4-2.2
5.5
12
172
6.8
3.7
4.0
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
DCR4-3.7
9.0
7.0
74.5
8.1
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-7o
DCR2-0.2
1.5
20
660
1.6
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-7o
DCR2-0.4
3.0
12
280
1.9
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-7o
DCR2-0.75
5.0
7.0
123
2.8
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-7o
DCR2-1.5
8.0
4.0
57.5
4.6
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-7o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
DCR2-3.7
18
1.7
21
8.8
Note 1: Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following
conditions:
- The power source is 3-phase 200 V/400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
- The power source capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
- The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
- An AC reactor (ACR) is not connected.
Note 2: A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
Note 3: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
6-17
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Singlephase
200 V
DC reactor (DCR)
Inverter type
Chap. 6
Threephase
400 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
[ 3 ] AC reactors (ACRs)
Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power, for example,
in DC link bus operation (shared PN operation). Generally, ACRs are used for correction of voltage
waveform and power factor or for power supply normalization, but not for suppressing harmonic
components in the power lines. For suppressing harmonic components, use a DCR.
An ACR should be also used when the power source is extremely unstable; for example, when the
power source involves an extremely large interphase voltage unbalance.
Figure 6.10 External View of AC Reactor (ACR) and Connection Example
Table 6.11 AC Reactor (ACR)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Inverter type
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
ACR2-0.75A
5
493
592
12
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o
ACR2-1.5A
8
295
354
14
AC reactor (ACR)
Type
Rated current
(A)
Reactance (mW/phase)
50 Hz
60 Hz
Generated loss
(W)
2.5
ACR2-0.4A
3
917
1100
5
10
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o
ACR2-2.2A
11
213
256
16
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
ACR2-3.7A
17
218
153
23
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o
ACR4-0.75A
2.5
1920
2300
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o
ACR4-1.5A
3.7
1160
1390
11
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o
ACR4-2.2A
5.5
851
1020
14
3.7
4.0
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
ACR4-3.7A
9
512
615
17
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-7o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-7o
ACR2-0.4A
3
917
1100
5
10
5
10
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-7o
ACR2-0.75A
5
493
592
12
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-7o
ACR2-1.5A
8
295
354
14
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-7o
ACR2-2.2A
11
213
256
16
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
ACR2-3.7A
17
218
262
23
Note 1: Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following
conditions:
- The power source is 3-phase 200 V/400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
- The power source capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
- The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
Note 2: A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
Note 3: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
6-18
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 4 ] Output circuit filters (OFLs)
Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to:
-
-
-
Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor power terminals
This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge
currents from the 400 V class of inverters.
Suppress leakage current (due to higher harmonic components) from the inverter output lines
This reduces the leakage current when the motor is connected by long power feed lines. Keep the
length of the power feed line less than 400 m.
Minimize radiation and/or induction noise issued from the inverter output lines
OFLs are effective noise suppression device for long wiring applications such as that used at
plants.
Use an ACR within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26.
Otherwise, the filter will overheat.
Chap. 6
Table 6.12 Output Circuit Filter (OFL)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Inverter type
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o
3.7
4.0
FRN3.7C1n-4o
FRN4.0C1n-4o
Filter type
OFL-0.4-2
Rated
current
(A)
Overload
capability
Inverter
power
input
voltage
150 % for 1 min.
Three-phase
Maximum
frequency
(Hz)
8 to 15
400
0.75 to 15
400
3
OFL-1.5-2
8
OFL-3.7-2
17
OFL-0.4-4A
1.5
OFL-1.5-4A
3.7
200 % for 0.5 sec 200 to 240 V
50/60 Hz
150% for 1min.
Three-phase
200 % for 0.5 sec 380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
OFL-3.7-4A
Carrier
frequency allowable
range
(kHz)
9
Note 1: The OFL-***-4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency.
Note 2: A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
Note 3: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
6-19
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.11 External View of Output Circuit Filter (OFL) and Connection Example
[ 5 ] Ferrite ring reactors for reducing radio noise (ACL)
An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter.
An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the
power supply lines inside the inverter. Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL.
If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m, insert an ACL to the power supply
lines; if it is more than 20 m, insert it to the power output lines of the inverter.
Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size (I.D.) and installation requirements.
Figure 6.12 Dimensions of Ferrite Ring for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL) and Connection Example
Table 6.13 Ferrite Ring for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL)
Installation requirements
Ferrite ring type
Q'ty
Number of
turns
1
4
2
2
1
4
2
2
4
1
ACL-40B
ACL-74B
Wire size
(mm2)
2.0
3.5
5.5
8
14
8
14
22
38
60
100
150
200
250
325
The selected wires are for use with 3-phase input/output lines (3 wires).
6-20
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 6 ] Options for 100 V single-phase power supply
An optional 100 V single-phase power supply may be used to operate an inverter designed for a 200 V
3-phase power supply with 100 V single-phase power. Select an option with correct capacity
according to the specifications listed in Table 6.14.
Chap. 6
Table 6.14 Optional Single-Phase 100 V Input
Type
Applicable inverter capacity
(kW)
Rated capacity (kVA)
CAPA6-0.2
CAPA6-0.4
CAPA6-0.75
0.1, and 0.2
0.4
0.75
0.5
1.1
1.8
6-21
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.13 Optional Single-Phase 100 V Input Dimensions
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications
[ 1 ] External potentiometer for frequency setting
An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency. Connect the potentiometer to
control signal terminals [11] to [13] of the inverter as shown in Figure 6.14.
Model: RJ-13 (BA-2 B-characteristics, 1 kW)
Model: WAR3W (3W B-characteristics, 1 kW)
Figure 6.14 External Potentiometer Dimensions and Connection Example
6-22
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 2 ] RS485 communications card "OPC-C1-RS"
The RS485 communications card is designed exclusively for use with the FRENIC-Mini series of
inverter and enables data to be sent to or received from other equipment.
The RS485 communications facility also enables remote operation of the inverters using the remote
keypad and host controllers such as Windows-based personal computers and PLCs (Programmable
Logic Controllers), as follows:
-
Operating the inverters: setting the frequency, forward/reverse running, stopping, coast-to-stop and
resetting, etc.
Monitoring the operation status of the inverter: output frequency, output current and alarm
information, etc.
Setting function code data.
Table 6.15 Transmission Specifications
Item
SX protocol
(for exclusive use with the
support loader software)
Modbus RTU
(Conforming to Modicon's
Modbus RTU)
EIA RS-485
Number of units
connected
Host: 1 unit, Inverter: 31 units
Transmission
speed
19200, 9600, 4800 and 2400 bps
Synchronization
system
Synchronous start-stop
Transmission
method
Half-duplex
[ 3 ] Remote keypad "TP-E1"
The keypad permits remote control of FRENIC-Mini, and function setting and display (with copy
function).
6-23
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Electrical
specifications
Fuji general-purpose
inverter protocol
Chap. 6
Communication
protocol
Specifications
[ 4 ] Extension cable for remote operation
The extension cable connects the inverter with the remote keypad to enable remote operation of the
inverter. The cable is a straight-wired type with RJ-45 jacks and its length is selectable from 5, 3, and
1 m.
Type
Length (m)
CB-5S
5
CB-3S
3
CB-1S
1
[ 5 ] Copy adapter "CPAD-C1A"
The copy adapter can be easily connected to an inverter, and is used to copy data to multiple inverters.
[ 6 ] Inverter support loader software
FRENIC Loader is support software which enables the inverter to be operated via the RS485
communications facility. The main functions include the following:
-
Easy editing of function code data
Monitoring the operation statuses of the inverter such as I/O monitor and multi-monitor
Operation of inverters on a PC screen (Windows-based only)
& Refer to Chapter 5 "RUNNING THOUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)" for details.
6-24
6.4 Selecting Options
6.4.3 Extended installation kit options
[ 1 ] Mounting adapters
FRENIC-Mini series of inverters can be installed in the control board of your system using mounting
adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for conventional inverters (FVR-E11S series of 0.75
kW or below or 3.7 (4.0) kW). The FVR-E11S-2/4 (1.5 kW/2.2 kW) and FVR-E11S-7 (0.75 kW/1.5
kW) models may be replaced with the FRENIC-Mini series inverters without the use of adapters.
Table 6.16 Mounting Adapters
Applicable inverter model
Option model
MA-C1-0.75
FRENIC-Mini
FVR-E11S
FRN0.1C1S-2o**
FRN0.2C1S-2o**
FVR0.2E11S-2o
FRN0.4C1S-2o**
FVR0.4E11S-2o
FRN0.75C1S-2o**
FVR0.75E11S-2o
FRN0.1C1S-7o
FVR0.1E11S-7o
FRN0.2C1S-7o
FVR0.2E11S-7o
FRN0.4C1S-7o
FVR0.4E11S-7o
FVR0.1E11S-2o
FVR0.1E11S-2o
FRN0.2C1E-2o
FVR0.2E11S-2o
FRN0.4C1E-2o
FVR0.4E11S-2o
FRN0.75C1E-2o
FVR0.75E11S-2o
FRN0.1C1E-7o
FVR0.1E11S-7o
FRN0.2C1E-7o
FVR0.2E11S-7o
FRN0.4C1E-7o
FVR0.4E11S-7o
FRN3.7C1S-2o**
FRN3.7C1S-4o**
FVR3.7E11S-2o
FRN4.0C1S-4o**
FVR4.0E11S-4o
FRN2.2C1S-7o
FVR2.2E11S-7o
FVR3.7E11S-4o
Note 1: Asterisks (**) in the model names replace numbers which denote the following:
21: braking resistor built-in type; No number: standard type
The built-in braking resistor models are available for inverters of 1.5 kW or higher.
Note 2: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
6-25
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
MA-C1-3.7
FRN0.1C1E-2o
Chap. 6
FRN0.75C1S-7o
[ 2 ] Rail mounting bases
A rail mounting base allows any of the FRENIC-Mini series of inverter to be mounted on a DIN rail
(35 mm wide).
Table 6.17 Rail Mounting Base
Option model
Applicable inverter type
FRN0.1C1S-2o**
FRN0.2C1S-2o**
FRN0.4C1S-2o**
FRN0.75C1S-2o**
RMA-C1-0.75
FRN0.1C1S-7o
FRN0.2C1S-7o
FRN0.4C1S-7o
FRN0.75C1S-7o
FRN0.1C1E-2o
FRN0.2C1E-2o
FRN0.4C1E-2o
FRN0.75C1E-2o
FRN0.1C1E-7o
FRN0.2C1E-7o
FRN0.4C1E-7o
FRN1.5C1S-2o**
FRN2.2C1S-2o**
RMA-C1-2.2
FRN0.4C1S-4o**
FRN0.75C1S-4o**
FRN1.5C1S-4o**
FRN2.2C1S-4o**
FRN1.5C1S-7o
FRN0.4C1E-4o
FRN0.75C1E-4o
FRN0.75C1E-7o
FRN3.7C1S-2o**
RMA-C1-3.7
FRN3.7C1S-4o**
FRN4.0C1S-4o**
FRN2.2C1S-7o
FRN1.5C1E-2o
FRN2.2C1E-2o
FRN3.7C1E-2o
FRN1.5C1E-4o
FRN2.2C1E-4o
FRN3.7C1E-4o
FRN4.0C1E-4o
FRN1.5C1E-7o
FRN2.2C1E-7o
Note 1: Asterisks (**) in the model names replace numbers which denote the following:
21: braking resistor built-in type; No number: standard type
The built-in braking resistor models are available for inverters of 1.5 kW or higher.
Note 2: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
6-26
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 3 ] NEMA1 kit
NEMA1 kit, when fitted to the FRENIC-Mini series, protects the inverter body with the structure that
conforms to the NEMA1 standard (approved as UL TYPE1).
Table 6.18 NEMA1 Kit
MODEL A
Chap. 6
MODEL C
6-27
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
MODEL B
6.4.4 Meter options
[ 1 ] Frequency meters
Connect a frequency meter to analog signal output terminals [FMA] (+) and [11] (-) of the inverter to
measure the frequency component selected by function code F31. Figure 6.15 shows the dimensions
of the frequency meter and a connection example.
Model: TRM-45 (10 VDC, 1 mA)
Model: FM-60 (10 VDC, 1 mA)
Figure 6.15 Frequency Meter Dimensions and Connection Example
6-28
Part 4 Selecting Optimal
Inverter Model
Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES
Chapter 7
SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND
INVERTER CAPACITIES
This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection
procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It
also helps you select braking resistors.
Contents
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Equations for selections ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................................ 7-7
[ 1 ] General equation ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F .................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation........................................................................... 7-8
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia................................................................................................. 7-8
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time .......................................................................................... 7-10
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time.......................................................................................... 7-10
7.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor ............................................................................... 7-11
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy............................................................................................ 7-11
7.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor .................................................................................. 7-12
7.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor ..................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.1 Selection procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.2 Notes on selection ............................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
When selecting a general-purpose inverter, first select a motor and then inverter as follows:
(1) Key point for selecting a motor: Determine what kind of load machine is to be used, calculate its
moment of inertia, and then select the appropriate motor capacity
(2) Key point for selecting an inverter: Taking into account the operation requirements (e.g.,
acceleration time, deceleration time, and frequency in operation) of the load machine to be driven
by the motor selected in (1) above, calculate the acceleration/deceleration/braking torque.
This section describes the selection procedure for (1) and (2) above. First, it explains the output torque
obtained by using the motor driven by the inverter (FRENIC-Mini).
7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics
Figures 7.1 and 7.2 graph the output torque characteristics of motors at the rated output frequency
individually for 50 Hz and 60 Hz base. The horizontal and vertical axes show the output frequency and
output torque (%), respectively. Curves (a) through (f) depend on the running conditions.
Chap. 7
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
Figure 7.1 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 50 Hz)
7-1
Figure 7.2 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 60 Hz)
(1)
Continuous allowable driving torque (Curve (a) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
Curve (a) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous
rated current, where the motor cooling characteristic is taken into consideration. When the motor runs
at the base frequency of 60 Hz, 100 % output torque can be obtained; at 50 Hz, the output torque is
somewhat lower than that in commercial power, and it further lowers at lower frequencies. The
reduction of the output torque at 50 Hz is due to increased loss by inverter driving, and that at lower
frequencies is mainly due to heat generation caused by the decreased ventilation performance of the
motor cooling fan.
(2)
Maximum driving torque in a short time (Curves (b) and (c) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
Curve (b) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter rated current
in a short time (the output torque is 150% for one minute) when torque-vector control is enabled. At
that time, the motor cooling characteristics have little effect on the output torque.
Curve (c) shows an example of the torque characteristic when one class higher capacity inverter is
used to increase the short-time maximum torque. In this case, the short-time torque is 20 to 30%
greater than that when the standard capacity inverter is used.
(3)
Starting torque (around the output frequency 0 Hz in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
The maximum torque in a short time applies to the starting torque as it is.
7-2
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
(4)
Braking torque (Curves (d), (e), and (f) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
In braking the motor, kinetic energy is converted to electrical energy and regenerated to the DC link
bus capacitor (reservoir capacitor) of the inverter. Discharging this electrical energy to the braking
resistor produces a large braking torque as shown in curve (e). If no braking resistor is provided,
however, only the motor and inverter losses consume the regenerated braking energy so that the torque
becomes smaller as shown in curve (d).
Models of 1.5 kW to 3.7 kW, 3-phase 200/400 V are each available in a braking resistor built-in type
in which the braking torque equivalent to that of the optional braking resistor can be obtained without
an optional resistor.
& For more information, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.2.2 "Braking resistor built-in type."
When an optional braking resistor is used, the braking torque is allowable only for a short time. Its
time ratings are mainly determined by the braking resistor ratings. This manual and associated
catalogs list the allowable values (kW) obtained from the average discharging loss and allowable
values (kWs) obtained from the discharging capability that can be discharged at one time.
Note that the torque % value varies according to the inverter capacity.
Selecting an optimal braking unit enables a braking torque value to be selected comparatively freely in
the range below the short-time maximum torque in the driving mode, as shown in curve (f).
to Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors."
Chap. 7
& For braking-related values when the inverter and braking resistor are normally combined, refer
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
7-3
7.1.2
Selection procedure
Figure 7.3 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters. Items numbered (1) through
(5) are described on the following pages.
You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration
times. If "there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time" or "acceleration and
deceleration are frequent," then the selection procedure is more complex.
Figure 7.3 Selection Procedure
7-4
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
(1)
Calculating the load torque during constant speed running (For detailed calculation,
refer to Section 7.1.3.1)
It is essential to calculate the load torque during constant speed running for all loads.
First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a
tentative capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running
becomes higher than the load torque. To perform capacity selection efficiently, it is necessary to
match the rated speeds (base speeds) of the motor and load. To do this, select an appropriate
reduction-gear (mechanical transmission) ratio and the number of motor poles.
If the acceleration or deceleration time is not restricted, the tentative capacity can apply as a
defined capacity.
(2)
Calculating the acceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.2)
When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time, calculate it according to
the following procedure:
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
Calculate the moment of inertia for the load, referring to Section 7.1.3.2, "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation." For the motor, refer to the related motor catalogs.
Figure 7.4 Example Study of Minimum Acceleration Torque
7-5
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
3) Calculate the acceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (7.10) in Section 7.1.3.2, "Acceleration
and deceleration time calculation" to calculate the acceleration time. If the calculated
acceleration time is longer than the expected time, select the inverter and motor having one
class larger capacity and calculate it again.
Chap. 7
2) Calculate the minimum acceleration torque (See Figure 7.4)
The acceleration torque is the difference between the motor short-time output torque (base
frequency: 60 Hz) explained in Section 7.1.1 (2), "Maximum driving torque in a short time"
and the load torque (tL / hG) during constant speed running calculated in the above (1).
Calculate the minimum acceleration torque for the whole range of speed.
(3)
Deceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.2)
To calculate the deceleration time, check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the
whole range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time.
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
Same as for the acceleration time.
2) Calculate the minimum deceleration torque (See Figures 7.5 and 7.6.)
Same as for the acceleration time.
3) Calculate the deceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (7.11) to calculate the deceleration time in
the same way as for the acceleration time. If the calculated deceleration time is longer than
the requested time, select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and
calculate it again.
Figure 7.5
(4)
Example Study of Minimum
Deceleration Torque (1)
Figure 7.6
Example Study of Minimum
Deceleration Torque (2)
Braking resistor rating (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.3)
Braking resistor rating is classified into two types according to the braking periodic duty cycle.
1) When the periodic duty cycle is shorter than 100 sec:
Calculate the average loss to determine rated values.
2) When the periodic duty cycle is 100 sec or longer:
The allowable braking energy depends on the maximum regenerative braking power. The
allowable values are listed in Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors."
(5)
Motor RMS current (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.4)
In metal processing machine and materials handling machines requiring positioning control,
highly frequent running for a short time is repeated. In this case, calculate the maximum
equivalent RMS current value (effective value of current) not to exceed the allowable value
(rated current) for the motor.
7-6
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
7.1.3 Equations for selections
7.1.3.1
Load torque during constant speed running
[ 1 ] General equation
The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated. Calculation for driving a
load along a straight line with the motor is shown below.
Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed u (m/s) is F (N) and the motor speed for
driving this is NM (r/min), the required motor output torque tM (N·m) is as follows:
tM =
60 · u
F
( N · m)
·
2 p · NM hG
(7.1)
where, hG is Reduction-gear efficiency.
When the inverter brakes the motor, efficiency works inversely, so the required motor torque should
be calculated as follows:
tM =
60 · u
· F·h
( N · m)
G
2 p · NM
(7.2)
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F
Moving a load horizontally
A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 7.7. If the mass of the carrier
table is W0 kg, the load is W kg, and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is m, then the friction force
F (N) is expressed as follows, which is equal to a required force for driving the load:
F = ( W0 + W) · g · m ( N)
(7.3)
where, g is the gravity acceleration (» 9.8 m/s2).
Then, the required output torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows:
tM =
( W0 + W) · g · m
60 · u
( N · m)
·
2 p · NM
hG
(7.4)
Figure 7.7 Moving a Load Horizontally
7-7
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
The value F (N) in the above equations depends on the load type.
Chap. 7
(60·u) / (2p·NM) in the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed u around
the motor shaft.
7.1.3.2
Acceleration and deceleration time calculation
When an object whose moment of inertia is J (kg·m2) rotates at the speed N (r/min), it has the
following kinetic energy:
E=
J 2p · N 2
·(
) (J)
2
60
(7.5)
To accelerate the above rotational object, the kinetic energy will be increased; to decelerate the object,
the kinetic energy must be discharged. The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be
expressed as follows:
2p dN
( ) ( N · m)
(7.6)
60 dt
This way, the mechanical moment of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and
deceleration. First, calculation method of moment of inertia is described, then those for acceleration
and deceleration time are explained.
t=J·
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia
For an object that rotates around the rotation axis, virtually divide the object into small segments and
square the distance from the rotation axis to each segment. Then, sum the squares of the distances and
the masses of the segments to calculate the moment of inertia.
J = å ( Wi · ri 2 ) (kg · m 2 )
(7.7)
The following describes equations to calculate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load
systems.
(1)
Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder
The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder. The moment of inertia around the hollow
cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows, where the outer and inner diameters are D1 and D2 [m]
and total mass is W [kg] in Figure 7.8.
W · (D12 + D2 2 )
(kg · m 2 )
8
For a similar shape, a solid cylinder, calculate the moment of inertia as D2 is 0.
J=
(7.8)
Figure 7.8 Hollow Cylinder
(2)
For a general rotating body
Table 7.1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the
above cylindrical rotating body.
7-8
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
Table 7.1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies
Mass: W (kg)
Shape
Hollow cylinder
W=
W=
1
·A ·B·L·r
3
W=
1
1
2
2
· W · (L +
·A )
10
4
3
3
Jc » W· (L02 + · L0 · L + · L2 )
2
5
Jb =
3
2
·A ·L·r
4
1
2
·W ·A
3
W=
3
2
·A ·L·r
12
p
2
·D ·L·r
12
1
3
2
2
· W · (L +
·D )
10
8
3
3
Jc » W· (L02 + · L0 · L+ · L2 )
2
5
Jb =
J=
1
·A ·B·L·r
3
1
2
·W ·A
5
Main metal density (at 20°C) r(kg/m3) Iron: 7860, Copper: 8940, Aluminum: 2700
7-9
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
3
1
2
2
· W · (L +
·D )
12
4
1
3
2
·D )
J b = · W · (L2 +
3
16
1
Jc » W · (L02 + L0 · L+ · L2 )
3
1
2
2
· W · (A + B )
20
W=
p
2
·D ·L·r
4
Ja =
1
2
2
· W · (A + B )
12
W=
J=
Tetrahedron with an
equilateral triangular
base
p
2
·D ·L·r
12
3
2
·W·D
40
W=
J=
Triangular prism
p
3
·D ·r
6
W =A ·B·L·r
J=
Square cone (Pyramid,
rectangular base)
1
2
2
· W · (L + A )
12
1
1
2
2
· W · (L +
·A )
Jb =
12
4
1
J c » W · (L0 2 + L0 · L+ · L2 )
3
Ja =
Chap. 7
Rectangular prism
Moment of inertia:
J (kg·m2)
W=A ·B·L·r
1
2
·W· D
10
W=
J=
p
2
2
· (D1 - D 2 ) · L · r
4
1
2
2
· W · (D1 + D 2 )
8
W=
J=
Cone
Shape
Moment of inertia:
J (kg·m2)
J=
Sphere
Mass: W (kg)
(3)
For a load running horizontally
Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 7.7. If the table speed is u (m/s) when the
motor speed is NM (r/min), then an equivalent distance from the rotation axis is equal to 60·u / (2p·NM)
m. The moment of inertia of the table and load to the rotation axis is calculated as follows:
J=(
60 · u 2
) · ( W0 + W) (kg · m 2 )
2 p · NM
(7.9)
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time
Figure 7.9 shows a general load model. Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction-gear with
efficiency hG. The time required to accelerate this load to a speed of NM (r/min) is calculated with the
following equation:
t ACC =
J1 + J2 hG 2p · ( NM - 0)
·
(s)
60
tM - tL hG
(7.10)
where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
tM: Minimum motor output torque in driving motor (N·m)
tL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
hG: Reduction-gear efficiency.
As clarified in the above equation, the equivalent moment of inertia becomes (J1+J2/hG) by
considering the reduction-gear efficiency.
Figure 7.9 Load Model Including Reduction-gear
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time
In a load system shown in Figure 7.9, the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of NM
(r/min) is calculated with the following equation:
t DEC =
J1 + J 2 · hG 2p · (0 - N M)
·
(s)
60
tM - tL · h
(7.11)
G
where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
tM: Minimum motor output torque in braking (or decelerating) motor (N·m)
tL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
hG: Reduction-gear efficiency
In the above equation, generally output torque tM is negative and load torque tL is positive. So,
deceleration time becomes shorter.
7-10
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
7.1.3.3
Heat energy calculation of braking resistor
If the inverter brakes the motor, the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to
be regenerated into the inverter circuit. This regenerative energy is often consumed in so-called
braking resistors as heat. The following explains the braking resistor rating.
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy
In the inverter operation, one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated
at the time an object is moved by an inertial force.
Kinetic energy of a moving object
When an object with moment of inertia J (kg·m2) rotates at a speed N2 (r/min), its kinetic energy is as
follows:
E=
J 2 p · N2 2
·(
) (J)
2
60
(7.12)
»
1
2
(J)
· J · N2
182.4
(7.12)'
E=
(7.13)
1
2
2
· J · ( N2 - N1 ) ( J )
182.4
(7.13)'
The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 7.9 is calculated from the reduction-gear
efficiency hG and motor efficiency tM as follows:
E»
1 · ( + · h ) · h · ( 2 - 2 ) (J)
J1 J 2 G
N 2 N1
M
182.4
7-11
(7.14)
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
»
2
2
J éæ 2p · N 2 ö æ 2p · N1 ö ù
· êç
÷ -ç
÷ ú (J )
2 ëêè 60 ø è 60 ø ûú
Chap. 7
When this object is decelerated to a speed N1 (r/min), the output energy is as follows:
7.1.3.4
Calculating the RMS rating of the motor
In case of the load which is repeatedly and very frequently driven by a motor, the load current fluctuates
largely and enters the short-time rating range of the motor repeatedly. Therefore, you have to review the
thermal allowable rating of the motor. The heat value is assumed to be approximately proportional to the
square of the load current.
If an inverter drives a motor in duty cycles that are much shorter than the thermal time constant of the motor,
calculate the "equivalent RMS current" as mentioned below, and select the motor so that this RMS current
will not exceed the rated current of the motor.
Figure 7.10 Sample of the Repetitive Operation
First, calculate the required torque of each part based on the speed pattern. Then using the torquecurrent curve of the motor, convert the torque to the load current. The "equivalent RMS current, Ieq"
can be finally calculated by the following equation:
Ieq =
I1 2 • t1 + I2 2 • t 2 + I3 2 • t 3 + I4 2 • t 4 + I5 2 • t 5
t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 + t 5 + t 6
(A)
(7.15)
The torque-current curve for the dedicated motor is not available for actual calculation. Therefore,
calculate the load current I from the load torque t1 using the following equation (7.16). Then, calculate
the equivalent current Ieq:
2
æ τ
ö
I = ç 1 ´ It100 2 ÷ + Im1002 (A)
100
è
ø
(7.16)
Where, t1 is the load torque (%), It100 is the torque current, and Im100 is exciting current.
7-12
7.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor
7.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor
7.2.1
Selection procedure
The following three requirements must be satisfied simultaneously:
1) The maximum braking torque should not exceed values listed in Tables 6.7 to 6.9 in Chapter 6,
Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors." To use the maximum braking torque exceeding values in
those tables, select the braking resistor having one class larger capacity.
2) The discharge energy for a single braking action should not exceed the discharging capability
(kWs) listed in Tables 6.7 to 6.9 in Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking resistors." For detailed
calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.3 "Heat energy calculation of braking resistor."
3) The average loss that is calculated by dividing the discharge energy by the cyclic period must not
exceed the average loss (kW) listed in Tables 6.7 to 6.9 in Chapter 6, Section 6.4.1 [1] "Braking
resistors."
7.2.2 Notes on selection
7-13
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
Figure 7.11 Duty Cycle
Chap. 7
The braking time T1, cyclic period T0, and duty cycle %ED are converted under deceleration braking
conditions based on the rated torque as shown below. However, you do not need to consider these
values when selecting the braking resistor capacity.
Part 5 Specifications
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES
Chapter 8
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, and terminal functions for the
FRENIC-Mini series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment,
external dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.
Contents
8.1 Standard Models ......................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 Single-phase 200 V series ................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 Models Available on Order ......................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 EMC filter built-in type....................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-5
8.2.1.3 Single-phase 200 V series ........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2 Braking resistor built-in type............................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.2.1 Three-phase 200 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-7
8.2.2.2 Three-phase 400 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-8
8.3 Common Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.4 Terminal Specifications............................................................................................................................. 8-11
8.4.1 Terminal functions ............................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.4.2 Terminal block arrangement.............................................................................................................. 8-23
8.4.3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications.................................................................. 8-24
8.4.3.1 Main circuit terminals ............................................................................................................... 8-24
8.4.3.2 Control circuit terminal ............................................................................................................. 8-25
8.5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment ................................................................................... 8-26
8.5.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.5.2 Storage environment ......................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.5.2.1 Temporary storage..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.5.2.2 Long-term storage ..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.6 External Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 8-28
8.6.1 Standard models and models available on order (braking resistor built-in type) .............................. 8-28
8.6.2 Models available on order (EMC filter built-in type)........................................................................ 8-30
8.7 Connection Diagrams................................................................................................................................ 8-32
8.7.1 Keypad operation .............................................................................................................................. 8-32
8.7.2 Operation by external signal inputs................................................................................................... 8-33
8.8 Details of Protective Functions ................................................................................................................. 8-34
8.1 Standard Models
8.1 Standard Models
In the European version, these models listed in Section 8.1 are available on order.
8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 220 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Use the inverter at the current given in ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz (F 26
=4 to 15 ) or the ambient temperature is 40°C or higher.
Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as
option).
*10 Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
´ 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 (5.2.3))
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3 %, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*11 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 440 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
*8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as
option).
*9
Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
´ 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 (5.2.3))
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3 %, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*10 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination. Note that
the FRN4.0C1S-4 can be followed by E only.
8-2
8.1 Standard Models
8.1.3
Single-phase 200 V series
Chap. 8
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 220 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Use the inverter at the current given in ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz (F 26
=4 to 15 ) or the ambient temperature is 40°C or higher.
*5 Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
*6 Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
*7 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
*8 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
*9 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as
option).
*10 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-3
SPECIFICATIONS
*1
*2
*3
*4
8.2 Models Available on Order
8.2.1 EMC filter built-in type
In the European version, the EMC filter built-in type is provided as a standard model. In other versions, it is
available on order.
8.2.1.1
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Three-phase 200 V series
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 220 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Use the inverter at the current given in ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz (F 26
=4 to 15 ) or the ambient temperature is 40°C or higher.
Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as
option).
*10 Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
´ 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 (5.2.3))
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3 %, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*11 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-4
8.2 Models Available on Order
8.2.1.2
Three-phase 400 V series
Chap. 8
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 440 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
*8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as
option).
*9
Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
´ 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 (5.2.3))
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3 %, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*10 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination. Note that
the FRN4.0C1S-4 can be followed by E only.
8-5
SPECIFICATIONS
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
8.2.1.3
Single-phase 200 V series
*1
*2
*3
*4
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 220 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Use the inverter at the current given in ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz (F 26
=4 to 15 ) or the ambient temperature is 40°C or higher.
*5 Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
*6 Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
*7 Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
*8 Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
*9 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as
option).
*10 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-6
8.2 Models Available on Order
8.2.2
8.2.2.1
Braking resistor built-in type
Three-phase 200 V series
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 220 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Use the inverter at the current given in ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is higher than 4 kHz (F 26
=4 to 15 ) or the ambient temperature is 40°C or higher.
Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
´ 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 (5.2.3))
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3 %, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*10 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-7
8.2.2.2
Three-phase 400 V series
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
The rated capacity is for 440 V output voltage.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
Tested under the standard load condition (85% load for applicable motor rating).
Calculated under Fuji-specified conditions.
Indicates the value when using a DC reactor (option).
Average braking torque obtained with the AVR control off (F 05 =0 ). (Varies according to the
efficiency of the motor.)
*8
Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
´ 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 (5.2.3))
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3 %, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*9 Making FRENIC-Mini conform to category TYPE1 of the UL Standard (or NEMA1) requires an
optional NEMA1 kit. Note that the TYPE1-listed FRENIC-Mini should be used in the ambient
temperature range from -10 to +40°C.
Note: A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination. Note that
the FRN4.0C1S-4 can be followed by E only.
8-8
8.3 Common Specifications
8.3 Common Specifications
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
8-9
8-10
8.4 Terminal Specifications
8.4 Terminal Specifications
8.4.1 Terminal functions
Symbol
Name
Functions
L1/R, L2/S, Main circuit
power input
L3/T
Connects a three-phase power supply.
(three-phase 200V, 400V series)
L1/L, ¨,
L2/N
Connects a single-phase power supply. ¨ indicates
the no connection terminal.
(Single-phase 200V series)
Related
function
codes
Inverter output
Connects a three-phase induction motor.
P1, P(+)
For DC reactor
Connects a DC reactor.
P(+), N(-)
DC link bus
Connects a DC power device.
P(+), DB
For braking
resistor
Used for connection of the optional external braking
resistor. (Wiring is required even for the braking
resistor built-in type.)
G
Grounding
Grounding terminal for inverter chassis
(Two terminals are provided.)
[13]
Potentiometer
power supply
Power supply (+10 VDC) for frequency command
potentiometer (Potentiometer: 1 to 5 kW)
Allowable maximum output current: 10 mA
[12]
Voltage input
The frequency is set according to the external analog
input voltage.
(Normal
operation)
0 to +10 VDC/0 to 100 %
(Inverse
operation)
+10 to 0 VDC/0 to 100 % (switchable by digital input
signal)
(PID control)
Used for reference signal (PID process command) or
PID feedback signal.
E61
(Frequency
auxiliary setting)
Used as additional auxiliary setting to various main
settings of frequency.
E61
Chap. 8
U, V, W
F18,
C32 to
C34
0 to +5 VDC/0 to 100 % or +1 to +5 VDC/0 to 100 %
can be selected by function code setting.
Electric characteristics of terminal [12]
22 kW
• Allowable maximum input voltage: 15 VDC
(If the input voltage is +10 VDC or over, the inverter assumes it to be
+10 VDC.)
• Input impedance:
[C1]
Current input
The frequency is set according to the external analog
input current command.
(Normal
operation)
+4 to +20 mADC/0 to 100%
(Inverse
operation)
+20 to +4 mADC/0 to 100 % (switchable by digital
input signal)
(PID control)
Used for reference signal (PID process command) or
PID feedback signal.
8-11
F18,
C37 to
C39
E62
SPECIFICATIONS
Analog input
Main circuit
Classification
Main circuit and analog input terminals
Classification
Symbol
Analog input
[C1]
Name
Functions
(For PTC
thermistor)
Connects a PTC thermistor for motor protection.
(Connect an 1 kW external resistor to terminal [13] [C1].)
H26,
H27
(Frequency
auxiliary setting)
Used as additional auxiliary setting to various main
settings of frequency.
E62
Electric characteristics of terminal [C1]
250 W
• Allowable maximum input current: +30 mADC
(If the input current exceeds +20 mADC, the inverter will limit it at +20
mADC.)
• Input impedance:
[11]
Related
function
codes
Analog common
Common for analog input signals ([13], [12], [C1])
(Isolated from terminals [CM] and [Y1E].)
8-12
Classification
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Symbol
Name
Functions
Related
function
codes
Analog input
• Since weak analog signals are handled, these signals are especially susceptible to the
external noise effects. Route the wiring as short as possible (within 20 m) and use
shielded wires. In principle, ground the shielding layer of the shielded wires; if effects
of external inductive noises are considerable, connection to terminal [11] may be
effective. As shown in Figure 8.1, ground the single end of the shield to enhance the
shielding effect.
• Use a twin contact relay for weak signals if the relay is used in the control circuit. Do
not connect the relay's contact to terminal [11].
• When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal, a
malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter. If this happens,
according to the circumstances, connect a ferrite core (a toroidal core or an equivalent)
to the device outputting the analog signal and/or connect a capacitor having the good
cut-off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in
Figure 8.2.
• Do not apply a voltage of +7.5 VDC or higher to terminal [C1]. Doing so could damage
the internal control circuit.
Chap. 8
Figure 8.2 Example of Electric Noise Prevention
8-13
SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 8.1 Connection of Shielded Wire
Symbol
Name
Related
function
codes
Functions
The following features can be set to terminals [X1] - E01 to
[X3], [FWD] and [REV] and the commands function E03
according to the input signals at the terminals.
The commands (FWD) and (REV) are factory setting
assigned at terminals [FWD] and [REV], respectively.
E98,
Common features
E99
• Sink/Source switching feature:
[X1]
Digital input 1
[X2]
Digital input 2
[X3]
Digital input 3
[FWD]
Forward
operation
command
[REV]
in jumper switch.
Reverse operation
• Normal/negative logic input switching feature:
command
Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of
terminals between [X1] to [X3], [FWD] or [REV],
and [CM]. If the logic value for ON between [X1]
and [CM] is 1 in the normal logic system, for
example, OFF is 1 in the negative logic system.
Digital input
Classification
Digital input terminals
Sink and source can be switched by using the built-
Digital input circuit specifications
Item
Operation
voltage
(SINK)
Min.
Max.
ON level
0V
2V
OFF level
22V
27V
Operation ON level
voltage
(SOURCE) OFF level
22V
27V
0V
2V
Operation current at ON
2.5mA
(Input voltage at 0 V)
5mA
Allowable leakage
current at OFF
0.5mA
-
[PLC]
PLC signal
power
Connects to PLC output signal power supply.
(Rated voltage: +24 VDC, Maximum output current:
50 mA)
[CM]
Digital common
Common for digital input signals
(Isolated from terminals [11] and [Y1E].)
8-14
Classification
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Symbol
Name
Functions
Related
function
codes
n Turning ON or OFF [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD], or [REV] using a relay contact
Figure 8.3 shows two examples of a circuit that turns ON or OFF control signal input
[X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD], or [REV] using a relay contact. Circuit (a) has a connecting
jumper applied to SINK, whereas circuit (b) has it applied to SOURCE.
NOTE: To configure this kind of circuit, use a highly reliable relay
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW.)
(a) With a jumper applied to SINK
(b) With a jumper applied to SOURCE
• Connect the + node of the external power source (which should be isolated from the
PLC's power) to terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
• Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.
(a) With a jumper applied to SINK
(b) With a jumper applied to SOURCE
Figure 8.4 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC
& For details about the jumper setting, refer to the FRENIC-Mini Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0791-E),
Chapter 2, Section 2.3.8 "Switching of SINK/SOURCE (jumper switch)."
8-15
SPECIFICATIONS
n Turning ON or OFF [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD], or [REV] using a programmable
logic controller (PLC)
Figure 8.4 shows two examples of a circuit that turns ON or OFF control signal input
[X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD], or [REV] using a programmable logic controller (PLC). Circuit
(a) has a connecting jumper applied to SINK, whereas circuit (b) has it applied to
SOURCE.
In circuit (a) below, short-circuiting or opening the transistor's open collector circuit in
the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal [X1], [X2], [X3],
[FWD], or [REV]. When using this type of circuit, observe the following:
Chap. 8
Digital input
Figure 8.3 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact
Classification
< Commands assigned at digital input terminals
Command
Command name
(FWD)
Run forward
command
[FWD] - [CM] ON:
Functions
Related
function
codes
The motor runs forward.
E98 = 98
[FWD] - [CM] OFF: The motor decelerates and
stops.
When the [FWD] - [CM] and [REV] - [CM] are
simultaneously ON, the inverter immediately
decelerates and stops the motor. This command can be
set only for terminals [FWD] and [REV].
(REV)
Run reverse
command
[REV] - [CM] ON: The motor runs reverse.
[REV] - [CM] OFF: The motor decelerates and
stops.
E99 = 99
When [FWD] - [CM] and [REV] - [CM] are
simultaneously ON, the inverter immediately
decelerates and stops the motor. This command can be
set only for terminals [FWD] and [REV].
(SS1)
(SS2)
Multistep
frequency
selection
Commands assigned on digital input terminals
(SS4)
Select 2 (0 and 1) step multi frequency running.
E01 = 0
Select 4 (0 to 3) step multi frequency running.
E02 = 1
Select 8 (0 to 7) step multi frequency running.
Multistep frequency 0 indicates the frequency set by
the keypad, built-in potentiometer or analog signal.
E03 = 2
C05 to
C11 =
0.00 to
400.0
Hz
Assigns the commands (SS1), (SS2), and (SS4) to
terminals [X1], [X2], and [X3], respectively.
(RT1)
ACC/DEC time
selection
[X1] - [CM]: ON
Acceleration and deceleration E01 = 4
time 2 is effective.
E10,
[X1] - [CM]:OFF
Acceleration and deceleration E11 =
time 1 is effective.
0.00 to
(Acceleration and deceleration 3600 s
time by link operation is
effective.)
S08, S09
(e.g.) Assigns the command (RT1) to terminal [X1]. = 0.00 to
3600 s
Switchable during the acceleration or
deceleration operation
(HLD)
3-wire operation
stop command
Used for 3-wire operation.
[X2] - [CM] ON:
The inverter self-holds the
command (FWD) or (REV).
[X2] - [CM] OFF:
The inverter releases selfholding.
(e.g.) Assigns the command (HLD) to terminal [X2].
8-16
E02 = 6
Classification
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Command
Command name
Functions
(BX)
Coast-to-stop
command
[X3] - [CM] ON:
(RST)
Alarm reset
[X1] - [CM] ON:
Related
function
codes
The inverter output is stopped E03 = 7
immediately and the motor will
coast-to-stop.
(No alarm signal will be output.)
(e.g.) Assigns the command (BX) to terminal [X3].
Alarm status is reset.
E01 = 8
(ON signal should be held for 0.1 s or longer.)
(e.g.) Assigns the command (RST) to terminal [X1].
(THR)
Alarm from
external
equipment
[X2] - [CM] OFF:
The inverter output is stopped
and the motor coasts-to-stop.
E02 = 9
Alarm signal for the alarm code OH2 will be output.
(e.g.) Assigns the command (THR) to terminal [X2].
(JOG)
Jogging operation
[X3] - [CM] ON:
Jogging operation is effective.
(e.g.) Assigns the command (JOG) to terminal [X3].
C20 =
0.00 to
400.0
Hz
H54 =
0.00 to
3600 s
(WE-KP)
Freq. set2/
Freq. set1
Write enable for
keypad
[X1] - [CM] ON:
Frequency command source 2
is effective.
E01 = 11
(e.g.) Assigns the command (Hz2/Hz1) to terminal
[X1].
F01 = 0
to 4
C30 = 0
to 4
[X2] - [CM] ON:
E02 = 19
The function code data can be
changed from the keypad.
(Data can be changed when this function is not
allocated.)
(e.g.) Assigns the command (WE-KP) to terminal
[X2].
(Hz/PID)
PID control
cancel
[X3] - [CM] ON:
The PID control is cancelled,
and the set frequency is set by
the Multistep frequency,
keypad or analog input.
E03 = 20
J01 to
J06
F01 = 0
to 4
C30 = 0
& For details about J01 to J06 data, refer to Chapter 9, to 4
(e.g.) Assigns the command (Hz/PID) to terminal
[X3].
"FUNCTION CODES."
(IVS)
Inverse mode
changeover
[X1] - [CM] ON:
Normal mode operation or
inverse mode operation can be
changed in the frequency
command and PID control.
(e.g.) Assigns the command (IVS) to terminal [X1].
8-17
E01 = 21
SPECIFICATIONS
(Hz2/Hz1)
Chap. 8
Commands assigned on digital input terminals
(FWD) or (REV) ON: The inverter runs the motor
with jogging frequency.
E03 = 10
Classification
Commands assigned on digital input terminals
Functions
Related
function
codes
Command
Command name
(LE)
Link enable
[X2] - [CM] ON:
(PID-RST)
PID integral/
differential reset
[X3] - [CM] ON:
PID integration and
differentiation are reset.
(e.g.) Assigns the command (PID-RST) to terminal
[X3].
E03 = 33
(PID-HLD)
PID integral hold
[X1] - [CM] ON:
E01 = 34
The link operation is effective. E02 = 24
(RS485 communications card
(option) or models available on H30 = 3
order)
y99 = 1
(e.g.) Assigns the command (LE) to terminal [X2].
PID integration is temporarily
stopped.
(e.g.) Assigns the command (PID-HLD) to terminal
[X1].
8-18
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Classification
Analog output, transistor output, and relay output terminals
Symbol
[FMA]
Related
function
codes
Name
Functions
Analog monitor
The monitor signal for analog DC voltage (0 to +10
VDC) is output. The signal functions can be selected
with the function code F31 from the following.
F30, F31
• Output frequency (before slip compensation)
Analog output
• Output frequency (after slip compensation)
• Output current
• Output voltage
• Input power
• PID feedback value
• DC link bus voltage
• Analog output test (+)
(Output voltage: 0 to +10 VDC,
maximum current: 2 mA
Up to two analog voltmeters can be connected.)
[11]
Analog common
Common for analog output signal ([FMA])
This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals
[CM] and [Y1E].
Transistor output
Commands listed below can be assigned to terminal
[Y1] and the signal is output according to the
command.
Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the
terminals between [Y1] and [Y1E]. If the logic value
for ON between [Y1] and [Y1E] is 1 in the normal
logic system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative
logic system.
Digital output circuit specification
Transistor output
Item
Max.
Operation
ON level
2V
voltage
OFF level
27V
Maximum load current at ON
50mA
Leakage current at OFF
0.1mA
Figure 8.5 shows examples of connection between the
control circuit and a PLC.
• Check the polarity of an external power
input.
• To connect a control relay, connect a
surge absorbing diode across the coil of
the relay.
[Y1E]
Transistor output
common
Common for transistor output signal
(Isolated from terminals [CM] and [11].)
8-19
SPECIFICATIONS
Normal/negative logic output switching feature:
E20
Chap. 8
[Y1]
Classification
Symbol
Name
Functions
Related
function
codes
n Connecting Programmable Controller (PLC) to Terminal [Y1]
Transistor output
Figure 8.5 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the
inverter’s control circuit and a PLC. In example (a), the input circuit of the PLC serves as
the sink for the control circuit, whereas in example (b), it serves as the source for the
control circuit.
(a) PLC serving as Sink
(b) PLC serving as Source
Figure 8.5 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit
Relay output
[30A],
[30B],
[30C]
Alarm relay
output (for any
fault)
(1) Outputs a contact signal (SPDT) when a
E27
protective function is activated to stop the motor.
Contact rating: 250 VAC 0.3A cosf = 0.3
+48 VDC, 0.5A
(2) Possible to select a command similar to terminal
[Y1] for transistor output signal and use it for
signal output.
(3) The normal/negative logic output changeover is
applicable to these contact outputs: "Terminals
[30A] and [30C] are short-circuited for ON signal
output" or "terminals [30B] and [30C] are shortcircuited (non-excite) for ON signal output"
8-20
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Classification
< Signals assigned at transistor output terminal
Related
function
codes
Signal name
Functions
(RUN)
Inverter running
Comes ON when the output frequency is higher than
start frequency.
(RUN2)
Inverter output on
Comes ON when the main circuit (gate) is turned ON. E20 = 35
(FAR)
Speed/freq.
arrival
Comes ON when the motor speed reaches the set
frequency. (Condition: Run command is ON.)
Signal
E20 = 0
E20 = 1
(Hysteresis width (fixed): 2.5 Hz)
(FDT)
Speed/freq.
detection
Comes ON when the output frequency is above the
detection level and goes OFF when below the
detection level.
E20 = 2
E31
(LU)
undervoltage
detection
Comes ON when the inverter stops its output because E20 = 3
of undervoltage while the run command is ON.
(IOL)
Inverter output
limit (limit on
current)
Comes ON when the inverter is limiting the current.
Auto-restarting
Comes ON during auto-restarting operation (after
instantaneous power failure and until completion of
restart).
E20 = 6
Overload early
warning (for
motor)
Comes ON when the calculated value of electronic
thermal relay is higher than the preset alarm level.
E20 = 7
Auto-resetting
Comes ON during auto-resetting mode.
E20 = 26
(IPF)
(OL)
F43, F44
F14
F10 to
F12
H04,
H05
(LIFE)
(OLP)
(ID)
(IDL)
(ALM)
Lifetime alarm
Outputs alarm signal according to the preset lifetime
level.
E20 = 30
H42,
H43
Overload
Comes ON during inverter control for avoiding
preventive control overload.
E20 = 36
Current detection
Comes ON when a current larger than the set value
has been detected for the timer-set time.
E20 = 37
Small current
detection
Comes ON when a current smaller than the set value
has been detected for the timer-set time.
E20 = 41
Alarm relay (for
any fault)
Alarm signal is output as the transistor output signal.
E20 = 99
8-21
H70
E34,
E35
E34,
E35
SPECIFICATIONS
(TRY)
E20 = 5
Chap. 8
Signals assigned at transistor output terminal
(Hysteresis width (fixed): 1.0 Hz)
Communication
Classification
RS485 communications port
Connector
RS485
port*
Name
Functions
RS485
communications
I/O
(1) Used to connect the inverter with PC or PLC
using RS485 port.
(2) Used to connect the inverter with the remote
keypad. The inverter supplies the power to the
remote keypad through the extension cable.
Related
function
codes
H30,
y01 to
y10
y99
RJ-45 connector is used.
For the transmission specifications, refer to Chapter 6,
Section 6.4.2 [2] "RS485 communications card."
* This terminal is valid when the standard inverter is equipped with RS485 communications card (option).
• Route the wiring of the control terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as
possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
• Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the
main circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).
8-22
8.4 Terminal Specifications
8.4.2 Terminal block arrangement
The terminal blocks shows below. They differ according to the power supply voltage and the
applicable motor rating.
& For details about terminal arrangement, refer to Section 8.4.3, "Terminal arrangement diagram
and screw specifications."
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o
3.7
FRN3.7C1n-4o
4.0
FRN4.0C1n-4o
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-7o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-7o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-7o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-7o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-7o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
Refer to
Figure A
Figure B
SPECIFICATIONS
Singlephase
200 V
Inverter type
Chap. 8
Threephase
400 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Figure A
Figure B
Notes 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
8-23
8.4.3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications
8.4.3.1
Main circuit terminals
The table below shows the main circuit terminal arrangements, screw sizes, and tightening torque.
Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types. Two terminals designed for
in Figures A to D make no distinction between a power supply
grounding shown as the symbol,
source (a primary circuit) and a motor (a secondary circuit).
Table 8.1 Main Circuit Terminal Arrangements, Screw Sizes, and Tightening Torque
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Inverter type
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o
Refer to
Figure A
3.7, 4.0 FRN3.7C1n-2o
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o Figure B
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o
3.7
FRN3.7C1n-4o
4.0
FRN4.0C1n-4o
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-7o
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-7o
Single- 0.4
phase
200 V 0.75
FRN0.4C1n-7o
FRN0.75C1n-7o
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-7o
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
Threephase
400 V
Figure C
Figure D
Notes 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
Screw size
Tightening torque
M 3.5
M 4.0
1.2 N·m
1.8 N·m
8-24
8.4 Terminal Specifications
8.4.3.2
Control circuit terminal
The diagram and table below show the control circuit terminal arrangement, screw sizes, and
tightening torque. They are the same in all FRENIC-Mini models.
Y1
Y1E
11
30A
30B
C1
FMA
12
13
PLC
11
X1
X2
FWD
REV
CM
X3
CM
30C
Screw size: M 2
Screw size: M 2.5
Screw size
Tightening torque
M 2.0
M 2.5
0.2 N·m
0.4 N·m
Other than
those above
Screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver
(JIS standard)
AWG22 to AWG18
(0.34 to 0.75 mm2)
6 to 8 mm
2.7 (W) x 1.8 (H) mm
No. 1 screw tip
Phillips screwdriver for
precision machine
(JCIS standard)
AWG24 to AWG18
(0.25 to 0.75 mm2)
5 to 7 mm
1.7 (W) x 1.6 (H) mm
No. 0 screw tip
Recommended stick terminal
Manufacturing company: WAGO Company of Japan., Ltd.
Type (216-□□□)
Screw size
M2
M 2.5
Wire size
w/ isolation collar
w/o isolation collar
Short type
Long type
Short type
Long type
2
AWG24 (0.25 mm )
321
301
151
131
AWG22 (0.34 mm2)
322
302
152
132
2
AWG20 (0.50 mm )
221
201
121
101
2
222
202
122
102
AWG18 (0.75 mm )
The recommended crimping tool is Name: Variocrimp 4, Model No.: 206-204
8-25
SPECIFICATIONS
[30A], [30B],
[30C]
Bared wire
length
Allowable wire
size
Chap. 8
Terminal
symbol
Stick terminal
(see the table below)
Opening dimension
in the control
terminals
8.5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment
8.5.1
Operating environment
The operating environment for FRENIC-Mini shows below.
Item
Ambient temperature *1
Specifications
Careful site for installation
-10 to +50°C
Places around heating machines like furnace,
constant temperature bath, or boiler
Enclosed cases or rooms
Tropical region or outdoor machinery
Cold room or cold region
Relative humidity
5 to 95% (No condensation)
Inside of dryer machines for brewing, food or
wood processing
Transportation equipment for frozen food
Inside of tunnel
Places where there is much ice and snow
Places where water or steam is used
Clean
Foundry, cement plant, spinning mill,
fertilizer mill, flouring mill, iron factory,
timber mill, construction site, the places
around grinder
Salinity
Little
(0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
Places like coast or shipping that is susceptible
to sea salt
Oil mist
None
Places where oil like grinding fluid gets mist
Flammable gas
None
Chemical factory, oil refinery, fuel gas
facility, gas station, water treatment plant, hot
spring region, geothermal power station,
colliery
Altitude *3
1000 m or lower
Mountainous region, heights
Atmospheric pressure
86 - 106 kPa
Vibration
3 mm
2 to 9 Hz or lower
(Max. amplitude)
9.8 m/s 2 9 - 20 Hz or lower
Atmosphere
*2
Dust
Corrosive gas
―
Vehicle, shipping, machinery
2.0 m/s 2
20 - 55 Hz or lower
2
55 - 200 Hz or lower
1.0 m/s
*1 The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.
*2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat
sink in the inverter. If the inverter is to be used in such an environment, install it in the control board of your system or other
dustproof containers.
*3 If you use the inverter in altitude above 1000 m, you should apply a reduction factor of withstand voltage test and an output
current reduction factor as listed below when selecting the inverter properly.
Altitude (m)
Reduction factor of
withstand voltage test
Output current
reduction factor
1000 or lower
1.00
1.00
1000 - 1500
0.95
0.97
1500 - 2000
0.90
0.95
2000 - 2500
0.85
0.91
2500 - 3000
0.80
0.88
8-26
8.5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment
8.5.2 Storage environment
8.5.2.1
Temporary storage
Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below.
Item
Specifications
Storage
temperature
-25 to +70°C
Relative
humidity
5 to 95% *2
Atmosphere
The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable gases, oil
mist, vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere must contain only a low level of
salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
*1
Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or
condensation or freezing
Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa (during storage)
pressure
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
*1 Assuming a comparatively short time storage, e.g., during transportation or the like.
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected
to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.
(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in high-humidity environment, put a drying agent (such as silica gel)
in the airtight package described in item (2).
8.5.2.2
Long-term storage
The long-term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the
storage site. General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the ambient temperature range should be within
the range from -10 to 30 °C. This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from
deterioration.
(2) The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture. Add a drying agent inside the
package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or control board at construction sites where it
may be subjected to humidity, dust or dirt, then remove the inverter and store it in a preferable
environment.
Precautions for storage over 1 year
If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes.
Do not connect the inverters to motors or run the motor.
8-27
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements, wrap the inverter in an airtight
vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
Chap. 8
Precautions for temporary storage
8.6 External Dimensions
The diagrams below show external dimensions of FRENIC-Mini according to the type.
8.6.1 Standard models and models available on order (braking
resistor built-in type)
Note 1) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
2) Asterisks (**) in the above table replace numbers which denote the following:
21: Braking resistor built-in type, None: Standard.
8-28
8.6 External Dimensions
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Note 1) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
2) Asterisks (**) in the above table replace numbers which denote the following:
21: Braking resistor built-in type, None: Standard.
8-29
8.6.2
Models available on order (EMC filter built-in type)
Note: # in the above table denotes the shipping destination as shown below.
Shipping destination (Version)/
Language in user's manual
Shipping destination code
Asia/English
A
China/Chinese
C
EU/ English
E
Japan/Japanese
J
8-30
8.6 External Dimensions
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
8-31
8.7 Connection Diagrams
8.7.1 Keypad operation
The connection diagram below shows an example for a keypad operation with the built-in
potentiometer and keys.
(Note 1) Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring. At this
time, ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
(Note 2) A magnetic contactor (MC) should, if necessary, be mounted independent of the MCCB or ELCB to cut off the power fed to
the inverter. Refer to page 6-7 for details. MCs or solenoids that will be installed close to the inverter require surge
absorbers to be connected in parallel to their coils.
(Note 3) In the EU version except the three-phase 200 V series of inverter, the digital input terminals are switched to the SOURCE
side.
8-32
8.7 Connection Diagrams
8.7.2 Operation by external signal inputs
The basic connection diagram below shows an example for operation by external input signals.
Chap. 8
(Note 2) A magnetic contactor (MC) should, if necessary, be mounted independent of the MCCB or ELCB to cut off the power fed to
the inverter. Refer to page 6-7 for details. MCs or solenoids that will be installed close to the inverter require surge
absorbers to be connected in parallel to their coils.
(Note 3) When connecting a DC reactor (optional accessory), remove the jumper bar from terminals [P1] and [P+].
(Note 4) (THR) function can be used by assigning code "9" (Alarm from external equipment) to any of terminals [X1] to [X3],
[FWD] or [REV] (function code E01 to E03, E98, or E99). For details, refer to Chapter 9.
(Note 5) Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device (external potentiometer) between the terminals [11], [12],
and [13] instead of inputting voltage signal (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) between the terminals [12] and [11].
(Note 6) For the wiring of the control circuit, use shielded or twisted wires. When using shielded wires, connect the shields to earth.
To prevent malfunction due to noise, keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible
(recommended: 10 cm or longer), and never set them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit wiring with
the main circuit wiring, set them at right angles.
(Note 7) In the EU version except the three-phase 200 V series of inverter, the digital input terminals are switched to the SOURCE
side.
8-33
SPECIFICATIONS
(Note 1) Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring. At this
time, ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
8.8 Details of Protective Functions
The table below lists the name of the protective functions, description, display of LED monitor,
whether alarms output or not at terminals [30A/B/C], and related function codes. If the LED monitor
displays an alarm code, remove the cause of activation of the alarm function by referring to
FRENIC-Mini Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0791-E), Chapter 6, "TROUBLESHOOTING."
Name
Overcurrent
protection
Overvoltage
protection
Undervoltage
protection
Related
Alarm
LED
function
output
monitor
code
displays [30A/B/C]
Description
• Stops the inverter output to protect
the inverter from an overcurrent
resulting from overload.
• Stops the inverter output to protect
the inverter from an overcurrent due
to a short circuit in the output circuit.
• Stops the inverter output to protect
the inverter from an overcurrent due
to a ground fault in the output
circuit. This protection is effective
only when the inverter starts. If you
turn ON the inverter without
removing the ground fault, this
protection may not work.
During
acceleration
0C 1
During
deceleration
0C 2
During
running at
constant
speed
0C 3
The inverter stops the inverter output
upon detecting an overvoltage
condition (400 VDC for 3-phase 200 V
and 1-phase 200 V series; 800 VDC for
3-phase 400 V series) in the DC link
circuit.
During
acceleration
0U 1
During
deceleration
0U 2
During
This protection is not assured if excess running at
constant
AC line voltage is applied
speed
inadvertently.
(Stopped)
0U 3
Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus
voltage drops below the undervoltage level (200
VDC for 3-phase 200 V and 1-phase 200 V series;
400 VDC for 3-phase 400 V series).
LU
Detects input phase loss, stopping the inverter
output. This function prevents the inverter from
undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input
phase loss or inter-phase voltage unbalance and may
damage the inverter.
If connected load is light or a DC reactor is
connected to the inverter, this function will not
detect input phase loss if any.
---
Yes
---
Yes
F14
(This alarm
may not be
outputted
depending
upon the data
setting of the
function
code.)
However, if data "4 or 5" is selected for F14, no
alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage
drops.
Input phase loss
protection
Yes
L
Yes
H98
0 PL
Yes
H98
In single-phase series of inverters, this function is
disabled by factory default.
Output phase
loss protection
Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start
of running and during running, stopping the inverter
output.
"---": Not applicable.
8-34
Overheat protection
8.8 Details of Protective Functions
Description
Inverter
• Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess
heat sink temperature in case of cooling fan failure
or overload.
0H 1
Yes
H43
Braking
resistor
• When the built-in or external braking resistor
overheats, discharging and the operation of the
inverter are stopped.
* It is necessary to set the function code data
according to the braking resistor used (built-in or
external).
db H
Yes
F50, F51
0L U
Yes
---
0L 1
Yes
Overload
protection
Electronic
thermal
overload
relay
Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) internal temperature
calculated from the output current and cooling fan
temperature detection is over the preset value.
In the following cases, the inverter stops running the
motor to protect the motor in accordance with the
electronic thermal overload protection.
• Protects general-purpose motors over the entire
frequency range.
• Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency
range.
* The operation level and thermal time constant can
be set.
F10
F11, F12
A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for
motor protection.
A PTC thermistor is connected between terminals
[C1] and [11], and a 1-kW external resistor is
connected between terminals [13] and [C1].
0H 4
Yes
H26,
H27
Overload
early
warning
Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before
the motor is stopped by the electronic thermal
overload protection for the purpose of protecting the
motor.
---
---
E34,
E35
Stall prevention
Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is
active.
Instantaneous overcurrent limiting:
Operates if the inverter's output current exceeds the
instantaneous overcurrent limit level, avoiding
tripping of the inverter (during constant speed
operation or during acceleration).
---
---
H12
External alarm
input
Stops the inverter output with an alarm through the
digital input signal (THR).
0H 2
Yes
E01 to
E03,
E98,
E99
Alarm relay
output
(for any fault)
The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the
inverter issues an alarm and stops the inverter
output.
---
Yes
E20,
E27,
E01 to
E03,
E98,
E99
< Alarm Reset >
The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the
or by the digital input signal (RST).
key
< Saving the alarm history and detailed data >
The information on the previous 4 alarms can be
saved and displayed.
"---": Not applicable.
8-35
SPECIFICATIONS
PTC
thermistor
Chap. 8
Motor protection
Related
Alarm
LED
function
output
monitor
code
displays [30A/B/C]
Name
Related
Alarm
LED
function
output
monitor
code
displays [30A/B/C]
Name
Description
Memory error
The inverter checks memory data after power-on and
when the data is written. If a memory error is
detected, the inverter stops.
E 1
Yes
Remote keypad
communications
error
The inverter stops by detecting a communication
error between the inverter and the remote keypad
(option) during operation from the remote keypad.
E 2
Yes
CPU error
If the inverter detects a CPU error caused by noise or
some other factor, the inverter stops.
E 3
Yes
---
Operation
Protection
STOP key
priority
Pressing the
key on the keypad
forces the inverter to decelerate and
stop the motor even if the inverter is
running by any run commands given
via the terminals or communications
(link operation). After the motor
stops, the inverter issues alarm "E
6."
E 6
Yes
H96
Start check
function
Inverters prohibit any run operations
and displays "E 6 " on the LED of
keypad if any run command is present
when:
- Powering up
- An alarm (the
key turned ON)
is released or an alarm reset (RST)
is input.
---
F02
(This alarm
may not be
outputted
depending
upon the data
setting of the
function
code.)
- Link command (LE) has switched
inverter operation and the run
command in the source to be
switched is active.
RS485
communication
error
On detecting an RS485 communication error, the
inverter displays the alarm code.
E 8
Yes
---
Data save error
during
undervoltage
If the data could not be saved during activation of the
undervoltage protection function, the inverter
displays the alarm code.
E F
Yes
---
Overload
prevention
control
In the event of overheating of the cooling fan or an
overload condition (alarm display: OH1 or OLU ),
the output frequency of the inverter is reduced to keep
the inverter from tripping.
---
---
H70
"---": Not applicable.
8-36
Chapter 9
FUNCTION CODES
This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC-Mini series
of inverters and details of each function code.
Contents
9.1 Function Code Tables.................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Details of Function Codes......................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ...................................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)............................................................................................. 9-33
9.2.3 C codes (Control functions of frequency) ......................................................................................... 9-46
9.2.4 P codes (Motor parameters) .............................................................................................................. 9-49
9.2.5 H codes (High performance functions) ............................................................................................. 9-51
9.2.6 J codes (Application functions)......................................................................................................... 9-64
9.2.7 y codes (Link functions).................................................................................................................... 9-70
9.1 Function Code Tables
9.1 Function Code Tables
Function codes set up the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters to match your system requirements.
Each function code consists of a 3-letter string. The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group
and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group. The function
codes are classified into seven groups: Fundamental Functions (F codes), Extension Terminal
Functions (E codes), Control Functions of Frequency (C codes), Motor Parameters (P codes), High
Performance Functions (H codes), Application Functions (J codes), and Link Functions (y codes).
Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the motor is running
Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the
motor is running:
-
-
Function codes marked with N (in the "Change when running" column of the function code tables
given below): The data of these codes cannot be changed when the motor is running.
and
keys
Function codes marked with Y: The data of these codes can be changed with
regardless of whether the motor is running or not. Pressing the
key will make the change
effective and save it into the inverter's memory.
Function codes marked with Y*: The difference from function codes marked with Y and these is
that if the data of these codes is changed, the change will immediately take effect; however, the
key. If you press
change is not saved into the inverter's memory. To save the change, press the
the
key to exit the current state without pressing the
key, then the changed data will be
discarded and the previous data will take effect for the current inverter operation.
Copying data
Y: Will be copied unconditionally.
Y1: Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter.
Y2: Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter.
N: Will not be copied.
If necessary, manually set the function code data that cannot be copied.
Using negative logic for programmable I/O terminals
The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting
the function codes specifying the properties for those terminals. Negative logic refers to inverted
ON/OFF (logical value 1 (true)/0 (false)) state of input or output signal. An ON-active signal (the
function takes effect for the ON signal.) in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to
OFF-active signal (the function takes effect for the OFF signal.) in the negative logic system.
To set the negative logic system for an I/O signal terminal, display data of 1000s (by adding 1000 to
key.
the data for the normal logic) in the corresponding function code and then press the
For example, if a coast-to-stop command (BX: data = 7) is assigned to any one of digital input
terminals X1 to X3 by setting any of function codes E01 through E03, then turning (BX) ON will
make the motor coast to a stop. Similarly, if the coast-to-stop command (BX: data = 1007) is assigned,
turning (BX) OFF will make the motor coast to a stop.
Limitation of data displayed on the LED monitor
Only four digits can be displayed on the 4-digit LED monitor. If you enter more than 4 digits of data
valid for a function code, any digits after the 4th digit of the set data will not be displayed, however
they will be processed correctly.
9-1
FUNCTION CODES
If the specifications of the source inverter and destination inverter differ from each other, some data
may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system. Whether data will be copied or not is
detailed with the following symbols in the "Data copy" column of the function code tables given
below.
Chap. 9
Connecting a remote keypad (option) to an inverter via the RS485 communications card (option)
allows copying the data stored in the inverter's memory into the keypad's memory (refer to Menu #7
"Data copying" in Programming mode). With this feature, you can easily transfer the data saved in a
source inverter to other destination inverters.
The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
F codes: Fundamental Functions
Code
Name
Data setting range
F00
Data Protection
F01
Frequency Command 1 0: Enable
keypad
0: Disable data protection
(Function code data can be edited.)
1: Enable data protection
(Function code data cannot be edited.)
and
keys on the built-in
IncreUnit
ment
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
—
—
Y
N
0
9-12
—
—
N
Y
4
9-12
—
—
N
Y
2
9-13
1: Enable the voltage input to terminal [12]
2: Enable the current input to terminal [C1]
3: Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs
to terminals [12] and [C1]
4: Enable the built-in potentiometer (POT)
F02
Running/Stopping and
Rotational Direction
0: Enable
and
keys on the built-in
keypad to run and stop motor
(The (FWD) or (REV) command should be
ON for forward or reverse rotation.)
1: Enable the external signal command (FWD)
or (REV) command to run motor
2: Enable
and
keys on the built-in
keypad to run/stop motor forward
and
keys on the built-in
3: Enable
keypad to run/stop motor reverse
F03
Maximum Frequency
25.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
N
Y
60.0
9-14
(50.0)*1
F04
Base Frequency
25.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
N
Y
60.0
9-15
(50.0)*1
F05
Rated Voltage (at Base 0:
Output a voltage in line with
Frequency)
variance in input voltage
80 to 240: Output a voltage AVR-controlled *3
(Note 1)
160 to 500: Output a voltage AVR-controlled *3
(Note 2)
1
V
N
Y2
0
9-15
F07
Acceleration Time 1
0.00 to 3600
Note: Acceleration time is ignored at 0.00.
(External gradual acceleration pattern)
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
9-17
F08
Deceleration Time 1
0.00 to 3600
Note: Deceleration time is ignored at 0.00.
(External gradual deceleration pattern)
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
9-17
F09
Torque Boost
0.0 to 20.0
(The set voltage at base frequency for F05 is
100%.)
Note: This setting is effective for auto torque
boost/auto energy saving operations specified
by function code F37 (= 0, 1, 3, or 4).
0.1
%
Y
Y
F10
Electronic Thermal
Overload for Motor
Protection
1: For general-purpose motors with built-in
self-cooling fan
2: For inverter-driven motors or high-speed
motors with forced-ventilation fan
(Select motor
characteristics)
—
—
Y
Y
1
(Overload detection 0.00 (Disable)
level) 1 to 135% of rated current (allowable continuos
load current) of the inverter
0.01
A
Y
Y1
Nominal *2
rated
current of
Fuji
standard
motor
F11
Y2
Fuji's *2 9-17
standard
torque
boost
9-18
*1 Values in parentheses ( ) in the above table denote default settings for the EU version except three-phase 200 V series of inverters.
*2 "Fuji's standard torque boost," "Nominal rated current of Fuji standard motor," and "Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor" differ
depending upon the rated input voltage and rated capacity. Refer to Table 9.1 "Fuji Standard Motor Parameters" on page 9-11.
*3 AVR: Automatic Voltage Regulator
(Note 1) For the three-phase 200 V and single-phase 200 V series
(Note 2) For the three-phase 400 V series
9-2
9.1 Function Code Tables
Code
Name
Data setting range
IncreUnit
ment
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
F12
(Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0
0.1
min
Y
Y
5.0
9-18
F14
Restart Mode after
Instantaneous Power
Failure
—
—
Y
Y
1
(0)*1
9-19
0: Disable (Trip immediately without restart)
1: Disable (Trip without restart after recovery of
power)
4: Enable (Restart at the frequency at which
the power failure occurred, for general load)
5: Enable (Restart at the start frequency, for
low-inertia load)
F15
Frequency Limiter
0.0 to 400.0
(High)
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
70.0
F16
(Low) 0.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0
F18
Bias (for frequency
command 1)
F20
DC Braking
0.0 to 60.0
(Start frequency)
9-21
-100.00 to 100.00
F21
(Braking level) 0 to 100 (Rated output current of the inverter
interpreted as 100%.)
1
%
Y
Y
0
F22
(Braking time) 0.00 (Disable), 0.01 to 30.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.00
9-22
9-23
Start Frequency
0.1 to 60.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
1.0
9-25
F25
Stop Frequency
0.1 to 60.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.2
9-25
F26
Motor Sound
0.75 to 15
(Carrier frequency)
1
kHz
Y
Y
2
(15)*1
9-25
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-26
F27
(Tone) 0:
Level 0
1:
Level 1
2:
Level 2
3:
Level 3
Terminal [FMA]
0 to 200
(Gain to output voltage) If 100 is set, +10 VDC will be output from [FMA]
at full scale.
1
%
Y*
Y
100
9-26
F31
Analog Output Signal
0:
Selection for [FMA]
(Monitor object)
Output frequency 1
(before slip compensation)
Maximum output frequency at full scale
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-26
1:
Output frequency 2
(after slip compensation)
Maximum output frequency at full scale
2:
Output current
Two times the inverter's rated output
current at full scale
3:
Output voltage
250 V (500 V) at full scale
6:
Input power
Two times the inverter's rated output
capacity at full scale
7:
PID feedback value
Feedback value is 100% at full scale
9:
DC link bus voltage
500 VDC (for 200 V series),1000 VDC (for
400 V series) at full scale
14: Test analog output (+) voltage
If F30 = 100, +10 VDC at full scale
*1 Values in parentheses ( ) in the above table denote default settings for the EU version except the three-phase 200 V series of inverters.
9-3
FUNCTION CODES
F30
Chap. 9
F23
Code
Name
Data setting range
F37
Load Selection/
Auto Torque Boost/
Auto Energy Saving
Operation
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
F43
Current Limiter
0:
(Operation condition) 1:
2:
IncreUnit
ment
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
Variable torque load
Constant torque load
Auto-torque boost
Auto-energy saving operation
(Variable torque load during acceleration
and deceleration)
Auto-energy saving operation
(Constant torque load during acceleration
and deceleration)
Auto-energy saving operation
(Auto-torque boost during acceleration and
deceleration)
—
—
N
Y
1
Disable
In constant speed
(Disable during acceleration and
deceleration)
At acceleration and in constant speed
(Disable during deceleration)
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-28
F44
(Limiting level) 20 to 200 (The data is interpreted as the rated
output current of the inverter for 100%.)
1
%
Y
Y
200
F50
Electronic Thermal
0: (To be set for braking resistor built-in type)
Overload Relay (for
1 to 900
braking resistor)
999: (Disable)
(Discharging capability)
1
kWs
Y
Y
999/0
(Note)
F51
(Allowable loss) 0.000: Applied for built-in braking resistor,
0.001 to 50.000
9-27
9-28
0.001 kW
Y
Y
0.000
(Note) The default setting of function code F50 is 999 for standard models, and 0 for braking resistor built-in type.
E codes: Extension Terminal Functions
Code
Name
Data setting range
E01
Terminal Command
Assignment to:[X1]
E02
[X2]
E03
[X3]
To assign a negative logic input to a terminal, set
the value of 1000s shown in ( ) below to the
function code.
0: (1000) Select multistep frequency
(0 to 1 steps)
(SS1)
1: (1001) Select multistep frequency
(0 to 3 steps)
(SS2)
2: (1002) Select multistep frequency
(0 to 7 steps)
(SS4)
4: (1004) Select ACC/DEC time
(2 steps)
(RT1)
6: (1006) Enable 3-wire operation
(HLD)
7: (1007) Coast to a stop
(BX)
8: (1008) Reset alarm
(RST)
9: (1009) Enable external alarm trip
(THR)
10: (1010) Ready for jogging
(JOG)
11: (1011) Switch set frequency 2/1 (Hz2/Hz1)
19: (1019) Enable write from keypad (WE-KP)
20: (1020) Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
21: (1021) Switch normal/inverse operation
(IVS)
24: (1024) Enable communications link
(RS485 communication, option)
(LE)
33: (1033) Reset PID integral and differential
components
(PID-RST)
34: (1034) Hold PID integral component
(PID-HLD)
9-4
IncreUnit
ment
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
—
—
N
Y
0
—
—
N
Y
7
—
—
N
Y
8
9-33
9.1 Function Code Tables
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
Name
E10
Acceleration Time 2
0.00 to 3600
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
9-17
9-38
E11
Deceleration Time 2
0.00 to 3600
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
9-17
9-38
E20
Status Signal
Assignment to:
—
—
N
Y
0
—
—
N
Y
99
E27
E31
Data setting range
IncreUnit
ment
Code
To assign a negative logic output to a terminal,
set the value of 1000s shown in ( ) on the table
below to the function code.
[30A/B/C] (OFF if short-circuited)
(RUN)
(Mechanical relay 0: (1000) Inverter running
contacts) 1: (1001) Frequency equivalence signal (FAR)
2: (1002) Frequency level detection
(FDT)
3: (1003) Undervoltage detection signal (LU)
5: (1005) Torque limiting (Current limiting)
(IOL)
6: (1006) Auto-restart after recovery from
instantaneous power failure (IPF)
7: (1007) Early warning for motor overload
(OL)
26: (1026) Retry in operation
(TRY)
30: (1030) Lifetime alarm
(LIFE)
35: (1035) Inverter running
(RUN2)
36: (1036) Overload prevention control
(OLP)
37: (1037) Current detection
(ID)
41: (1041) Low level current detection
(IDL)
99: (1099) Alarm relay output (for any alarm)
(ALM)
[Y1]
Hz
Y
Y
60.0
9-42
(50.0)*1
E34 Overload Early Warning/ 0 (Disable)
Current value of 1 to 200% of the rated inverter
Current Detection/
current
Low Current Detection
(Level)
0.01
A
Y
Y1
Nominal *2 9-42
rated
current of
Fuji
standard
motor
E35 Current Detection/
0.01 to 600.00
Low Current Detection
(Timer)
0.01
s
Y
Y
10.00
9-42
E39
Coefficient for Constant 0.000 to 9.999
Feeding Rate Time
0.001
—
Y
Y
0.000
9-43
E40
PID Display Coefficient A -999 to 0.00 to 999
0.01
—
Y
Y
100
9-43
E41
PID Display Coefficient B -999 to 0.00 to 999
0.01
—
Y
Y
0.00
9-43
E43
Monitor Item Selection
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-43
E45
(Note)
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-44
0:
3:
4:
9:
10:
12:
13:
Speed monitor (Select by E48.)
Output current
Output voltage
Input power
PID final command value
PID feedback value
Timer value (Timer operation)
Y2
E46
E47
E48
LED Monitor
0: Output frequency before slip compensation
(Speed monitor item) 1: Output frequency after slip compensation
2: Set frequency
4: Load shaft speed in rpm
5: Line speed in m/min
6: Constant feeding rate time
(Note) Function codes E45 to E47 appear on the LED monitor; however, the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters does not recognize these codes.
*1 Values in parentheses ( ) in the above table denote default settings for the EU version except the three-phase 200 V series of inverters.
*2 "Fuji's standard torque boost," "Nominal rated current of Fuji standard motor," and "Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor" differ
depending upon the rated input voltage and rated capacity. Refer to Table 9.1 "Fuji Standard Motor Parameters" on page 9-11.
9-5
FUNCTION CODES
0.1
Chap. 9
0.0 to 400.0
Frequency Detection
(FDT) (Detection level)
9-39
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
Name
E50
Coefficient for Speed
Indication
0.01 to 200.00
0.01
—
Y
Y
30.00
9-43
9-44
E52
Menu Display Mode
for Keypad
0: Function code data setting mode
1: Function code data check mode
2: Full-menu mode
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-44
E60
Built-in Potentiometer 0: None
(Function selection) 1: Auxiliary frequency command 1
2: Auxiliary frequency command 2
3: PID process command 1
—
—
N
Y
0
9-44
E61
0: None
Analog Input Signal
Definition for:
[12] 1: Auxiliary frequency command 1
[C1] 2: Auxiliary frequency command 2
3: PID process command 1
5: PID feedback value
—
—
N
Y
0
9-44
—
—
N
Y
0
9-44
—
—
N
Y
98
—
—
N
Y
99
E62
E98
E99
Data setting range
IncreUnit
ment
Code
To assign a negative logic input to a terminal, set
Terminal Command
Assignment to: [FWD] the value of 1000s shown in ( ) in the table below
to the function code.
0: (1000) Select multistep frequency
[REV]
(0 to 1 steps)
(SS1)
1: (1001) Select multistep frequency
(0 to 3 steps)
(SS2)
2: (1002) Select multistep frequency
(0 to 7 steps)
(SS4)
4: (1004) Select ACC/DEC time
(2 steps)
(RT1)
6: (1006) Enable 3-wire operation
(HLD)
7: (1007) Coast to a stop
(BX)
8: (1008) Reset alarm
(RST)
9: (1009) Enable external alarm trip
(THR)
10: (1010) Ready for jogging
(JOG)
11: (1011) Switch set frequency 2/1
(Hz2/Hz1)
19: (1019) Enable write from keypad (WE-KP)
20: (1020) Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
21: (1021) Switch normal/inverse operation
(IVS)
24: (1024) Enable communications link
(RS485 communication, option)
(LE)
33: (1033) Reset PID integral and differential
components
(PID-RST)
34: (1034) Hold PID integral component
(PID-HLD)
98: Run forward
(FWD)
99: Run reverse
(REV)
9-6
9-33
9-45
9.1 Function Code Tables
C codes: Control Functions of Frequency
Code
C01
Name
Data setting range
0.0
2
0.0
C03
3
Y
0.0
C04
Jump Frequency Band 0.0 to 30.0
C05
Multistep Frequency
Settings 1
0.00 to 400.00
Hz
Y
Default Refer
setting to:
Y
Jump Frequency 1
0.1
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Y
C02
0.0 to 400.0
IncreUnit
ment
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
3.0
0.01
Hz
Y
Y
0.00
C06
2
Y
0.00
C07
3
Y
0.00
C08
4
Y
0.00
C09
5
Y
0.00
C10
6
Y
0.00
C11
7
Y
0.00
9-46
9-46
9-46
C20
Jogging Frequency
0.00 to 400.00
0.01
Hz
Y
Y
0.00
9-47
C21
Timer Operation
0: Disable timer operation
1: Enable timer operation
—
—
N
Y
0
9-47
C30
Frequency Command 2 0: Enable
keypad
—
—
N
Y
2
9-12
9-48
0.01
%
Y*
Y
100.0
9-22
9-48
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.05
9-48
and
keys on the built-in
1: Enable the voltage input to terminal [12]
2: Enable the current input to terminal [C1]
Chap. 9
3: Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs
to terminals [12] and [C1]
4: Enable the built-in potentiometer (POT)
C32
(Gain)
C33
(Filter) 0.00 to 5.00
C34
(Gain reference point) 0.00 to 100.00
0.01
%
Y*
Y
100.0
9-22
9-48
C37
0.00 to 200.00
Analog Input
Adjustment
(Gain for terminal input
[C1])
0.01
%
Y*
Y
100.0
9-22
9-48
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.05
9-48
(Gain)
C38
(Filter) 0.00 to 5.00
C39
(Gain reference point) 0.00 to 100.00
0.01
%
Y*
Y
100.0
9-22
9-48
C50
Bias
(Frequency
command 1)
0.00 to 100.00
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
9-22
9-48
(Bias reference point)
C51
Bias (PID command 1) -100.00 to 100.00
(Bias value)
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
9-48
C52
(Bias reference point) 0.00 to 100.00
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
9-48
9-7
FUNCTION CODES
0.00 to 200.00
Analog Input
Adjustment
(Gain for terminal input
[12])
P codes: Motor Parameters
Code
P02
Name
Data setting range
0.01 to 10.00 kW (where, the data of function
Motor Parameters
(Rated capacity) code P99 is 0, 3, or 4.)
0.01 to 10.00 HP (where, the data of function
code P99 is 1.)
P03
(Rated current) 0.00 to 99.99
IncreUnit
ment
0.01
kW
0.01
HP
0.01
A
Change
Data
when
copy
running
N
Y1
Y2
N
Y1
Y2
P09
P99
(Slip compensation 0.0 to 200.0
gain) Typical rated slip frequency at 100%
0: Characteristics of motor 0
(Fuji standard 8-series motors)
1: Characteristics of motor 1 (HP motors)
3: Characteristics of motor 3
(Fuji standard 6-series motors)
4: Other motors
Motor Selection
Default Refer
setting to:
Nominal *2
rated
capacity of
Fuji
standard
motor
Nominal *2
9-49
rated
current of
Fuji
standard
motor
0.1
%
Y*
Y
0.0
—
—
N
Y1
0
9-50
Y2
H codes: High Performance Functions
Code
Name
Data setting range
H03
Data Initialization
(Data reset)
H04
Retry
H05
IncreUnit
ment
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
—
—
N
N
0
0: Disable
(No. of retries) 1 to 10
1
Times
Y
Y
0
(Latency time) 0.5 to 20.0
0.1
s
Y
Y
5.0
0: Disable initialization
1: Initialize all function code data to the factory
defaults
2: Initialize motor parameters
9-51
9-54
H06
Cooling Fan ON/OFF
0: Disable
1: Enable (1.5 kW or more)
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-55
H07
Gradual Acceleration/
Deceleration
0:
1:
2:
3:
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-56
H12
Instantaneous
Overcurrent Limiting
0: Disable
1: Enable
—
—
Y
Y
1
9-57
H26
PTC Thermistor Input
0: Disable
1: Enable (PTC)
—
—
Y
Y
0
0.01
V
Y
Y
1.60
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-59
H27
H30
Disable (Linear)
S-curve (Weak)
S-curve (Strong)
Curvilinear
9-57
(Level) 0.00 to 5.00
Communications Link
(Function selection)
Monitor
0:
1:
2:
3:
Y
Y
Y
Y
Frequency
command source
N
RS485
N
RS485
Run command
source
N
N
RS485
RS485
Enable by inverter and via RS485
communication (option)
RS485: Enable via RS485 communication
(option)
N:
Enable by inverter
Y:
H42
Capacity of DC link bus For adjustment when replacing the capacitor
capacitor
—
—
—
N
—
9-59
H43
Accumulated Run
Time of Cooling Fan
—
—
—
N
—
9-59
For adjustment when replacing the cooling fan
* "Fuji's standard torque boost," "Nominal rated current of Fuji standard motor," and "Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor" differ
depending upon the rated input voltage and rated capacity. Refer to Table 9.1 "Fuji Standard Motor Parameters" on page 9-11.
9-8
9.1 Function Code Tables
Code
H50
Name
Data setting range
IncreUnit
ment
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
Non-linear V/f Pattern 0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 400.0
(Frequency)
(Voltage) 0 to 240: Output voltage AVR-controlled
for 200 V class motors
0 to 500: Output voltage AVR-controlled
for 400 V class motors
0.1
Hz
N
Y
0.0
1
V
N
Y2
0
9-15
9-60
H54
ACC/DEC Time
0.00 to 3600
(Jogging operation)
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
9-60
H64
Low Limiter
0.0 (Depends on F16 : Freq. limiter (low)),
(Min. freq. when limiter 0.1 to 60.0
is activated)
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
2.0
9-60
H69
Automatic Deceleration 0: Disable
1: Enable
(Regenerative energy
suppressing)
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-60
H70
Overload Prevention
0.00 (Equivalent to deceleration time),
Control
0.01 to 100.00,
(Frequency drop rate) 999 (Cancel)
0.01 Hz/s
Y
Y
999
9-61
0.01
—
Y
Y
0.20
9-61
H51
Gain for Suppression
of Output Current
Fluctuation
H95
DC Braking (Note 2)
0: Slow response
(Braking mode) 1: Quick response
—
—
Y
Y
0
(1) *1
9-61
H96
STOP Key Priority/
Start Check Function
—
—
Y
Y
0
9-62
—
—
Y
N
—
9-62
—
—
Y
Y
3
9-25
9-63
H97
H98
0.00 to 0.20
0:
1:
2:
3:
STOP key priority Start check function
Invalid
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Clear Alarm Data
Returns to zero after clearing alarm data (if H97
= 1).
opL
Lin
ADFCF
Protection/
Disable
Disable
Maintenance Functions 0: Disable
1: Disable
Disable
Enable
2: Disable
Enable
Disable
3: Disable
Enable
Enable
4: Enable
Disable
Disable
5: Enable
Disable
Enable
6: Enable
Enable
Disable
7: Enable
Enable
Enable
opL:
Output Phase Loss Protection
Lin:
Input Phase Loss Protection
ADFCF: Automatic DEC Function for Carrier
Frequency
Note: For single-phase power input inverters,
Lin is always invalid regardless of H98 setting.
(Note 1) Function code H71 appears on the LED monitor; however, the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters does not recognize this code.
(Note 2) Function code H95 is valid on the inverters with ROM versions of C1S11000 or higher. (The lowest four digits of the ROM version
can be displayed on the LED monitor. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.5 "Reading maintenance information."
* Value in parentheses ( ) in the H95 default setting column denotes the setting for the EU version. If initialized by H03, the H95 will be set to
0.
9-9
FUNCTION CODES
(Note 1)
H80
Chap. 9
H71
J codes: Application Functions
Code
J01
J02
Name
PID Control
Data setting range
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
0: Disable
1: Process control use (Normal action)
(Selection) 2: Process control use (Inverse action)
—
—
N
Y
0
(Remote process 0: Keypad
command) 1: PID process command 1
(Data settings of E60, E61 and E62 are also
required.)
4: Communication
—
—
N
Y
0
J03
P (Gain) 0.000 to 10.00
J04
J05
J06
IncreUnit
ment
9-64
0.001 Times
Y
Y
0.100
I (Integration time) 0.0 to 3600.0
0.1
s
Y
Y
0.0
D (Differentiation time) 0.00 to 600.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.00
0.1
s
Y
Y
0.5
(Feedback filter) 0.0 to 900.0
y codes: Link Functions
Code
Name
Data setting range
IncreUnit
ment
Change
Data
when
copy
running
Default Refer
setting to:
y01
Link Functions for
1 to 255
RS485 Communication
(Station address)
1
—
N
Y
1
y02
(Mode selection on no 0: Immediate trip and alarm E 8
response error) 1: Trip and alarm E 8 after running for the
period of the timer set by y03
2: Retry during the period of the timer set by
y03. If retry fails, trip and alarm E 8
3: Continue to run
—
—
Y
Y
0
0.1
s
Y
Y
2.0
—
—
Y
Y
3
y03
y04
(Timer) 0.0 to 60.0
(Baud rate) 0:
1:
2:
3:
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
y05
(Data length) 0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
—
—
Y
Y
0
y06
(Parity check) 0: None
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
—
—
Y
Y
0
y07
(Stop bits) 0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
—
—
Y
Y
0
y08
(No response error 0 (No detection), 1 to 60
detection time)
1
s
Y
Y
0
y09
(Response interval) 0.00 to 1.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.01
y10
(Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RTU protocol
1: SX protocol (Loader protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
—
—
Y
Y
1
—
—
Y
N
0
y99
Link Function for
Supporting Data Input
Frequency command
Run command
source
source
0: by H30
by H30
1: via RS485
by H30
communication
(option)
2: by H30
via RS485
communication
(option)
3: via RS485
via RS485
communication
communication
(option)
(option)
9-10
9-70
9-73
9.1 Function Code Tables
* The table below lists the factory settings of "Fuji's standard torque boost," "Nominal rated current of Fuji
standard motor," and "Nominal rated capacity of Fuji standard motor" in the "Default setting" column of the
above tables.
Table 9.1 Fuji Standard Motor Parameters
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Function
code
F09
Nominal rated
capacity of Fuji
standard motor
(kW)
Function codes
F11, E34 and P03
Shipping destination
(version)
Asia
EU
Japan
Function code
P02
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
8.4
0.62
0.68
0.61
0.1
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
8.4
1.18
1.30
1.16
0.2
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
7.1
2.10
2.30
2.13
0.4
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
6.8
3.29
3.60
3.36
0.75
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o**
6.8
5.55
6.10
5.87
1.5
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o**
6.8
8.39
9.20
8.80
2.2
3.7
FRN3.7C1n-2o**
5.5
13.67
15.00
14.38
3.7
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
7.1
1.09
1.15
1.07
0.4
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o
6.8
1.71
1.80
1.68
0.75
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o**
6.8
3.04
3.05
2.94
1.5
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o**
6.8
4.54
4.60
4.40
2.2
3.7
4.0
FRN3.7C1n-4o**
FRN4.0C1n-4o**
5.5
7.43
7.50
7.20
3.7
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-7o
8.4
0.62
0.68
0.61
0.1
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-7o
8.4
1.18
1.30
1.16
0.2
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-7o
7.1
2.10
2.30
2.13
0.4
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-7o
6.8
3.29
3.60
3.36
0.75
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-7o
6.8
5.55
6.10
5.87
1.5
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
6.8
8.39
9.20
8.80
2.2
Note 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
3) Asterisks (**) in the above table denote the following:
21:
Braking resistor built-in type
(Available for 1.5 kW or above, three-phase 200 V and 400 V models)
None: Standard
9-11
FUNCTION CODES
Singlephase
200 V
Inverter type
Nominal rated current of
Fuji standard motor (A)
Chap. 9
Threephase
400 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Fuji's
standard
torque
boost (%)
9.2 Details of Function Codes
This section provides a detailed description of the function codes available for the FRENIC-Mini
series of inverters. In each code group, its function codes are arranged in an ascending order of the
identifying numbers for ease of access. Note that function codes closely related each other for the
implementation of an inverter's operation are detailed in the description of the function code having
the youngest identifying number. Those related function codes are indicated in the title bar as shown
below.
F01
9.2.1
F00
Frequency Command 1
Refer to C30.
F codes (Fundamental functions)
Data Protection
Specifies whether function code data is to be protected from being accidentally changed by
/
key operation to change
keypad operation. If data protection is enabled (F00 = 1),
data is disabled so that no function code data, except F00 data, can be changed from the
keypad.
Even if F00 = 1, function code data can still be changed using the communications
facility.
F01
Data for F00
Function
Setting procedure
0
Disable data protection.
1
Enable data protection.
and
and
Press
keys or
keys
simultaneously to change data from 1 to 0 or from 0
key to save the
to 1, respectively. Press the
change.
Frequency Command 1
Refer to C30.
Selects the devices to set the set frequency 1 for driving the motor.
Data for F01
Function
0
Enable
and
keys on the built-in keypad. (Refer to Chapter 3
"OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD.")
1
Enable the voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to 10 VDC, maximum output
frequency obtained at 10 VDC).
2
Enable the current input to terminal [C1] (4 to 20 mA, maximum output
frequency obtained at 20 mA).
3
Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals [12] and [C1]. See the
two items listed above for the setting range and maximum frequencies.
Note: If the sum exceeds the maximum output frequency, the maximum output
frequency will apply.
4
Enable the built-in potentiometer (POT). (Maximum frequency obtained at full
scale of the POT)
There are other frequency setting means (such as the communications facility,
multistep frequency and etc.) with higher priority than that of F01. Refer to Chapter
4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator" for more details.
9-12
9.2 Details of Function Codes
- For frequency settings by terminals [12] (voltage) and [C1] (current) and by the
built-in potentiometer, setting the gain and bias changes the relationship between
those frequency settings and the drive frequency to enable matching your system
requirements. Refer to function code F18 for details.
- For the inputs to terminals [12] (voltage) and [C1] (current), low-pass filters can
be enabled. Refer to function codes C33 and C38 for details.
In addition to "F01 Frequency command 1," "C30 Frequency command 2" is also available.
To switch them, use the terminal command (Hz2/Hz1). For details of the (Hz2/Hz1), refer to
"E01 to E03: Command Assignment to Terminals [X1] to [X3]."
F02
Running/Stopping and Rotational Direction
Selects a source issuing a run command--keypad or external control signal input.
- If F02 = 0, 2, or 3, the inverter can run the motor by
keys on the built-in keypad.
and
The motor rotational direction can be specified in two ways, either by control signal input
(F02 = 0) or by use of prefixed forward or reverse rotation (F02 = 2 or 3).
When F02 = 0, to specify the motor rotational direction by control signal input, assign the
commands (FWD) and (REV) to terminals [FWD] and [REV], respectively. Turn on the
(FWD) or (REV) for the forward or reverse direction, respectively, and then press the
key to run the motor.
Data for F02
Function
and
keys on the built-in keypad to run and stop the motor.
(The (FWD) or (REV) command should be ON for forward or reverse rotation
beforehand.)
Enable the (FWD) or (REV) command to run the motor.
1
To turn on the (FWD) command, short-circuit terminals [FWD] and [CM]; to
turn on the (REV) command, short-circuit terminals [REV] and [CM].
2
and
keys on the built-in keypad to run and stop the motor in the
Enable
forward direction.
3
and
keys on the built-in keypad to run and stop the motor in the
Enable
reverse direction.
9-13
FUNCTION CODES
Enable
0
Chap. 9
- If F02 = 1, the inverter can run the motor by control signal inputs. To specify the motor
rotational direction, assign the commands (FWD) and (REV) to terminals [FWD] and
[REV], respectively. Turn on the (FWD) or (REV) for the forward or reverse direction,
respectively. If both of (FWD) and (REV) are turned on simultaneously, the inverter
immediately decelerates to stop the motor.
The table below lists the operational relationship between function code F02
key operation, and control signal inputs
(Running/stopping and rotational direction), the
to terminals [FWD] and [REV], which determines the rotational direction.
Data for F02
Key on the builtin keypad
Control Signal Inputs to
Terminals [FWD] and [REV]
Function code E98
(FWD) command
Function code E99
(REV) command
Motor
rotational
direction
OFF
OFF
Stop
key
0
key
1
F03
Ignored.
2
(forward/fixed)
key
3
(reverse/fixed)
key
ON
OFF
Forward
OFF
ON
Reverse
ON
ON
Stop
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Stop
ON
OFF
Forward
OFF
ON
Reverse
ON
ON
Stop
Ignored.
key
Ignored.
key
Stop
Forward
Stop
Reverse
Stop
Maximum Frequency
Sets the maximum frequency to drive the motor. Setting the frequency out of the range rated
for the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation. Set a
maximum frequency appropriate for the equipment.
- Data setting range: 25.0 to 400.0 (Hz)
In general, internal impedance of high-speed motors is low. This may cause
unstable motor/inverter behavior. When this kind of motor is used, it is
recommended that the carrier frequency (F26) be set to 15 kHz and the
motor/inverter operation be checked.
Keep the ratio between base frequency (F04) and maximum frequency to 1:8 or
less.
9-14
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F04
Base Frequency
Refer to H50.
F05
Rated Voltage (at Base Frequency)
Refer to H51.
These function codes set the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially
required for running the motor properly. If combined with the related function codes H50 and
H51, these function codes may set data needed to drive the motor along the non-linear V/f
pattern.
The following description includes setting-up required for the non-linear V/f pattern.
n Base frequency (F04)
Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate located on the motor.
- Data setting range: 25.0 to 400.0 (Hz)
n Rated voltage (at base frequency) (F05)
Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
- If 0 is set, the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the
inverter. The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage.
- If the data is set to anything other than 0, the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage
constant in line with the setting. When any of the automatic torque boost settings,
automatic energy saving or slip compensation is active, the voltage settings should be equal
to the rating of the motor.
Function
0
Output voltage in line with variance in input voltage. (The AVR is disabled.
AVR: Automatic Voltage Regulator)
80 to 240 (V)
Output AVR-controlled voltage for 200 V class motors.
160 to 500 (V)
Output AVR-controlled voltage for 400 V class motors.
n Non-linear V/f pattern for frequency (H50)
Sets the non-linear V/f pattern for frequency component.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
(Setting 0.0 to H50 disables the non-linear V/f pattern operation.)
n Non-linear V/f pattern for voltage (H51)
Sets the non-linear V/f pattern for voltage component.
Data for H51
Function
0 to 240 (V)
Output the voltage AVR-controlled for 200 V class motors.
0 to 500 (V)
Output the voltage AVR-controlled for 400 V class motors.
If the voltage at base frequency (F05) is set to 0, the data settings of function codes H50 and
H51 will be ignored.
9-15
FUNCTION CODES
Data for F05
Chap. 9
If F05 is set to match the rated voltage of the motor, the motor efficiency will be
improved better than that it is set to 0. Therefore, when brakes are applied to the
motor, energy loss decreases and the motor regenerates larger braking energy,
which can easily activate the overvoltage protection function. Note that the
allowable power consumption capacity of the inverter for braking energy is limited
by the specifications. If the overvoltage protection function is activated, it may be
necessary to increase deceleration time or use an external braking resistor.
Defining non-linear V/f patterns (F04, F05, H50 and H51)
Function codes F04 and F05 define a non-linear V/f pattern that forms the relationship
between the inverter's output frequency and voltage.
Furthermore, setting the non-linear V/f pattern using function codes H50 and H51 allows
patterns with higher or lower voltage than that of the normal pattern to be defined at an
arbitrary point inside or outside the base frequency. Generally, when a motor is driven at a
high speed, its internal impedance may increase and output torque may decrease due to the
decreased drive voltage. This feature helps you solve that problem. Note that setting the
voltage in excess of the inverter’s input source voltage cannot be done.
(1) Normal (linear) V/f
pattern
(2) V/f pattern with single
non-linear point inside
the base frequency
(3) V/f pattern with single
non-linear point outside
the base frequency
9-16
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F07
Acceleration Time 1
Refer to E10.
F08
Deceleration Time 1
Refer to E11.
F07 specifies the acceleration time from 0 to the maximum frequency in Hz. F08 specifies the
deceleration time from the maximum frequency to 0 in Hz.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 3600 (sec.)
• Selecting an S-shaped pattern or curvilinear acceleration/deceleration pattern by
function code H07 (Gradual acceleration/deceleration pattern) will make the
actual acceleration/deceleration times longer than the set ones. Refer to the
descriptions of function code H07.
• Setting shorter acceleration/deceleration times than is necessary may make the
actual acceleration/deceleration time longer than the set ones, as the current limit
or regenerative braking suppression facility may be activated.
F09
Torque Boost
Specifies the torque boost rate to boost the voltage component in the V/f pattern for
compensating magnetic flux shortage of the motor resulting from the voltage drop across the
primary resistance of the motor in the low frequency zone.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 20.0 (%) (The set voltage at base frequency for F05 is 100%.)
• The F09 data setting is effective for auto torque boost/auto energy saving
operations specified by function code F37 being set to 0, 1, 3, or 4.
9-17
Constant torque characteristics (F37 = 1)
FUNCTION CODES
Variable torque characteristics (F37 = 0)
Chap. 9
• Set an appropriate torque boost rate that will keep the starting torque of the motor
within the voltage level in the low frequency zone. Setting an excessive torque
boost rate may result in over-excitation or overheat of the motor during no load
operation.
F10
Electronic Thermal Overload (for motor protection)
(Select motor characteristics)
F11
Electronic Thermal Overload (Overload detection level)
F12
Electronic Thermal Overload (Thermal time constant)
F10 through F12 set the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal
overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter.
Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the
overload early warning. Even if you need only the overload early warning, set these
characteristics data to these function codes. To disable the electronic thermal motor
overload protection, set data of F11 to "0.00."
n Motor characteristics (F10)
F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor--built-in cooling fan or externally powered
forced-ventilation fan.
Data for F10
Function
1
For general-purpose motors with built-in self-cooling fan
(The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation.)
2
For inverter-driven motors or high-speed motors with forced-ventilation fan
(The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency.)
The figures below illustrate the cooling characteristics for the motor selected by function
code P99 (Motor selection).
Cooling Characteristics of Motors
n Overload detection current (F11)
F11 specifies the operation level of the electronic thermal motor overload protection that
detects an overload condition.
- Data setting range: 1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable continuous drive current) of
the inverter
- In general, set the rated current of the motor when driven at base frequency to F11, that is,
1.0 to 1.1 multiple of the rated current of motor (P03).
- To disable the electronic thermal motor overload protection, set 0.00 to F11.
9-18
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Thermal time constant (F12)
F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor. The inverter uses the time constant as an
operation period of the electronic thermal motor overload protection. If 150% of the overload
detection current specified by F11 flows continuously, the inverter activates the electronic
thermal motor overload protection during the specified operation period.
For Fuji general-purpose motors and other induction motors, set 5 minutes (factory default) to
F12.
- Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (minutes, in 0.1-minute increment)
(Example) When "5.0" (5 minutes) has
been set to F12
As shown at the right, if 150% current
of the operation level flows
continuously for 5 minutes, the motor
overload alarm will be activated (alarm
code "0L1"). If 120% current flows, the
alarm will be activated after approx. 13
minutes.
Typical operational characteristics of electronic
thermal motor overload protection
To prevent such a problem, calculate the "equivalent RMS current" and keep the
loaded current within the motor rated current. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.1.3.4
"Calculating the RMS rating of the motor."
F14
Restart Mode after Instantaneous Power Failure
Selects the action of the inverter to be
followed when an instantaneous power
failure occurs.
Data for F14
Function
0
Trip immediately
1
Trip after recovery of power
4
Restart at the frequency at
which the power failure
occurred
5
Restart at the start frequency
If the inverter detects that the DC link bus voltage drops less than the specified undervoltage
limit, it interprets the state as an occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. However, if
the inverter runs with a light load and the period of the power failure is short, then it does not
detect the power failure and continues to run.
9-19
FUNCTION CODES
When an inverter drives the motor with a very frequent running/stopping operation,
the loaded current to the motor may fluctuate largely and enters the short-time rated
current range (100% or more) of the motor repeatedly. This may cause an abnormal
operation of the electronic thermal motor overload protection (e.g., for an
externally-powered forced ventilation fan).
Chap. 9
The thermal time constant includes the
time interval from the time when actual
current flowing into the motor exceeds
the allowable continuous current (100%
of the rated current) to the time when
the current reaches 150% of the rated
current. Therefore, the actual time when
the alarm is issued will be earlier than
the time specified by F12.
n Trip immediately (F14 = 0)
If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the
inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus, then the inverter immediately shuts down its
outputs and displays the undervoltage alarm "LU" on the LED monitor. The motor will coast
to a stop and the inverter will not restart automatically.
n Trip after recovery of power (F14 = 1)
If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the
inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus, then the inverter immediately shuts down its
outputs without transferring to Alarm mode or displaying the undervoltage alarm "LU." The
motor will coast to a stop. When the power is recovered, the inverter will enter Alarm mode
for undervoltage.
This setting is used when you run/stop the motor by turning the inverter power on/off with
any run command being on. Turning off the controller power with the power switch will not
cause the inverter to transfer to Alarm mode or trip.
n Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred (F14 = 4)
If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the
inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus, then the inverter saves the current output
frequency.
When the power is recovered with any run command being ON, the inverter will restart at the
saved frequency. During the instantaneous power failure, if the motor speed slows down, the
current limiter facility of the inverter will be activated and automatically lower the output
frequency. Upon synchronization of the output frequency and motor speed, the inverter
accelerates up to the previous output frequency. Refer to the figure (F14 = 4) on the following
page for details.
To synchronize the output frequency and motor speed, the instantaneous overcurrent limiter
(H12 = 1) should be enabled.
This setting is optimal for operations in which the motor speed rarely slows down due to the
heavy moment of inertia of its load even if the motor is coasting to a stop because of the
instantaneous power failure.
n Restart at the start frequency (F14 = 5)
If an instantaneous power failure occurs when the inverter is in Running mode so that the
inverter detects undervoltage of the DC link bus, then the inverter immediately shuts down its
outputs. After the power is recovered, entry of any run command will restart the inverter at
the frequency specified by function code F23. Refer to the figure (F14 = 5) on the following
page for details.
This setting is optimal for operations in which the motor speed quickly slows down to 0 r/min
due to its heavy load with a very small moment of inertia if the motor coasts to a stop because
of the instantaneous power failure.
• There is a 0.5 second delay from detection of the undervoltage until the motor is
restarted. This delay is due to the time required for the residual electricity
(magnetic flux) in the motor to erase. Therefore, the motor will restart with a
0.5-second delay after the power is recovered, even if the instantaneous power
failure period is shorter than 0.5 second.
• When an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power supply voltage for
external circuitry (such as relay circuits) controlling the inverter may also drop as
low as to cause run commands to be discontinued.
Therefore, during recovery from an instantaneous power failure, the inverter
waits 2 seconds for a run command to arrive. If it receives one within 2 seconds,
it will restart. If a run command arrives more than 2 seconds later, then the
inverter should be restarted at the start frequency (F23). The external circuitry
should be so designed that it will issue a run command within 2 seconds in such
an event; otherwise it should incorporate a relay with a mechanical locking
feature.
9-20
9.2 Details of Function Codes
• If a coast-to-stop command (BX) is issued during an instantaneous power failure,
the inverter exits from the state of waiting for restarting, and enters Running
mode. If any run command is issued, the inverter will start at the start frequency
preset.
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
F15
Frequency Limiter (High)
F16
Frequency Limiter (Low)
Frequency limiter F15 limits the peak
of output frequency. Frequency limiter
F16 maintains the output frequency at
the bottom even if the set frequency is
lower than the bottom. Refer to the
figure at the right.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Set the peak and bottom frequencies correctly; otherwise, the inverter may not
operate. Maintain the following relationship between the limiters:
- (Peak frequency) > (Bottom frequency), (Start frequency), (Stop frequency)
- (Bottom frequency) < (Maximum frequency)
9-21
F18
Bias (for frequency command 1)
Refer to C50, C32, C34, C37 and C39.
If you select any analog input for frequency command 1, it is possible to define the
relationship between the analog input and the set frequency arbitrarily by combining the
settings for bias (F18), bias reference point (C50), gains (C32 and C37), and gain reference
points (C34 and C39) as shown below.
Function code
Function
Data entry range (%)
F18
Bias
-100.00 to 100.00
C50
Bias reference point
0.00 to 100.00
C32
Gain for terminal [12]
0.00 to 200.00
C34
Gain reference point for terminal [12]
0.00 to 100.00
C37
Gain for terminal [C1]
0.00 to 200.00
C39
Gain reference point for terminal [C1]
0.00 to 100.00
As illustrated in the graph below, the relationship between the set frequency and analog input
for frequency command 1 is shown by a straight line passing through points "A" and "B." The
"A" is determined by the bias (F18) and its reference point (C50). The "B" is determined by
the gain (C32 or C37) and its reference point (C34 or C39). The combination of C32 and C34
will apply for terminal [12] and that of C37 and C39 for terminal [C1].
The bias (F18) and gain (C32 or C37) should be set, assuming the maximum frequency as
100%. The bias reference point (C50) and gain frequency point (C34 or C39) should be set,
supposing the full scale (10 VDC or 20 mADC) as 100%.
If the set frequency 1 is set with the built-in potentiometer, point B is prefixed at both the gain
and its reference point being 100%.
Analog input under the bias reference point is limited by the bias data.
The relations stated above are stated in the following expressions:
(1) If analog input £ bias reference point:
Frequency Setting 1 (%) = Bias (F18)
(2) If analog input > bias reference point:
Frequency Setting 1 (%) =
(Gain) - (Bias)
(%) ´ Analog input (%)
(Gain reference point) - (Bias reference point)
+
=
(Bias) ´ (Gain reference point) - (Gain) ´ (Bias reference point)
(Gain reference point) - (Bias reference point)
C32 - F18
F18 × C34 - C32 × C50
(%) × Analog input (%) +
C34 - C50
C34 - C50
9-22
9.2 Details of Function Codes
In the above expressions, it is assumed that each function code expresses its data.
Example: Setting the bias, gain and its reference point when analog input range from 1 to 5
VDC is selected for the frequency command 1
(Point A)
If the analog input is at 1 V, the set frequency is 0 Hz. Therefore, the bias is 0% (F18 = 0).
Since 1 V is the bias reference point and it is equal to 10% of 10 V, then the bias reference
point should be 10% (C50 = 10).
(Point B)
If the analog input is at 5 V, the set frequency comes to be the maximum value. Therefore, the
gain is 100% (C32 = 100). Since 5 V is the gain reference point and it is equal to 50% of 10 V,
then the gain reference point should be 50% (C34 = 50).
When using the function codes for setting a stand alone gain or bias without
changing any reference points, the setting procedure for the function codes is the
same as that of Fuji conventional inverter models.
F20
DC Braking (Start frequency)
F21
DC Braking (Braking level)
F22
DC Braking (Braking time)
Refer to H95.
Set function codes F20 for the start frequency, F21 for the braking level, and F22 for the
braking time. Optionally, you can also select the quick-response DC braking with H95.
Set the frequency with which to start DC braking.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz)
Set function code F20 to a frequency that approximately equals the slipcompensated frequency of the motor. If you set it to an extremely high frequency,
the inverter will be unstable, and in some cases the overvoltage protective function
may work.
n Braking level (F21)
Set the output current level to be applied when DC braking is activated. Set the function code
data, assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100% with 1-% resolution.
- Data setting range: 0 to 100%
n Braking period (F22)
Set the braking period during which DC braking is activated.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 30.00 (sec.)
(Note that setting 0.00 disables DC braking.)
9-23
FUNCTION CODES
n Start frequency (F20)
Chap. 9
These function codes specify the parameters for DC braking, a mechanism to pre-vent the
motor from coasting due to the inertia of moving loads while it is decelerating to a stop.
During a decelerated stop cycle, i.e., when any Run command "OFF" has been issued or the
set frequency has dropped below the stop frequency, DC braking is invoked as soon as the
output frequency has reached the start frequency (F20) for DC braking.
H95 specifies the DC braking mode as follows:
Data for H95
Braking mode
Meaning
0
Slow response
The DC braking current gradually ramps up. (The torque
may not be sufficient at the start of DC braking.)
1
Quick response
The DC braking current quickly ramps up. (Depending
on the inertia of the moving loads or the coupling state,
the revolution may be unstable.)
For three-phase 200 V and single-phase 200 V series inverters
The braking level setting for the three-phase 200 V and single-phase 200 V series
should be calculated from the DC braking level IDB (A) based on the reference
current Iref (A), as shown below.
Setting (%) =
I DB (A)
´ 100
I ref (A)
(Example) Setting the braking level IDB at 4.2 Amp (A) for 0.75 kW standard motors
Setting (%) =
4.2 (A)
´ 100 = 84
5.0 (A)
Applicable motor
rating (kW)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
Reference
current Iref (A)
0.8
1.5
3.0
5.0
8.0
11.0
17.0
The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means.
Injuries could occur.
9-24
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F23
Start Frequency
F25
Stop Frequency
The start frequency refers to the output frequency that the inverter should output at start up.
The inverter shuts down its output at the stop frequency.
Set the start frequency to a level that will enable the motor to generate enough torque for
startup. Generally, set the rated slip frequency to F23.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz) (for both start and stop frequencies)
If the start frequency is lower than the stop frequency, the inverter cannot output
any power as long as the set frequency does not exceed the stop frequency.
F26
Motor Sound (Carrier frequency)
Refer to H98.
Sets the carrier frequency.
- Data setting range: 0.75 to 15 (kHz)
- Changing the carrier frequency may
decrease the motor running noise,
leakage current from the output lines,
and electric noise from the inverter.
Carrier frequency
Motor running noise
0.75 to 15 kHz
Noisy to quiet
Output current waveform Poor to good
Leakage current level
Low to high
Electric noise level
Low to high
9-25
FUNCTION CODES
On the contrary, raising the carrier frequency increases the inverter’s power loss
and raises the temperature of the inverter. The inverter has a built-in overload
protection facility that automatically decreases the carrier frequency to protect the
inverter. For details about the facility, refer to function code H98.
Chap. 9
Lowering the carrier frequency increases the ripple components (harmonic
components) on the output current waveform so as to increase the motor's power
loss and raises the temperature of the motor. If the carrier frequency is set at 0.75
kHz, for example, estimate the motor output torque at 85% or less of the rated motor
torque.
F27
Motor Sound (Tone)
Changes the motor running sound tone. This setting is
effective when carrier frequencies set to function code
F27 is 7 kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may
reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor.
Data for F27
Function
0
Tone level 0
1
Tone level 1
2
Tone level 2
3
Tone level 3
F30
Terminal [FMA] (Gain to output voltage)
F31
Analog Output Signal Selection for [FMA] (Monitor object)
F31 allows you to output monitored data (such as the output frequency or output current) to
terminal [FMA] as an analog data that can be adjusted with F30 for the meter scale.
n Adjusting the output voltage level (F30)
Adjust the output voltage level within the range of 0 to 200%, supposing the monitored
amount of the monitor selected with function code F31 as 100%.
- Data setting range: 0 to 200 (%)
Meter scale
n Selecting object to be monitored (F31)
Select the output to terminal [FMA] for monitoring.
Data for F31
Function
(Monitor the following)
0
Output frequency
(before slip compensation)
Maximum output frequency
1
Output frequency
(after slip compensation)
Maximum output frequency
2
Output current
Two times the inverter's rated output current
3
Output voltage
200 V class: 250 V
400 V class: 500 V
6
Input power
Two times the inverter's rated output capacity
7
PID feedback value
Feedback value is 100%
9
DC link bus voltage
200 V class: 500 V
400 V class: 1000 V
14
Test output (+)
10 V (with gain 100%)
9-26
Based on the following
defined as 100% (full-scale)
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F37
Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation
Allows you to select the load type and enable/disable auto torque boost and auto energy
saving operation. The load selection enables an optimal V/f pattern to be selected.
Load selection
There are two different properties of loads--the torque load which is in proportion to the
square of speed and the constant torque load. You can select a V/f pattern optimized to the
load property. Refer to the figure in the descriptions for function code F09 for details.
Auto torque boost
This feature optimizes the output voltage automatically to the motor and its load. Even if the
load varies, the inverter can maintain the exciting current fed to the motor so as not to overexcite the motor. The maximum output torque of the motor will be increased.
• If the automatic torque boost is enabled (F37 = 2 or 5), function code F09 will be
ignored.
• If either the torque in proportion to the square of the speed or the constant torque
is selected (F37 = 0, 1, 3, or 4), it is necessary to modify the F09 data (Torque
boost: 0.0 to 20.0%).
• If a motor parameter is a special one or the rigidity of the load is not sufficient,
lowering the maximum output torque or unstable operation may sometimes
result. To avoid this happening, disable the automatic torque boost (F37 = 0 or 1)
and set the torque boost with F09 manually.
Auto energy saving operation
Data for F37 Load selection
Auto torque Auto energy
boost
saving
F09
Remarks
0
Variable torque Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
1
Constant torque Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
2
Not available
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
3
Variable torque Disabled
Enabled
4
Constant torque Disabled
Enabled
5
Not available
Enabled
Enabled
The auto energy-saving
feature is enabled only for
Enabled constant speed operation.
During acceleration/
Disabled deceleration, the inverter
runs with manual or
automatic torque boost.
Enabled
When using the auto torque boost or energy-saving feature, you need to set the rated
voltage of the motor to F05 (Voltage at the base frequency) and the motor
parameters to the motor-related P codes.
9-27
FUNCTION CODES
The inverter enables this feature for constant speed operation only. During acceleration and
deceleration, the inverter will run with manual or automatic torque boost, depending on the
data setting of function code F37. If auto energy-saving operation is enabled, the response to
a change in motor speed may be slow. Do not use this feature for a system that requires quick
acceleration and deceleration.
Chap. 9
This feature controls the terminal voltage of the motor automatically to minimize the motor
power loss. (Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor
characteristics. Check the properties before using this feature.)
F43
Current Limiter (Operation condition)
F44
Current Limiter (Limiting level)
F43 enables or disables the current limiter. If it is enabled, the inverter controls the output
frequency while keeping the current set to F44 in order to prevent the motor from stalling.
With F43, you may select whether the current limiter works during constant speed operation
only (F43 = 1) or during both acceleration and constant speed operation (F43 = 2). Set F43 to
1, for example, to drive the motor at maximum performance in the acceleration zone and to
limit the drive current in the constant speed zone.
n Operation condition (F43)
Select the motor running state in which the current limiter will work.
Data for F43
Function
0
Disable (No current limiter works.)
1
Enable the current limiter during constant speed operation
2
Enable the current limiter during acceleration and constant speed operation
n Limiting level (F44)
Select the level at which the current limiter will work.
- Data setting range: 20 to 200% (Percentage ratio of rated current of the inverter)
• The current limiting feature selected by F43 and F44 are implemented by
software, so an operational delay may occur. To avoid the delay, use the current
limiter (hardware) simultaneously (H12 = 1).
• If an overload is applied when the limiting level is set extremely low, the inverter
will immediately lower its output frequency. This may cause an overvoltage trip
or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting.
F50
Electronic Thermal Overload Relay (Discharging capability)
F51
Electronic Thermal Overload Relay (Allowable loss)
These function codes configure the electronic thermal overload relay to protect the braking
resistor from overheating.
Set the discharging capability and allowable average loss of braking resistors to F50 and F51,
respectively. Those values differ depending upon the specifications of the braking resistor.
Refer to the tables on the next page.
For built-in braking resistors, you may set 0 and 0.000 to F50 and F51, respectively. Doing so
will automatically apply the settings given in the table on the next page.
& Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2 "Selecting a Baking Resistor" for details.
Depending on the discharging capability margin of a braking resistor, the electronic
thermal function may operate and issue the overheat alarm "dbH," even if the
actual temperature of the resistor is lower than that specified. Check braking
resistor performance again and review the data setting of function codes F50 and
F51.
9-28
9.2 Details of Function Codes
The following tables list the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the FRENIC-Mini
series of inverters. These values are determined by inverter model and specifications (built-in or
external type) of braking resistors.
n Built-in braking resistor
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200V
Threephase
400V
Inverter type
FRN1.5C1n-2o21
FRN2.2C1n-2o21
FRN3.7C1n-2o21
FRN1.5C1n-4o21
FRN2.2C1n-4o21
FRN3.7C1n-4o21
FRN4.0C1n-4o21
Continuous braking
(Braking torque: 100%)
Resistance
(W)
Capacity
(W)
60
40
14
40
60
15
240
Discharging
capability
(kWs)
14
40
160
15
Braking
time
(s)
18
12
8
18
12
8
Repetitive braking
(Period: 100 sec. or less)
Allowable
average loss
(kW)
0.023
0.025
0.023
0.025
Duty
cycle
(%ED)
3
2
1.5
3
2
1.5
Note 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-29
n External braking resistor
Standard Models
The braking resistor is protected from overheating by a thermal relay incorporated in the braking
resistor. Assign "external thermal relay tripped" (THR) to one of the inverter’s digital input terminals
[X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD], and [REV], and connect it to the terminals 2 and 1 of the braking resistor.
If you choose not to use the thermal relay incorporated in the braking resistor, set up the overheat
protection device using the values given in the table below.
Power
supply
voltage
Inverter type
FRN0.4C1n-2o
Braking
resistor
type
Continuous braking Repetitive braking
(Braking torque: (Period: 100 sec. or
100%)
less)
Resis- CaQ'ty tance pacity DischargAllowable
Duty
Braking
(W)
(W)
ing
average
cycle
time
capability
loss
(%ED)
(s)
(kW)
(kWs)
DB0.75-2
Three- FRN0.75C1n-2o
phase FRN1.5C1n-2o**
200V FRN2.2C1n-2o** DB2.2-2
FRN3.7C1n-2o** DB3.7-2
FRN0.4C1n-4o
FRN0.4C1n-7o
Single- FRN0.75C1n-7o
phase
200V FRN1.5C1n-7o
FRN2.2C1n-7o
200
40
400
33
DB0.75-4
FRN0.75C1n-4o
ThreeFRN1.5C1n-4o**
phase
DB2.2-4
400V FRN2.2C1n-4o**
FRN3.7C1n-4o**
DB3.7-4
FRN4.0C1n-4o**
100
200
1
200
9
17
45
34
400
130
DB0.75-2
100
200
DB2.2-2
40
400
0.068
18
0.075
10
30
0.077
7
37
20
0.093
5
0.044
22
45
0.068
18
0.075
10
33
30
0.077
7
37
20
0.093
5
0.044
22
0.068
18
0.075
10
0.077
7
9
17
9
17
45
34
33
30
Note 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
3) Asterisks (**) in the above table denote the following:
21: Braking resistor built-in type, None: Standard
9-30
22
33
34
160
0.044
9.2 Details of Function Codes
10% ED Models
Power
supply
voltage
Inverter type
FRN0.4C1n-2o
Braking
resistor
type
Continuous braking Repetitive braking
(Braking torque: (Period: 100 sec. or
100%)
less)
Resis- CaQ'ty tance pacity DischargAllowable
Duty
Braking
(W)
(W)
ing
average
cycle
time
capability
loss
(%ED)
(s)
(kW)
(kWs)
DB0.75-2C
Three- FRN0.75C1n-2o
phase FRN1.5C1n-2o**
200V FRN2.2C1n-2o** DB2.2-2C
100
200
50
40
400
55
FRN3.7C1n-2o** DB3.7-2C
FRN0.4C1n-4o
DB0.75-4C
FRN0.75C1n-4o
ThreeFRN1.5C1n-4o**
phase
DB2.2-4C
400V FRN2.2C1n-4o**
FRN3.7C1n-4o**
DB3.7-4C
FRN4.0C1n-4o**
FRN0.4C1n-7o
Single- FRN0.75C1n-7o
phase
200V FRN1.5C1n-7o
FRN2.2C1n-7o
33
200
1
140
200
160
50
55
400
130
140
DB0.75-2C
100
200
50
DB2.2-2C
40
400
55
250
133
73
50
75
250
133
73
50
75
250
133
73
50
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
3) Asterisks (**) in the above table denote the following:
0.185
0.075
0.110
0.185
0.075
0.110
20
14
10
10
37
20
14
10
10
37
20
14
10
FUNCTION CODES
21: Braking resistor built-in type, None: Standard
0.110
37
Chap. 9
Note 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
0.075
9-31
Calculating discharging capability and allowable average loss and then setting
function code data
n Discharging capability (F50)
Discharging capability stands for the amount of electric power that a braking resistor can
discharge for a single cycle of braking operation. It can be calculated using the braking period
and rated motor capacity using equation (1), which is based on the regenerative power in
deceleration or equation (2), which is based on that in constant speed operation.
Discharging Capability (kWs) =
Braking Time (s)×Rated Motor Capacity (kW)
2
Discharging Capability (kWs) = Braking Time (s) × Rated Motor Capacity (kW)
Data for F50
0
1 to 900
999
(1)
(2)
Function
Apply the discharging capability specified for braking resistor built-in type
Discharge 1 to 900 kWs
Disable electronic thermal overload protection
n Allowable average loss (F51)
Allowable average loss is a braking resistor capacity that can be applied for continuos
operation of a motor. It can be calculated from the %ED and rated motor capacity using
equation (3), which is based on the regenerative power in deceleration or equation (4), which
is based on that in constant speed operation.
%ED (%)
Allowable Loss (kW) =
100
Allowable Average Loss (kW) =
×Rated Motor Capacity (kW)
(3)
2
%ED (%)
100
× Rated Motor Capacity (kW)
Data for F51
0
0.001 to
50.000
(4)
Function
Apply the allowable average loss specified for braking resistor built-in type
Discharge 0.001 to 50.000 kW
9-32
9.2 Details of Function Codes
9.2.2
E codes (Extension terminal functions)
E01 to E03
Terminal Command Assignment to [X1] to [X3]
Refer to E98 and E99.
E01 to E03, E98 and E99 may assign commands (listed below) to terminals [X1] to [X3],
[FWD], and [REV] which are general-purpose programmable input terminals.
These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to
define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal. The default
setting is normal logic, that is "Active ON."
To assign negative logic input to any input terminal, set the function code to the value of
1000s shown in ( ) in the table below. To keep explanations as simple as possible, the
examples shown below are all written for the normal logic system.
Data for E01 to E03,
E98 and E99
0, 1, 2
(1000, 1001, 1002)
Terminal command assigned
Command symbols
(Input signals)
4 (1004)
Select ACC/DEC time
(RT1)
6 (1006)
Enable 3-wire operation (2 steps)
(HLD)
7 (1007)
Coarse to a stop
(BX)
8 (1008)
Reset alarm
(RST)
9 (1009)
Enable external alarm trip
(THR)
10 (1010)
Ready for jogging
(JOG)
11 (1011)
Switch frequency command 2/1
(Hz2/Hz1)
19 (1019)
Enable write from keypad
(WE-KP)
20 (1020)
Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
21 (1021)
Switch normal/inverse operation
(IVS)
24 (1024)
Enable communications link
(RS485 communication, option)
(LE)
33 (1033)
Reset PID integral and differential components (PID-RST)
34 (1034)
Hold PID integral component
(PID-HLD)
98*
Run forward. Short-circuiting terminals
[FWD] and [CM] runs the motor forward.
Opening them decelerates the motor to stop
(FWD)
99*
Run reverse. Short-circuiting terminals [REV]
and [CM] runs the motor reverse. Opening
them decelerates the motor to stop
(REV)
* No negative logic input is allowed for data 98 and 99. Note that negative logic input can never be used for
the motor drive commands (FWD) and (REV).
(Example using negative logic system)
Assigning multistep frequency 2 (SS2) to terminal [X1]
If function code E01 is set to 1, logic is normal ("Active ON"). Short-circuiting
terminals [X1] and [CM] makes (SS2) active.
If E01 is set to 1001, logic is negative ("Active OFF"). Opening the circuit between
[X1] and [CM] makes (SS2) active.
9-33
FUNCTION CODES
(SS1), (SS2) and
(SS4)
Chap. 9
Select multistep frequency (0 to 7 steps)
Terminal function assignment and data setting
n Select multistep frequency--(SS1), (SS2), and (SS4)
(Function code data = 0, 1, and 2)
Switching digital input signals (SS1), (SS2), and (SS4) ON/OFF may switch the present set
frequency to those defined by function codes C05 through C11 (multistep frequencies). With
this, the inverter may drive the motor at 8 different preset speeds.
The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching
(SS1), (SS2), and (SS4). In the column "Selected frequency," "Other than multistep
frequency" represents the set frequencies defined by frequency command 1 (F01), frequency
command 2 (C30), and others. For details, refer to the block diagram in Chapter 4, Section 4.2
"Drive Frequency Command Generator."
Terminal [X3]
Terminal [X2]
Terminal [X1]
(Function code E03) (Function code E02) (Function code E01)
Selected frequency
2 (SS4)
1 (SS2)
0 (SS1)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other than multistep frequency
OFF
OFF
ON
C05 (multistep frequency 1)
OFF
ON
OFF
C06 (multistep frequency 2)
OFF
ON
ON
C07 (multistep frequency 3)
ON
OFF
OFF
C08 (multistep frequency 4)
ON
OFF
ON
C09 (multistep frequency 5)
ON
ON
OFF
C10 (multistep frequency 6)
ON
ON
ON
C11 (multistep frequency 7)
n Select ACC/DEC time (2 steps)--(RT1)
(Function code data = 4)
Digital input signal (RT1) assigned to the specified terminal ON/OFF may switch
combinations between acceleration/deceleration time 1 (defined by function codes F07 and
F08) and acceleration/deceleration time 2 (defined by E10 and E11).
Turning (RT1) ON, for example, enables the inverter to drive the motor using acceleration/
deceleration time 2.
(RT1)
Selected acceleration/deceleration time
OFF
F07: Acceleration time 1
F08: Deceleration time 1
ON
E10: Acceleration time 2
E11: Deceleration time 2
The above acceleration/deceleration time switching takes effect also in S-curved or
curvilinear operation defined by H07.
9-34
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Enable 3-wire operation--(HLD)
(Function code data = 6)
Digital input signal (HLD) may self-hold
the forward (FWD)/reverse (REV) run
commands given at the external signal
input terminals to enable 3-wire inverter
operation.
Shorting the circuit between the (HLD)assigned terminal and terminal [CM] will
self-hold the (FWD) or (REV) command.
Opening the circuit will release the hold.
If (HLD) is not assigned to any terminal,
the inverter runs in 2-wire operation
using (FWD) and (REV).
n Coast to a stop--(BX)
(Function code data = 7)
Shorting the circuit between the (BX)assigned terminal and terminal [CM] will
immediately shut down the inverter
output so that the motor will coast to a
stop without issuing any alarms.
(Function code data = 8)
(RST) should be kept OFF for normal inverter operation.
n Enable external alarm trip--(THR)
(Function code data = 9)
When the motor is running, opening the circuit between the (THR)-assigned terminal and
terminal [CM] will immediately shut down the inverter output and issue the alarm "0H2."
The motor will coast to a stop.
This signal will be self-held inside the inverter until the
key is pressed to reset it or any
other reset action is taken. If (THR) is not assigned to any terminal, the inverter interprets this
as (THR) always being ON.
Use this function to protect the external-braking resistor from overheating.
9-35
FUNCTION CODES
When the protective function has been activated (the inverter is in Alarm mode), shorting the
circuit between the (RST)-assigned terminal and terminal [CM] will reset the alarm output on
terminals [Y1] and [30A/B/C]. Opening the circuit will release all the alarm indications to
restart operation. Allow 10 ms or more for the short-circuit time.
Chap. 9
n Reset alarm--(RST)
n Ready for jogging--(JOG)
(Function code data = 10)
Turning ON the (JOG) command makes the motor ready for jogging. Use this command for
fine adjustment to position a workpiece, for example.
+
keying may also make the motor ready for jogging depending upon
Simultaneous
whether keypad operation or terminal command operation is selected and whether the (JOG)
command is ON or OFF, as listed below.
When keypad operation is selected (F02 = 0, 2, or 3)
If (JOG) is:
ON
OFF
+
keying
The motor becomes ready for:
Disabled.
Jogging
Toggles between normal and jogging.
Normal running
Jogging
When terminal command operation is selected (F02 = 1), simultaneous
disabled.
+
keying is
Jogging
When the motor is ready for jogging with (JOG) being ON, pressing the
(FWD) or (REV) command ON will start the motor to jog.
If the
key or turning the
key is released, the motor will decelerate to a stop.
Jogging operation follows the settings of:
- Jogging frequency set by function code C20
- Acceleration or deceleration time set by function code H54
• Switching between the ready-to-jog and ready-to-run statuses is possible only
when the inverter stops its output, not possible when it is running the motor.
• To jog the motor by the concurrent input of (JOG) and run command (e.g.,
(FWD), the input time lag between those commands should be within 100 ms;
otherwise, the inverter will not jog the motor.
If the (FWD) command is turned ON preceding the (JOG) command, the inverter
runs the motor in ordinary operation until the (JOG) is turned ON.
n Switch frequency command 2/1--(Hz2/Hz1)
(Function code data = 11)
Turning the digital input signal (Hz2/Hz1) ON/OFF can switch the frequency setting means
between frequency command 1 (defined by function code F01) and frequency command 2
(defined by function code C30).
If (Hz2/Hz1) is not assigned to any terminal, the frequency setting means defined by function
code F01 will take effect.
(Hz2/Hz1)
Frequency setting means
OFF
F01: Frequency command 1
ON
C30: Frequency command 2
& For details of the relationship for frequency settings other than frequency command 1 or
2, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator."
9-36
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Enable write from keypad--(WE-KP)
(Function code data = 19)
Turning OFF the (WE-KP) command prohibits changing of function code data from the
keypad.
Only when the (WE-KP) command is turned ON, you may access function code data from the
keypad according to the setting of function code F00 as listed below.
If the (WE-KP) command is not assigned to any terminal, the inverter will interpret (WE-KP)
as being always ON.
If (WE-KP)
is set to:
F00
OFF
Disabled.
0
1
ON
Function
Inhibit editing of function code data
Permit editing of function code data
Inhibit editing of function code data except F00 and H03
If you mistakenly assign the (WE-KP) command to any terminal, function code
data will be no longer edited. To cancel such an undesired assignment, turn the
(WE-KP) command ON once (by short-circuiting between the (WE-KP)-assigned
terminal and terminal [CM]) and then reassign a correct command to the terminal.
n Cancel PID control--(Hz/PID)
(Function code data = 20)
Turning the (Hz/PID) command ON/OFF enables or disables the PID control.
If the PID control is disabled with the (Hz/PID) being OFF, the inverter runs the motor with
the frequency manually set by any of the multistep, keypad, or analog input.
Selected function
OFF
Enable PID control
ON
Disable PID control / Enable manual settings
n Switch normal/inverse operation--(IVS)
(Function code data = 21)
Turning the (IVS) command ON/OFF switches the output frequency control between normal
(proportional to the set frequency components) and inverse operation for the PID process or
manually set frequencies. To select the inverse operation, switch the (IVS) command to ON.
When the PID control is enabled, turning the (IVS) command ON inverts the PID process
control selected by function code J01. For example, if the PID process control is normal,
turning it ON switches it to inverse, or vice versa.
9-37
FUNCTION CODES
& Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.8 "PID Frequency Command Generator" for details.
Chap. 9
(Hz/PID)
For ordinary set frequency (J01 = 0)
For PID control (J01 = 1 or 2)
If (IVS) is:
Set frequency
If (IVS) is:
Selected PID control
(J01)
PID operation
OFF
Normal
operation
OFF
1: Normal operation
Normal
ON
Inverse
operation
ON
1: Normal operation
Inverse
OFF
2: Inverse operation
Inverse
ON
2: Inverse operation
Normal
n Enable communications link--(LE)
(Function code data = 24)
Turning ON the (LE) command selects link operation. The inverter will run the motor with
the frequency command or drive command given via the RS485 communications facility
defined by function code H30.
If the (LE) command is not assigned to any terminal, the inverter will interpret (LE) as being
always ON.
& Refer to Chapter 4, Sections 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator," 4.3 "Drive
Command Generator" and 4.4 "Terminal Command Decoders," and the RS485
Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for more details.
n Reset PID integral and differential components--(PID-RST)
(Function code data = 33)
Turning ON the (PID-RST) command resets the PID integral and differential components.
n Hold PID integral component--(PID-HLD)
(Function code data = 34)
Turning ON the (PID-HLD) command holds the current inverter output voltage constant by
suppressing an increase of PID integral component.
n Run forward--(FWD)
(Function code E98/E99 data = 98)
If the (FWD) command is turned ON, the inverter runs the motor forward; if OFF, it
decelerates the motor to a stop.
n Run reverse--(REV)
(Function code E98/E99 data = 99)
If the (REV) is turned ON, the inverter runs the motor in reverse; if OFF, it decelerates the
motor to a stop.
E10
Acceleration Time 2
Refer to F07.
E11
Deceleration Time 2
Refer to F08.
Refer to the descriptions of function codes F07 and F08.
9-38
9.2 Details of Function Codes
E20 and E27
Status Signal Assignment to [Y1], [30A], [30B] and [30C]
E20 to E27 may assign output signals (listed below) to terminals [Y1] (transistor switch) and
[30A], [30B] and [30C] (mechanical relay contacts) which are general-purpose
programmable output terminals.
These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to
define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic may interpret either the
ON or OFF status of each terminal as active.
Terminals [30A], [30B], and [30C] are mechanical relay contacts. In the normal logic, if an
alarm occurs, the relay will be excited so that [30A] and [30C] will be short-circuited,
signaling an occurrence of the error to external equipment. On the other hand, in the negative
logic, the relay will cut off the excitation current to open [30A] and [30C]. This may be useful
for the implementation of failsafe power systems.
The default setting is normal logic, that is "Active ON."
To assign negative logic input to any input terminal, set the function code to the value of
1000s shown in ( ) in the table below. To keep explanations as simple as possible, the
examples shown below are all written for the normal logic system.
When negative logic is active, the inverter switches all output signals to the active
side (for example, the alarm side). To avoid system malfunctions caused by this,
interlock the signals to keep them ON using an external power source. To use
negative logic with the output signal, set the data of 1000s in ( ) as listed in the table
below.
Data for E20 or E27 To assign the following status signals to terminals: Output signal symbols
(RUN)
1 (1001)
Frequency arrival signal
(FAR)
2 (1002)
Frequency detection
(FDT)
3 (1003)
Undervoltage detection
(LU)
5 (1005)
Torque limiting (Current limiting)
(IOL)
6 (1006)
Auto-restart after recovery from instantaneous
power failure
(IPF)
7 (1007)
Motor overload early warning
(OL)
26 (1026)
Retry in operation
(TRY)
30 (1030)
Lifetime alarm
(LIFE)
35 (1035)
Inverter running
(RUN2)
36 (1036)
Overload prevention control
(OLP)
37 (1037)
Current detection
(ID)
41 (1041)
Low level current detection
(IDL)
99 (1099)
Alarm relay contact output (for any fault)
(ALM)
Terminal function assignment and data setting
n Inverter running (Speed > 0)--(RUN)
(Function code data = 0)
This output signal is used to tell the external equipment that the inverter is running with a
speed greater than 0. It switches ON when the inverter output frequency exceeds the start
frequency of the motor. It switches OFF when the output frequency is less than the start
frequency or the inverter is DC-braking the motor.
If this signal is assigned to terminal [Y1] in negative logic (active OFF), it can be
used to indicate the inverter stopping its output.
9-39
FUNCTION CODES
Inverter running (Speed > 0)
Chap. 9
0 (1000)
n Frequency arrival signal--(FAR)
(Function code data = 1)
This signal is turned ON when the difference between the output and set frequencies is within
the allowable error zone (prefixed to 2.5 Hz).
n Frequency detection--(FDT)
(Function code data = 2)
This signal is turned ON when the output frequency of inverter has come to the frequency
detection level specified by function code E31. It is turned OFF when the output frequency
drops lower than the detection level for 1 Hz (hysteresis band of the frequency comparator:
prefixed at 1 Hz).
n Undervoltage detection--(LU)
(Function code data = 3)
This signal is turned ON when the voltage of the DC link bus of the inverter drops below the
specified level or when the motor stops due to activation of the undervoltage protection
feature (undervoltage trip). It is turned OFF if the DC link bus voltage exceeds the specified
voltage.
n Torque limiting (Current limiting)--(IOL)
(Function code data = 5)
This signal is turned ON when the inverter is limiting the motor drive current by activating
the current limiter of either software (F43: Function select, F44: Operation level) or hardware
(H12 = 1: Current limit). The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.
Using this signal allows the inverter to show an overload alarm on the display panel of the
external equipment.
n Auto-restart after recovery from instantaneous power failure--(IPF)
(Function code data = 6)
This signal is turned ON during the period from when the inverter detects the undervoltage of
the DC link bus and shuts down the output (if auto-restart after a recovery from momentary
power failure is selected (F14 = 4 or 5)) until auto-restarting (the output frequency has
recovered up to the set frequency). At that moment of auto-restarting, this signal is turned
OFF.
n Motor overload early warning--(OL)
(Function code data = 7)
This signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning for enabling you to take corrective
action before the inverter detects a motor overload (0L1 alarm) and shuts down its output.
The motor properties are specified by function codes F10 and F12 (Motor characteristics
selection and thermal time constant for electronic thermal overload protection). If a value
calculated from the settings of F10 and F12 exceeds the detection level of the early warning
set by function code E34, this signal is turned ON. Normally, the recommended set current
level for E34 is 80 to 90% of the allowable continuous load current set by function code F11.
Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning (OL),
but also the current detection (ID) and low level current detection (IDL).
n Retry in operation--(TRY)
(Function code data = 26)
This signal is turned ON when the retry facility specified by function codes H04 (number of
retries) and H05 (retry interval) is being activated.
& Refer to function codes H04 and H05 for details of the output timing and number of
retries.
9-40
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Lifetime alarm--(LIFE)
(Function code data = 30)
This signal is turned ON when it is judged that the service life of any of capacitors (capacitor
in the DC link bus and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards) and cooling fan
has expired.
The judgement level for service life are as follows. This information can be checked in Menu
#5 "Maintenance information" of Programming mode.
Parts
Judgement level for service life
Capacitor in the DC link
bus
Capacitance: Max. 85% of factory default
Capacitor/s on the
printed circuit boards
Accumulated run time: 61,000 hours or more
Cooling fan
Accumulated run time: 61,000 hours or more (1.5 to 3.7 kW
models) (Based on the assumption that the inverter runs in an
ambient temperature of 40°C)
This facility provides tentative information for service life of the parts. If this signal is issued,
check the service life of these parts in your system according to the maintenance procedure to
determine whether the parts should be replaced or not. To maintain stable and reliable
operation and avoid unexpected failures, daily and periodic maintenance must be performed.
For details, refer to the FRENIC-Mini Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0791-E), Chapter 7
"MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION."
n Inverter running--(RUN2)
(Function code data = 35)
Chap. 9
This signal is turned ON when the main switching circuit (IGBT gates) is activated; it is OFF
when it is not activated.
n Overload prevention control--(OLP)
& For details of the overload prevention control, refer to the descriptions of function code
H70.
n Current detection--(ID)
(Function code data = 37)
This signal is turned ON when the output current exceeds the operation level specified by
function code E34 and stays in this status for the duration specified by function code E35 (on
delay timer). The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.
If the output current drops to 90% of the operation level, this signal is turned OFF.
This signal can be used as a reference for determining the running speed in the operation of
load machinery or system, by monitoring the inverter's load state.
Function codes E34 and E35 are effective not only for the current detection (ID),
but often also for the overload early warning (OL) and low level current detection
(IDL).
9-41
FUNCTION CODES
(Function code data = 36)
This signal is turned ON when the overload prevention facility is activated if the frequency
drop rate comes to be the setting specified by function code H70. The minimum ON-duration
is 100 ms.
n Low level current detection--(IDL)
(Function code data = 41)
This signal is turned ON when the output current drops below the operation level specified by
function code E34 and stays in this status for the duration specified by function code E35 (on
delay timer).
If the output current exceeds the sum of the current level of operation and 5% of the rated
current of the inverter, then this signal is turned OFF.
Use this signal to indicate 0A output current due to a broken output wire, zero motor torque,
or any such factor undetectable by the inverter alarm facilities.
Function codes E34 and E35 are effective not only for the low level current
detection (IDL), but often also for the overload early warning (OL) and current
detection (ID).
n Alarm relay contact output (for any fault)--(ALM)
(Function code data = 99)
This signal is turned ON if the protection facility is activated so that the inverter enters Alarm
mode.
In a system which monitors inverter alarm information through [30A/B/C] relay contacts,
make sure that function code data of E20 or E27 is set to 99.
E31
Frequency Detection (FDT) (Detection level)
Specifies an operating level for the set frequency detection signal. The hysteresis frequency
band between detection and release levels is 1.0 Hz.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 400.0 (Hz)
E34
Overload Early Warning/Current Detection/Low Current Detection (Level)
E35
Current Detection/Low Current Detection (Timer)
E34 and E35 set the operation level for overload early warning, current detection and low
current detection, and the timer count.
n Operation Level (E34)
Sets the operation level for the motor overload early warning (OL), inverter output current
detection (ID), or low current output detection (IDL).
- Data setting range: Current value of 1 to 200% of the rated inverter current in units of
amperes.
n Timer (E35)
Sets the timer for the inverter output current detection (ID) and low current output detection
(IDL).
- Data setting range: 0.01 to 600.00 (sec.)
9-42
9.2 Details of Function Codes
E39
Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time
Refer to E50.
E39 and E50 set a coefficient to be used for setting the constant feeding rate time, load shaft
speed or line speed and for displaying its output status.
Data setting ranges and calculation equations
- Data setting range for E39: 0.000 to 9.999
for E50: 0.01 to 200.00
Const. Feeding Rate Time (min) =
Coeff. of Speed Indication (E50)
Freq. × Coeff. for Const. Feeding Rate Time (E39)
Load Shaft Speed = (E50: Coeff. for Speed Indication) ´ Frequency (Hz)
Line Speed = (E50: Coeff. for Speed Indication) ´ Frequency (Hz)
Where, Freq. is the set frequency if each expression is for one of the set data for the constant
feeding rate time, load shaft speed, or line speed; it is the output frequency if each expression
is for the output status monitor.
If the constant feeding rate time is 999.9 min or more, or the denominator on the right in the
first equation is 0, then the number 999.9 will be displayed.
E40
PID Display Coefficient A
E41
PID Display Coefficient B
Chap. 9
E40 or E41 sets the conversion factor to equal an indicated value (process amount) with the
target and feedback values in PID control.
- Data setting range: -999 to 0.00 to 999 for conversion factors A and B.
Data setting and operation
Set the maximum and minimum PID indication values to function code E40 (factor A) and
E41 (factor B), respectively. Calculate the indication value using the equation below.
Indication value = (Target or feedback value) x (Factor A - B) + B
E43
Monitor Item Selection
Selects the monitoring item to be displayed on the LED monitor. When turning ON power to
the inverter or after changing function code E43, the inverter will indicate the selected item
on the LED monitor.
Data for E43
0
3
4
9
10
12
13
Function (Monitored items)
Speed monitor item (selected by the sub item of function code E48)
Inverter output current
Inverter output voltage
Inverter input power
PID command value*
PID feedback value*
Timer value**
* If 0 (Disable) is set for function code J01, "- - - -" appears on the LED.
** If 0 (Disable) is set for function code C21, "- - - -" appears on the LED.
9-43
FUNCTION CODES
n Target (commanded) and feedback values in PID control
E48
LED Monitor (Speed monitor item)
Selects the speed-monitoring format on the
LED monitor.
E50
Data for E48
The LED monitor displays
the sub item:
0
Output frequency before slip
compensation
1
Output frequency after slip
compensation
2
Set frequency
4
Load shaft speed in r/min
5
Line speed in m/min
6
Constant feeding rate time
Coefficient for Speed Indication
Refer to E39.
Detail for the speed display coefficient setting is given in the description of function code
E39.
E52
Menu Display Mode for Keypad
Selects the menu display mode for the keypad in Programming mode.
Data for E52
0
1
2
The keypad will enter:
Function code data setting mode in which Menu #1 "Data setting" only is
displayed.
Function code data check mode in which Menu #2 "Data checking" only is
displayed.
Full-menu mode in which all menus may be displayed.
E60
Built-in Potentiometer (Function selection)
E61
Analog Input Signal Definition for [12]
E62
Analog Input Signal Definition for [C1]
E60, E61, and E62 define the function of the built-in potentiometer, terminals [12] and [C1],
respectively.
Data for E60,
E61, or E62
0
1
2
3
5
This function will be defined
for potentiometer and terminals [12] and [C1]:
None
Auxiliary frequency command 1*
Auxiliary frequency command 2**
PID process command 1 (J02 setting is also required.)
PID feedback value (Not applicable to function code E60)
* This is an auxiliary frequency input to be added to frequency command 1, but never to frequency command 2.
Frequency commands 1 and 2 are frequencies set by the means specified by F01 and C30, respectively. The set
frequency can be switched between, for example, frequency command 1 added by the auxiliary frequency and the raw
frequency 2 added by nothing, to drive the motor in the desired manner. For more details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2
"Drive Frequency Command Generator."
** An auxiliary frequency input to be added to the set frequency. For example, the auxiliary frequency input to be added to
the preset frequency used for the multistep frequency operation.
If the same data is set to these function codes, the priority order will be:
E60 > E61 > E62
9-44
9.2 Details of Function Codes
E98
Terminal Command Assignment to [FWD]
Refer to E01 to E03.
E99
Terminal Command Assignment to [REV]
Refer to E01 to E03.
For details on the command assignment to terminals [FWD] and [REV], refer to the
descriptions for function codes E01 to E03.
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-45
9.2.3
C codes (Control functions of frequency)
C01 to C03
C04
Jump Frequencies 1, 2 and 3
Jump Frequency Band
These function codes enable the inverter to jump up to three different points on the output
frequency in order to skip the resonance frequency caused by the motor drive frequency and
natural frequency of the driven mechanism.
- During acceleration, the moment the set frequency reaches the bottom of the set jump
frequency band, the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency until the output
frequency reaches the upper limit and proceeds with the acceleration until the next set point
is reached or set speed is reached.
During deceleration, the inverter processes the set jump frequency band in reverse to the
acceleration curve. Refer to the left-hand figure below.
- When the set jump frequency bands overlap, the overlapped band is ignored, the inverter
takes the lowest frequency within the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the
highest as the peak. Refer to the right-hand figure below.
n Jump frequencies 1,2 and 3 (C01, C02 and C03)
Set the center of the jump frequency band.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 400.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump band)
n Jump frequency band (C04)
Set the width of the jump frequency band.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump band)
C05 to C11
Multistep Frequency Settings 1 to 7
These function codes set frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 7.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 400.00 (Hz)
- Turning terminal commands (SS1), (SS2) and (SS4) ON/OFF selectively switches the set
frequency of the inverter in 7 steps. For details of the terminal function assignment, refer to
the descriptions for function codes E01 to E03 "Command Assignment to Terminals [X1]
to [X3]."
& For the multistep frequency driving, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency
Command Generator."
9-46
9.2 Details of Function Codes
C20
Jogging Frequency
Sets the frequency for jogging operations.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 400.00 (Hz)
& For details on jogging operations, refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to
E03 "Command Assignment to Terminals [X1] to [X3]."
C21
Timer Operation
Enables or disables timer operation. If it is enabled, entering a run command will run the
inverter to drive the motor for the period preset to the timer.
Data for C21
The timer operation is:
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
- Pressing the
key during the timer countdown cancels the timer operation.
- If the timer has counted down to zero (0), pressing the
drive the motor even with C21 being set to 1.
key will not start the inverter to
- Timer operation can be started by turning ON the terminal command (FWD) or (REV).
An example of timer operation
Setting up the timer conditions beforehand
- To display the timer count on the LED monitor, set function code E43 (LED monitor) to 13
(Timer count).
Timer operation (by giving a run command with the
key)
(1) Use the / key to set the timer count (in seconds) while monitoring the current count
displayed on the LED monitor. Note that the timer count is expressed as integers.
key to run the motor, and the timer will start the countdown. The moment
(2) Press the
key
the timer finishes the countdown, the inverter stops running the motor even if the
is not pressed. (Timer operation is possible even when the timer count is not displayed on
the LED monitor.)
If timer operation started by the terminal command (FWD) is finished and the
inverter decelerates the motor to a stop, then the LED monitor displays "E d" and
the monitor indication ("0" if the timer count is selected) alternately. Turning
(FWD) OFF will switch the LED back to the monitor indication.
9-47
FUNCTION CODES
/
- Set up the frequency for the timer operation using the built-in potentiometer or the
key. If the LED displays the timer count, press the
key to switch to the speed monitor
and then set the frequency for the timer operation.
Chap. 9
- Set C21 to 1 to enable timer operation.
C30
Frequency Command 2
(Refer to F01.)
For details on frequency command 2, refer to the description for function code F01.
C32
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain for terminal input [12])
C34
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain reference point for terminal input [12])
(Refer to F18.)
(Refer to F18.)
C37
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain for terminal input [C1])
C39
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain reference point for terminal input [C1])
(Refer to F18.)
(Refer to F18.)
For details on adjusting the analog inputs, refer to the description for function code F18.
C33
Analog Input Adjustment (Filter for terminal input [12])
C38
Analog Input Adjustment (Filter for terminal input [C1])
C33 (voltage input) and C38 (current input) set the time constant of the filter for the analog
input on terminal [12] and [C1], respectively.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (sec.)
- The larger the time constant, the slower the response. Set the time constant suitable to the
load with consideration given to the system response. When the analog input fluctuates due
to electric noise, first remove the noise factor or protect the input from noise by electric
means (grounding the shield, ferrite core or capacitor). After that, increase the time
constant if you cannot remove the noise factor to a sufficiently degree.
C50
Bias (Bias reference point for frequency command 1)
(Refer to F18.)
For details of setting the bias reference point for frequency command 1, refer to the
descriptions of function code F18.
C51
Bias (Bias for PID command 1)
C52
Bias (Bias reference point for PID command 1)
These function codes modify the analog input of the PID process command 1 by gain and bias,
enabling defining the arbitrary relationship between the analog input and PID process
command to be arbitrarily defined.
& The actual setting is the same as that of function code F18. For details, refer to the
description of function code F18.
Note that function codes C32, C34, C37 and C39 are shared by the drive frequency
commands.
n Bias (C51)
- Data setting range: -100.00 to 100.00 (%)
n Bias reference point (C52)
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 100.00 (%)
9-48
9.2 Details of Function Codes
9.2.4
P codes (Motor parameters)
P02
Motor Parameter (Rated capacity)
Sets the nominal rated capacity that is denoted on the rating nameplate of the motor.
Data for P02
P03
If the nominal rated capacity is:
0.01 to 10.00
0.01 to 10.00 kW
when function code P99 is set to 0, 3 or 4.
0.01 to 10.00
0.01 to 10.00 HP
when function code P99 is set to 1.
Motor Parameter (Rated current)
Sets the nominal rated current that is printed on the rating nameplate of the motor.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 99.99 (Amp.)
P09
Motor Parameter (Slip compensation gain)
Sets the gain to compensate for the motor slip frequency.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 200.0 (%)
Compensation gains for the rated slip frequencies listed in the following table are ones for
Fuji standard motors.
Fuji standard
8-series motors
(Hz)
Typical motors
rated in HP (Hz)
Fuji standard
6-series motors
(Hz)
Other motors
(Hz)
0.06/0.1
1.77
2.50
1.77
1.77
0.1/0.12
1.77
2.50
1.77
1.77
0.2/0.25
2.33
2.50
2.33
2.33
0.4/0.5
2.40
2.50
2.40
2.40
0.75/1
2.33
2.50
2.33
2.33
1.5/2
2.00
2.50
2.00
2.00
2.2/3
1.80
1.77
1.80
1.80
3.7/5
1.93
1.50
1.93
1.93
The 200 V and 400 V series of motors share the same data listed above.
To compensate slip of a motor correctly, the rated voltage (at base frequency) (F05)
and P codes (Motor parameters) should be also set consistently.
9-49
FUNCTION CODES
Rated capacity
(kW/HP)
Chap. 9
Typical rated slip frequencies for 100%
P99
Motor Selection
Selects the motor to be used.
Data for P99
To use:
0
Fuji standard motors (8-series)
1
GE motors
3
Fuji standard motors (6- series)
4
Other motors
In order to perform automatic control features such as the auto torque boost/auto energy
saving and slip compensation or electronic thermal overload protection for the motor, the
inverter invokes the rated values and properties of the motor. To match the drive properties
between the inverter and motor, set the motor properties to this code and set function code
H03 (Initialize data) to 2 to initialize the motor parameter. This action automatically updates
the data of function codes P03 and P09 and the constants used inside the inverter.
When using a Fuji standard motor, select the data listed below according to the model.
- P99 = 0 for Fuji standard 8-series motors (current models)
- P99 = 3 for Fuji standard 6-series motors (conventional models)
For motors from other manufacturers or unknown models, set P99 to 4 (Other motors).
• If P99 is set to 4 (Other motors), the parameters of the Fuji standard 8-series
motor will apply as an alternative.
• The inverter also supports motors rated by HP (horse power: typical in North
America, P99 = 1).
9-50
9.2 Details of Function Codes
9.2.5
H03
H codes (High performance functions)
Data Initialization
Initializes the current function code settings to the factory defaults or initializes the motor
constants (parameters).
Data for H03
Function
0
Disables initialization
(Settings made by the user manually will be
retained.)
1
Initializes all function code data to the factory
defaults
+
Initializes the P03 data (Rated current of the
motor) and internally used constants to the
motor constants determined by P02 data
(Motor capacity) and P99 (Motor
characteristics), as listed on the next page.
keys changes data in the
2
Setting procedure
Simultaneous keying of
keys changes data in
order of 0, 1, 2, and of
+
reverse order.
Pressing the
the set data.
key will fix
Initializes P09 data (Slip compensation gain)
to 0.0.
- If you do initialization while H03 is set at "1" or "2," H03 will automatically go back to "0"
(factory default) at the completion of initialization.
9-51
FUNCTION CODES
- To initialize the motor constants, set the related function codes as follows.
1) P02 Motor Parameters: Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW.
(Rated capacity)
2) P99 Motor Selection:
Select the characteristics of the motor. (Refer to the
descriptions given for P99.)
3) H03 Data Initialization: Initialize the motor constants. (H03=2)
4) P03 Motor Parameters: Set the rated current printed on the nameplate if the set data
(Rated current):
differs from the rated current.
- If any value out of the general motor capacity is set for P02, the capacity will be internally
converted to the applicable motor rating (see the table on the next page).
Chap. 9
<Procedure for initializing motor constants>
n
If P99 (Motor selection) is set to 0 (Fuji standard 8-series motors), 3 (Fuji standard 6-series motors),
or 4 (Other motors):
Three-phase 400V
Three-phase 200V
Single-phase 200V
Power
supply
voltage
Setting
range
(kW)
Function code
P02
Rated current (A)
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
If P99 (Motor selection) is set to:
0
3
4
Shipping
destination
(Version)
Shipping
destination
(Version)
Shipping
destination
(Version)
Asia
EU
Japan Asia
EU
Japan Asia
EU Japan
0.01 to 0.06
0.06
0.40
0.44
0.38
0.40
0.44
0.38
0.40
0.44
0.38
0.07 to 0.10
0.1
0.62
0.68
0.61
0.62
0.68
0.61
0.62
0.68
0.61
0.11 to 0.20
0.2
1.18
1.30
1.16
1.19
1.30
1.18
1.18
1.30
1.16
0.21 to 0.40
0.4
2.10
2.30
2.13
2.10
2.30
2.13
2.10
2.30
2.13
0.41 to 0.75
0.75
3.29
3.60
3.36
3.29
3.60
3.36
3.29
3.60
3.36
0.76 to 1.50
1.5
5.55
6.10
5.87
5.55
6.10
5.87
5.55
6.10
5.87
1.51 to 2.20
2.2
8.39
9.20
8.80
8.39
9.20
8.80
8.39
9.20
8.80
2.21 to 3.70
3.7
13.67 15.00 14.38 13.67 15.00 14.38 13.67 15.00 14.38
3.71 to 5.50
5.5
20.04 22.00 21.19 20.04 22.00 21.19 20.04 22.00 21.19
5.51 to 10.00
7.5
26.41 29.00 28.17 26.41 29.00 28.17 26.41 29.00 28.17
0.01 to 0.06
0.06
0.19
0.22
0.19
0.19
0.22
0.19
0.19
0.22
0.19
0.07 to 0.10
0.1
0.31
0.34
0.31
0.31
0.34
0.31
0.31
0.34
0.31
0.11 to 0.20
0.2
0.58
0.65
0.58
0.59
0.65
0.59
0.58
0.65
0.58
0.21 to 0.40
0.4
1.09
1.15
1.07
1.09
1.15
1.07
1.09
1.15
1.07
0.41 to 0.75
0.75
1.71
1.80
1.68
1.71
1.80
1.68
1.71
1.80
1.68
0.76 to 1.50
1.5
3.04
3.05
2.94
3.04
3.05
2.94
3.04
3.05
2.94
1.51 to 2.20
2.2
4.54
4.60
4.40
4.54
4.60
4.40
4.54
4.60
4.40
2.21 to 3.70
3.7
7.43
7.50
7.20
7.43
7.50
7.20
7.43
7.50
7.20
3.71 to 5.50
5.5
10.97 11.00 10.59 10.97 11.00 10.59 10.97 11.00 10.59
5.51 to 10.00
7.5
14.63 14.50 14.08 14.63 14.50 14.08 14.63 14.50 14.08
NOTE: The above values in the "Rated current" column are exclusively applicable to the four-pole Fuji standard motors rated for 200
V and 400 V at 60 Hz. If you use non-standard or other manufacturer’s motors, change the P02 data to the rated current printed on the
motor's nameplate.
9-52
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n
If P99 (Motor selection) is set to 1 (HP motors):
Function
code
P02
Rated current (A)
Applicable
motor
rating
(HP)
If P99(Motor selection) is set to:
1
Shipping destination (Version)
Asia
EU
Japan
0.01 to 0.10
0.1
0.44
0.44
0.44
0.11 to 0.12
0.12
0.68
0.68
0.68
0.13 to 0.25
0.25
1.40
1.40
1.40
0.26 to 0.50
0.5
2.00
2.00
2.00
0.51 to 1.00
1
3.00
3.00
3.00
1.01 to 2.00
2
5.80
5.80
5.80
2.01 to 3.00
3
7.90
7.90
7.90
3.01 to 5.00
5
12.60
12.60
12.60
5.01 to 7.50
7.5
18.60
18.60
18.60
7.51 to 10.00
10
25.30
25.30
25.30
0.01 to 0.10
0.1
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.11 to 0.12
0.12
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.25
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.26 to 0.50
0.5
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.51 to 1.00
1
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.01 to 2.00
2
2.90
2.90
2.90
2.01 to 3.00
3
4.00
4.00
4.00
3.01 to 5.00
5
6.30
6.30
6.30
5.01 to 7.50
7.5
9.30
9.30
9.30
7.51 to 10.00
10
12.70
12.70
12.70
NOTE: The above values in the "Rated current" column are exclusively applicable to the four-pole Fuji standard motors rated for 200
V and 400 V at 60 Hz. If you use non-standard or other manufacturer’s motors, change the P02 data to the rated current printed on the
motor's nameplate.
9-53
FUNCTION CODES
0.13 to 0.25
Chap. 9
Three-phase 400V
Three-phase 200V
Single-phase 200V
Power
supply
voltage
Setting
range
(HP)
H04
Retry (No. of retries)
H05
Retry (Latency time)
To automatically exit from the alarm status and restart the inverter, use the retry functions. In
doing so, the inverter automatically exits from Alarm mode and restarts without issuing a
block alarm even if it has entered the forced Alarm mode. If the inverter has entered Alarm
mode during retry (specified by function code H04), it issues a block alarm and does not exit
Alarm mode for restarting.
Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses of the inverter.
Alarm Status
LED monitor display
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
0C1, 0C2 or 0C3
Overvoltage protection
0U1, 0U2 or 0U3
Heat sink overheated
0H1
Motor overheated
0H4
Braking resistor overheated
dbH
Motor overloaded
0L1
Inverter overloaded
0LU
Settings and operations
n Retry times (H04)
Set the number of retry times for automatic exit from Alarm mode. If the inverter has entered
Alarm mode during the retry times specified, the inverter issues a block alarm and does not
exit alarm mode for restarting.
- Data setting range: 0 to 10 (times) (If 0 is set, the "retry" operation will not be activated.)
9-54
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Retry latency time (H05)
- Data setting range: 0.5 to 20.0 (sec.)
Sets the latency time for automatic exit from Alarm mode. Refer to the timing scheme
diagram below.
Alarm
Alarm
mode
Reset
command
H05
H05
H05
1st
2nd
H05
3rd
4th
Inverter
output
frequency
Signal in the
retry operation
- The retry operation can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter’s digital output
on terminal [Y1] or [30A/B/C]. Assign (TRY) to these terminals by setting "26" to function
code E20 or E27.
Cooling Fan ON/OFF
Note that as turning the cooling fan on/off too frequently may shorten the service life, leave
the fan running for 10 minutes or longer each time it is turned on.
Function code H06 selects whether the cooling fan runs constantly or selectively.
Data for H06
Function
0
Disable (cooling fan runs constantly)
1
Enable (cooling fan is turned on/off as required)
9-55
FUNCTION CODES
Stops the built-in cooling fan and monitoring the temperature inside the inverter when the
inverter is idling, in order to extend the service life of the cooling fan and reduce running
noise.
Chap. 9
H06
H07
Gradual Acceleration/Deceleration
Specifies the acceleration and deceleration
patterns (output frequency patterns).
Data for H07
Function
0
Disable: Linear
1
S-curve (weak)
2
S-curve (strong)
3
Curvilinear
Linear acceleration/deceleration
The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration.
S-curved acceleration/deceleration
To reduce the impact on the inverter
driven motor during acceleration/
deceleration, the inverter gradually
accelerates/decelerates the motor during
both the acceleration/ deceleration
zones.
Two frequencies can be selected for Scurved acceleration/deceleration 5%
(weak) or 10% (strong) of the maximum
output frequency. The four centers of Scurves are not affected by this selection.
Note the set acceleration/deceleration
time defines the linear acceleration/
deceleration in the zones, so that the
actual zone exceeds the set zone in this
case. Zones are defined in units of time.
Refer to the figure at the right.
Curvilinear acceleration/deceleration
The inverter drives the motor to output
the maximum performance, with the
following acceleration/deceleration patterns:
- In the zone under the base frequency,
linear acceleration/deceleration of
constant torque output for the motor
- In the zone above the base frequency,
speed two times the base frequency
and acceleration/deceleration half of
the base frequency
Set the acceleration/deceleration time giving due consideration to the load torque.
Refer to Chapter 7 "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER
CAPACITIES" for details.
9-56
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H12
Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting
The inverter features a hardware-controlled
output current limiter to protect it from an
overload hazard. The moment that the output
current exceeds the limited level due to
overload or other factor, the inverter controls
the output switching circuits so as to slow
down the output frequency and suppress the
output current momentarily.
Data for H12
Function
0
Disable
1
Enable
This control of the switching circuits may cause an instantaneous reduction in motor output
torque. However, instantaneous torque reduction may not be allowable in some systems when
the system is in a short time overloaded state. To solve this problem, this function should be
disabled and the system set up with a proper facility that is activated by the alarm output from
the inverter when it detects an overcurrent.
The same functions to limit the output current are implemented by software as
function codes F43 and F44. Generally, software features have an operation delay,
so enable function code H12 as well.
Depending upon the load, acceleration in an extremely short period may activate
the current limiter to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency, causing
the system oscillate (hunting) or making the inverter enter the OU Alarm mode and
trip. When setting the acceleration time, therefore, you need to take into account the
load condition and moment of inertia. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.1, "Selecting
Motors and Inverters."
Chap. 9
Thermistor Input (Selection)
H27
Thermistor Input (Operation level)
Set these function codes to protect the motor from an overheat hazard using the PTC (Positive
Temperature Coefficient) thermistor embedded in the motor.
n Thermistor (Select) (H26)
Enables or disables overheating protection
for the motor using the PTC thermistor,
which senses motor temperature.
Data for H26
Function
0
Disable overheating
protection
1
Enable overheating
protection
n Thermistor (Operation Level) (H27)
Determines the operation level for the overheating protection.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (V)
Connect the PTC thermistor as shown in
the figure at the right. The input current
from terminal [C1] flows across the
resistor R2 and yields the voltage. If the
voltage exceeds the operation level set
by function code H27, the overheating
protection is activated, and the inverter
enters Alarm mode and issues the alarm
"0H4" (motor protection).
9-57
FUNCTION CODES
H26
The temperature at which the overheating
protection is to be activated depends on
the characteristics of the PTC thermistor.
As shown at the right, the internal
resistance of the thermistor will step up
near the alarm temperature detection
point. Determine the operation level
(voltage Vc1) with reference based on the
variance in internal resistance.
Calculate the reference voltage Vc1 using the equation shown below and set it to function
code H27.
Substitute the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature with Rp to
obtain Vc1:
250 · Rp
250 + Rp
Vc1 =
× 10 (V)
250 · Rp
R1 +
250 + Rp
9-58
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H30
Communications Link (Function selection)
This function enables the inverter to be managed (i.e. to monitor the operation status or data
set in the function codes, to set the drive frequency and to manage the operation commands)
from a personal computer or PLC via RS485 communication. To select information in the
inverter that is to be accessible via RS485 communication, set each data to function code H30
as shown in the table below. "N" represents information that cannot be accessed via by RS485
communication, but by commands from the terminals.
& Refer to Chapter 4 "BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC" and the RS485
Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for details.
Data for H30
Function
Monitoring
Frequency setting Operation command
Remarks
0
Y
N
N
1
Y
Y
N
Y: Possible
2
Y
N
Y
N: Not possible
3
Y
Y
Y
- Assign the terminal command (LE) to one of terminals [X1] to [X3] using function codes
E01 to E03 to enable/disable the function specified by code H30 by terminal command, and
short-circuit between the terminal assigned for (LE) command and [CM]. To disable the
function, open the circuit ((LE) = OFF). When (LE) is set to OFF, the inverter enters the
operation mode where the commands and frequencies given by the terminals or keypad are
effective.
Capacity of DC Link Bus Capacitor
H43
Accumulated Run Time of Cooling Fan
This function code is used to clear the information related to the cooling fan if it is replaced.
Follow the instruction for the replacement.
9-59
FUNCTION CODES
This function code is used to clear the information related to the DC link bus capacitor if it is
replaced. Follow the instructions for replacement.
Chap. 9
H42
H50
Non-linear V/f Pattern (Frequency)
Refer to F04.
H51
Non-linear V/f Pattern (Voltage)
Refer to F04.
For details of setting the non-linear V/f pattern, refer to the descriptions of function code F04.
H54
ACC/DEC Time (Jogging operation)
Sets both the acceleration and deceleration time for jogging operations.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 3600 (sec.)
& Refer to function codes E01 to E03 “Terminal assignment of [X1] to [X3] for details on
jogging operations.
H64
Low Limiter (Min. freq. when limiter is activated)
When the output current limiter and/or overload-suppressing feature is activated, this
function limits the bottom of the frequency that may vary due to reaction of the limit control.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz)
H69
Automatic Deceleration (Regenerative energy suppressing)
Enables
control.
regenerative
energy
suppressing Data for H69
Function
0
Disable
1
Enable
The moment that a regenerative energy exceeding the capacity of the inverter is returned
when braking is being applied to the motor, the inverter will shut its output down and enter
overvoltage alarm mode. If regenerative energy suppressing control is enabled, the inverter
lengthens the deceleration time to 3 times that of the set time while the DC link bus voltage
exceeds the preset voltage suppressing level, and decreases the deceleration torque to 1/3. In
this way, the inverter makes the motor reduce the regenerative energy tentatively.
This control is used to suppress torque generated by the motor in deceleration. Conversely,
when the load on the motor results in a braking effect, the control does not have any effect, so
do not use it in this case. In addition, note that setting an extremely short deceleration time
may cause an overvoltage alarm failure of the inverter even if the time is multiplied by 3 –
keep this in mind when setting deceleration time.
Disable this function when the inverter features a braking resistor. If it is enabled, the braking
resistor and regenerative energy suppressing control may conflict with each other, which may
change the deceleration time unexpectedly.
9-60
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H70
Overload Prevention Control (Frequency drop rate)
Enables overload suppressing control. If enabled, this function code is used to set the
deceleration (Hz/s).
Before the inverter enters Alarm mode due to heat sink overheat or overload (alarm code:
0H1 or 0LU), this control decreases the output frequency of the inverter to suppress the trip.
Data for H70
0.00
Function
Decelerate by deceleration time 1 (F08) or 2 (E11).
0.01 to 100.0 Decelerate by 0.01 to 100.0 Hz/sec.
999
Disable overload suppression control
- When overload suppressing control is enabled, the inverter decelerates the motor according
to the set deceleration rate if the temperature anywhere inside the inverter exceeds the
alarm detection level.
- Apply this control to equipment (such as pumps) whose drive frequency drops in line with
any decrease in load. If you want to proceed to drive such kind of equipment even the
inverter slows down the output frequency, enable this control.
• Do not use this function to equipment whose load does not slow if the inverter
output frequency drops, as it will have no effect.
• To avoid any conflict between overload suppressing control and any other
frequency lowering features, this control does not function if the features to limit
the output current are enabled (F43 ¹ 0 and H12 = 1). To force this control to
enabled status, set 0 for function codes F43 and H12.
Chap. 9
H80
Gain for Suppression of Output Current Fluctuation
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 0.20
H95
DC Braking (Braking mode)
Refer to F21.
For details of setting the braking mode, refer to the descriptions of function code F21.
9-61
FUNCTION CODES
The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics
and/or backlash in the load mechanism. Modify the data in function code H80 to adjust the
amount in order to suppress such fluctuation. However, as incorrect setting of this amount
may cause a much larger current fluctuation, do not modify the default setting unless it is
necessary.
H96
STOP Key Priority/Start Check Function
The inverter can be operated using a functional combination of "STOP key priority" and
"Start check function."
Data for H96
STOP key priority
Start check function
0
Disable
Disable
1
Enable
Disable
2
Disable
Enable
3
Enable
Enable
STOP key priority
When the drive commands are received from the terminals and via RS485 communication,
pressing the key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor. "E 6" is displayed on
the LED after stopping.
Start check function
For safety, this function checks whether any run command has been switched on or not. If a
run command has been switched on, "E 6" is displayed on the LED without the inverter
being started up. This occurs in the following situations:
(1) When any run command is switched on when the power to the inverter switched on.
key is pressed to release the alarm status caused by the protective function,
(2) When the
or the reset alarm command (RST) is switched on while any run command is input.
(3) When the run command source has been switched by the link command (LE), which
selects whether to enable or disable communications, when a run command is being
input at the source that being switched to.
H97
Clear Alarm Data
Clears all alarm information (e.g. historical records and information at time the alarm
occurred) to return the inverter to default status (factory settings).
Data for H97
Function
0
Disable
1
Clear (data automatically reset to 0)
9-62
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H98
Protection/Maintenance Functions (Selection)
Refer to F26.
Specifies a combination between the output phase loss protection, input phase loss protection
and lowering of automatic carrier frequency.
Data for H98 Output phase loss
Input phase loss
Automatic lowering of carrier frequency
0
Disable
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
2
Disable
Enable
Disable
3
Disable
Enable
Enable
4
Enable
Disable
Disable
5
Enable
Disable
Enable
6
Enable
Enable
Disable
7
Enable
Enable
Enable
Output phase loss protection (0PL)
The inverter will enter Alarm mode activated by the output phase loss protection, and issue
the alarm 0PL if it detects an output phase loss while it is running.
If a magnetic contactor that has been inserted in the inverter output circuits switches off when
the inverter is running, this protection will not be activated.
Input phase loss protection (L
)
) if a phase loss is detected in the
Do not enable this protection with inverters with single-phase input, as it is not effective.
Automatic lowering of carrier frequency
When using an inverter in a critical system or any other systems where inverter operation
should not be interrupted, select this feature to protect the system from failures which could
result from the inverter tripping due to the heat sink overheating (0H1) or overload (0LU),
abnormally high ambient temperature or a cooling mechanism failure. This feature lowers the
output frequency before the inverter enters Alarm mode, however, the level of motor noise
may increase.
9-63
FUNCTION CODES
When operating an inverter with a three-phase input with a single phase for testing purposes,
this protection may be disabled, but only if the load can be reduced.
Chap. 9
The inverter will enter Alarm mode and issue an alarm (L
three-phase input power source.
9.2.6
J codes (Application functions)
J01
PID Control (Selection)
J02
PID Control (Remote process command)
J03
PID Control (Gain)
J04
PID Control (Integration time)
J05
PID Control (Differential time)
J06
PID Control (Feedback filter)
The PID control is a closed loop feed back system that regulates control amounts with
command values, as shown in the schematic block diagram below. Essentially, the system
employs a sensor or similar device and compares it with the commanded amount (e.g. a
temperature control command). If there is any difference between them, the system reacts so
as to minimize it.
Apply the PID control system to process control mechanisms for flow-rate, pressure,
temperature and the like.
If PID control is enabled (J01 = 1 or 2), the frequency block diagram changes to the PID
control block diagram.
Refer to Chapter 4, section 4.8 "PID Frequency Command Generator" for details.
¨ PID Control Selection (J01)
Selects PID control status.
Data for J01
PID control
0
Disable
1
Enable process control
(normal operation)
2
Enable process control
(inverse operation)
- This function allows inserting the difference (error) between PID command and amount
that have been fed-back so as to drive the motor for normal or inverse operation. Apply this
control to a system increasing/decreasing the motor speed according to any such difference,
such that occurring when an air conditioner is switched between cooling and heating. The
operation mode can also be switched between normal and inverse using the terminal
command (IVS).
& Refer to function codes E01 to E03 for details of assignment of the terminal command
(IVS).
9-64
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Remote process command (J02)
Selects the means by which the PID control command can be set.
Data for J02
Means
0
Keypad
1
Built-in potentiometer, terminal [12] or [C1] for PID process command 1
4
Via RS485 communication
If an analog command (built-in potentiometer, terminal [12] or [C1]) is selected as the PID
process command, it is also necessary to select PID process command 1 for the analog input
side using function codes E60, E61 and E62.
& Refer to function codes E60 to E62 for details.
The multistep frequency C08 set by the terminal command (SS4) can also be used
as a preset amount for the PID process command, in addition to that of function
code J02.
Calculate the setting data of the process command using the equation below.
Process command data (%) = set multistep frequency ¸ maximum output frequency
´ 100
Selecting feedback
Select either analog input terminal [12] or [C1] for the PID control feedback signal terminal.
& Refer to function codes E60 to E62 for details.
Conversion factor for indication and monitoring of PID value
To monitor the PID process command and its feedback, set the conversion factor used for
transformation between the PID control amount (such as temperature) and numerals
expressing the value.
Chap. 9
& Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details on the conversion factor, and to E43 for
FUNCTION CODES
details on monitoring.
Gain and bias settings for the PID command
As with the drive frequency command, gain and bias can be set for the PID command.
& Refer to function codes C51 and C52 for details.
9-65
n Gain (J03)
Sets the gain for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.000 to 10.00 ´ (times)
P (Proportional) control
An operation using an output frequency
proportional to deviation is called P
operation, which outputs an operational
amount proportional to deviation,
through it cannot eliminate deviation
alone.
Gain determines the system response level for the deviation in the P control. An increase in
gain speeds up response, an excessive gain can cause vibration, and a decrease in gain delays
response.
n Integration time (J04)
Sets the integration time for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 3600.0 (sec.)
I (Integral) control
The PID operation having the
proportional relationship of deviation
between the commanded (frequency)
rate (Hz/s) and control amounts is called
the I control. The I control outputs the
control amount proportional to the
integral amount of the deviation.
Therefore, it is effective for making the
feedback value consistent with the
commanded one (such as frequency).
For the system whose deviation of
response rapidly changes, however, this
control cannot make the system react
quickly.
The effectiveness of I control is expressed by a parameter of integration time. The longer the
integration time, the slower the response. The reaction force of the system to an external
stimulus force becomes weak. The shorter integration time the faster response. Setting too
short integration time, however, makes the system tend to oscillate.
9-66
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Differentiation time (J05)
Sets the differentiation time for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 600.00 (sec.)
D (Derivative) control
The PID operation having the
proportional relationship of deviation
between derivative of the commanded
(frequency) and control amounts is
called the D control. The D control
outputs derivative of the control amount.
For rapidly change, this control makes
the system react quickly.
The effectiveness of ID control is expressed by a parameter of differentiation time. Setting a
long differentiation time will quickly converge on a system control error (deviation) caused
by P control. Setting it too long makes the system tend to oscillate more. Setting it too short
will suppress the convergent effect to the deviation caused by the system operation.
Descriptions combined use of P, I and D control are shown below.
(1) PI control
(2) PD control
When PD control is applied to a system, the moment that a deviation occurs, the system
instantaneously generates a control amount much greater than that of D control (frequency) to
suppress the deviation. If the deviation converges, the P control amount may decrease.
A load including the integral component in the equipment to be controlled may oscillate from
the action of the integral component if the P control alone is applied. In this case, use PD
control to reduce the oscillation caused by P control for keeping the system stable. That is, PD
control should be applied to any system that does not contain any braking actions in its
process.
9-67
FUNCTION CODES
Use P control alone for loads with integral component ratio that takes very large part of
control amount.
Chap. 9
PI control, which is a combination of P and I control, is generally used to minimize the
deviation caused by P control. PI control acts to minimize at all times the deviation caused by
a variance of the commanded amount or external disturbance to the system as stationary
events. However, the longer integration time set, the slower the system response.
(3) PID control
PID control is implemented by combining P control with the deviation suppression of I
control and the oscillation suppression of D control. PID control features minimal control
deviation, high precision and high stability.
In particular, applying PID control to any system that has a long response time to the
occurrence of deviation will yield excellent results.
Follow the procedure below to set PID data.
It is highly recommended that the PID control amount is selected and set while monitoring
the system response waveform with an oscilloscope or equivalent. Repeat following
procedure to identify the optimal solution for each system.
- Increase the data to be set to function code J03 (PID gain) in the range where the feedback
signal does not oscillate.
- Decrease the data to be set to function code J04 (PID integration time) in the range where
the feedback signal does not oscillate.
- Increase the data to be set to function code J05 (PID differentiation time) in the range where
the feedback signal does not oscillate.
9-68
9.2 Details of Function Codes
Refining the system response waveforms is shown below.
1) Suppressing overshoot
Increase the data value of function code
J04 (integration time) and decrease that
for code J05 (differentiation time)
2) Quick stabilizing (small overshoot allowable)
Decrease the data value of function code
J03 (gain) and increase that for code J05
(differentiation time)
3) Suppressing oscillation longer than the integration time set by function code J04
Increase the data value set to function
code J04 (integration time)
4) Suppressing oscillation of approximately same period as the time set for function code
J05 (differentiation time)
n Feedback filter (J06)
Sets the time constant of the filter for PID feedback signals.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 900.0 (sec.)
- This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop. Setting too long a time constant makes
the system response slow.
9-69
FUNCTION CODES
Decrease the data value set for function
code J03 (gain), even if the
differentiation time is set at 0 sec.
Chap. 9
Decrease the data value set for function
code J05 (differentiation time).
9.2.7
y codes (Link functions)
Mounting an RS485 communications card (option) on the FRENIC-Mini series enables
performing the operations listed below via the RS485 communications facility.
(1) Using the remote keypad (option)
The remote keypad (option) allows running inverter and monitoring the running status
information to be monitored from remote locations, such as from the outside of the power
control panel.
(2) FRENIC Loader
Monitoring the running status information, editing function codes and test-running the
inverters can be performed on a Windows-based PC connected to the power system network
(including the inverter/s) by installing FRENIC Loader (software).
& Setting data to the y codes, refers to function codes y01 to y10.
(3) Host controller
The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting a host controller such as a PLC to
the power system network. Available communications protocols are the Modbus RTU* and
Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol.
* Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon, Inc.
& Refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for details.
y01 to y10
Link Functions for RS485 Communication
n Station Address (y01)
Sets the station address for the communications network. The table below lists the relation
between the data setting range and the protocol.
Protocol
Station address
Broadcast address
Modbus RTU
1 to 247
0
FRENIC Loader
1 to 255
None
Fuji general-purpose inverter
1 to 31
99
- If the address is set outside of the range specified in the table above, no response will be
returned as the inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries.
- Settings for FRENIC Loader: Set the same address as that specified in the connected PC.
9-70
9.2 Details of Function Codes
n Communications error processing (y02)
Specifies the error processing operation for RS485 communication.
Data for y02
The inverter will:
0
Immediately enter Alarm mode, issue RS485 communications error E 8 and
shut down its output.
1
Continue to run for the period preset by the timer, then enter Alarm mode, issue
RS485 communications error E 8, and shut down its output.
2
Retry to receive/send the query/response during the period preset by the timer.
If communications have not recovered, the inverter will enter Alarm mode, issue
RS485 communications error E 8 and shut down its output. If communications
have recovered, the inverter will continue to run.
3
Continue to run even if a communications error occurs.
•
Setting for FRENIC Loader: If the connected PC runs out during test-running of the
inverter, no stop command may be able to be sent to stop the inverter. For safety, select the
setting for this function code so as to prevent this happening.
n Error processing timer (y03)
Sets the error processing timer (for waiting time)
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (sec.)
n Transmission speed (y04)
Transmission speed
0
2400 bps
1
4800 bps
2
9600 bps
3
19200 bps
n Transmission data length (y05)
Select the character data for transmission.
-
Setting for FRENIC Loader:
The loader will set the length in 8 bits
automatically. (The same applies to the
Modbus RTU.)
Data for y05
Data length
0
8 bits
1
7 bits
n Parity check (y06)
Data for y06
Select the property of the parity bit.
- Setting for FRENIC Loader:
The loader automatically sets it to the even
parity.
9-71
Parity
0
No parity bit
1
Even parity
2
Odd parity
FUNCTION CODES
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: Set the same
transmission speed as that specified for the
connected PC.
Data for y04
Chap. 9
Selects the transmission speed for RS485
communication.
n Stop bits (y07)
Data for y07
Select the number of stop bits.
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: The loader
automatically sets it to 1 bit.
The Modbus RTU protocol automatically
determines number of the parity bits
associated with its parity bit property so
no setting is required.
Stop bits
0
2 bits
1
1 bit
n No-response error detection time (y08)
Sets the time interval from the inverter
detecting no access until it enters
communications error E 8 alarm mode due to
network failure.
Data for y08
0
1 to 60
Function
Disable
1 to 60 sec.
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: As communication between loader software and inverters is
classified into two categories--periodic access and event-driven access, depending on the
selected facility, disable communications error detection (y08 = 0). When test running, the
access period is to be 800 ms, however, it may vary depending on the operating system
running on the PC and/or its processing status.
n Response latency time (y09)
Sets the latency time from the end of receiving a query sent from the host (such as the PC or
PLC) to the start of sending the response. This function allows using equipment whose
response time is slow for a network requiring quick response.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 (sec.)
T1 = Latency time + a
where a is the processing time of the inverter (may vary depending upon the processing status and the
run command in the inverter).
& Refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448).
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: Set the correct data to the function code depending on the
performance and/or configuration of the PC and protocol converter (such as
RS485/RS232C). Note that some protocol converters monitor the communications status
and switch the send/receive of transmission data by timer.
n Protocol selection (y10)
Selects the communications protocol.
Data for y10
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: Select the
loader protocol (y10 = 1).
9-72
Protocol
0
Modbus RTU
1
FRENIC Loader
2
Fuji general-purpose inverter
9.2 Details of Function Codes
y99
Link Function for Supporting Data Input
This function code switches an RS485 communications link with FRENIC Loader. Enabling
the RS485 communications link allows the inverter to receive frequency and run commands
from the Loader.
Since the Loader automatically sets data of function codes, no setting with the keypad is
required.
If the PC runs out of control in RS485 communication, a stop command may not be sent to the
inverter. To prevent this from happening, set 0 to y99 so that the inverter will follow the
settings of function code H30.
Note that the inverter cannot save the data setting in y99. Turning the power off resets the
data in y99 to 0.
Data for y99
Function
Frequency command source
Run command source
0
Setting of H30
Setting of H30
1
Loader (S01 and S05)
Setting of H30
2
Setting of H30
Loader (S06)
3
Loader (S01 and S05)
Loader (S06)
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-73
Appendices
Contents
App.A
A.1
A.2
A.3
App.B
B.1
B.2
App.C
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
App.D
App.E
App.F
App.G
G.1
G.2
G.3
Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ............................................................... A-1
Effect of inverters on other devices .................................................................................................... A-1
Noise .................................................................................................................................................. A-2
Noise prevention................................................................................................................................. A-4
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or
Special High Voltage ........................................................................................................................ A-12
Application to general-purpose inverters.......................................................................................... A-12
Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or
special high voltage .......................................................................................................................... A-13
Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters....................... A-17
Generating mechanism of surge voltages ......................................................................................... A-17
Effect of surge voltages .................................................................................................................... A-18
Countermeasures against surge voltages .......................................................................................... A-18
Regarding existing equipment.......................................................................................................... A-19
Inverter Generating Loss.................................................................................................................. A-20
Conversion from SI Units ................................................................................................................ A-21
Allowable Current of Insulated Wires.............................................................................................. A-23
Replacement Information................................................................................................................. A-25
External dimensions comparison tables ........................................................................................... A-25
Terminal arrangements and symbols ................................................................................................ A-29
Function codes.................................................................................................................................. A-31
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
App.A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical
noise)
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical
Manufacturers' Association (JEMA) (April 1994). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is
only for reference for the foreign market. -
A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices
Inverters have been and are rapidly expanding its application fields. This paper describes the effect
that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as
inverters, as well as introducing noise prevention measures. (Refer to Section A.3 [3], "Noise
prevention examples" for details.)
[1]
Effect on AM radios
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, AM radios may pick up noise radiated from the inverter.
(An inverter has almost no effect on FM radios or television sets.)
Probable cause
Measures
Radios may receive noise radiated from the inverter.
Inserting a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter is effective.
[2]
Effect on telephones
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the
inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear.
Probable cause
A high-frequency leakage current radiated from the inverter and motors enters
shielded telephone cables, causing noise.
It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and
return the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter.
Measures
Effect on proximity limit switches
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, proximity limit switches (capacitance-type) may
malfunction.
Probable cause
The capacitance-type proximity limit switches may provide inferior noise
immunity.
It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or change the
power supply treatment of the proximity limit switches. The proximity limit
switches can be replaced with superior noise immunity types such as magnetic
types.
Measures
[4]
Effect on pressure sensors
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, pressure sensors may malfunction.
Probable cause
Measures
Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line.
It is effective to install a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter or to
change the wiring.
[5]
Effect on position detectors (pulse generators PGs or pulse encoders)
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, pulse encoders may produce erroneous pulses that shift
the stop position of a machine.
Probable cause
Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power
lines are bundled together.
The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by
separating the PG signal lines and power lines. Providing noise filters at the input
and output terminals is also an effective measure.
Measure
A-1
App.
[3]
A.2 Noise
This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to
noise.
[1]
Inverter noise
Figure A.1 shows an outline of the inverter configuration. The inverter converts AC to DC
(rectification) in a converter unit, and converts DC to AC (inversion) with 3-phase variable voltage
and variable frequency. The conversion (inversion) is performed by PWM implemented by switching
six transistors (IGBT: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, etc), and is used for variable speed motor
control.
Switching noise is generated by high-speed on/off switching of the six transistors. Noise current (i) is
emitted and at each high-speed on/off switching, the noise current flows through stray capacitance (C)
of the inverter, cable and motor to the ground. The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows:
i = C·dv/dt
It is related to the stray capacitance (C) and dv/dt (switching speed of the transistors). Further, this
noise current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors
are switched on or off.
In addition to the main power inverter, the DC-to-DC switching power regulator (DC-DC converter),
which is the power source for the control electronics of the inverter, may be a noise source in the same
principles as stated above.
The frequency band of this noise is less than approximately 30 to 40 MHz. Therefore, the noise will
affect devices such as AM radios using low frequency band, but will not virtually affect FM radios and
television sets using higher frequency than this frequency band.
Figure A.1 Outline of Inverter Configuration
A-2
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
[2]
Types of noise
Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and
the motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power supply transformer to the motor.
The various propagation routes are shown in Figure A.2. According to those routes, noises are roughly
classified into three types--conduction noise, induction noise, and radiation noise.
Figure A.2 Noise Propagation Routes
(1) Conduction noise
Noise generated in an inverter may propagate through the conductor and power supply so as to affect
peripheral devices of the inverter (Figure A.3). This noise is called "conduction noise." Some
conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit . If the ground wires are connected to a
common ground, conduction noise will propagate through route . As shown in route , some
conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires.
App.
Figure A.3 Conduction Noise
(2) Induction noise
When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and output
sides of the inverter through which noise current is flowing, noise will be induced into those wires and
signal lines of the devices by electromagnetic induction (Figure A.4) or electrostatic induction (Figure
A.5). This is called "induction noise" .
Figure A.4 Electromagnetic Noise
A-3
Figure A.5 Electrostatic Noise
(3) Radiation noise
Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from wires (that act as antennas) at the
as shown below. Not
input and output sides of the inverter. This noise is called "radiation noise"
only wires but motor frames or control system panels containing inverters may also act as antennas.
Figure A.6 Radiation Noise
A.3 Noise prevention
The more noise prevention is strengthened, the more effective. However, with the use of appropriate
measures, noise problems may be resolved easily. It is necessary to implement economical noise
prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions.
[1]
Noise prevention prior to installation
Before inserting an inverter in your control panel or installing an inverter panel, you need to consider
noise prevention. Once noise problems occur, it will cost additional materials and time for solving
them.
Noise prevention prior to installation includes:
1) Separating the wiring of main circuits and control circuits
2) Putting main circuit wiring into a metal pipe (conduit pipe)
3) Using shielded wires or twist shielded wires for control circuits.
4) Implementing appropriate grounding work and grounding wiring.
These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems.
A-4
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
[2]
Implementation of noise prevention measures
There are two types of noise prevention measures--one for noise propagation routes and the other for
noise receiving sides (that are affected by noise).
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include:
Separating the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring, avoiding noise effect.
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the generating side include:
1) Inserting a noise filter that reduces the noise level.
2) Applying a metal conduit pipe or metal control panel that will confine noise, and
3) Applying an insulated transformer for the power supply that cuts off the noise propagation route.
Table A.1 lists the noise prevention measures, their goals, and propagation routes.
Table A.1 Noise Prevention Measures
Goal of noise prevention
measures
Noise prevention method
Wiring and
installation
Anti-noise
device
Measures at
noise
receiving
sides
Others
Make it
more
Cutoff
Reduce Conduc- Inducdifficult noise
Confine
noise
tion
tion
to
conduc- noise
level
noise
noise
receive tion
noise
Y
Radiation
noise
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y: Effective, Y*: Effective conditionally, Blank: Not effective
Y
Y
Y
A-5
Y
Y
App.
Control
panel
Separate main circuit
from control circuit
Minimize wiring
distance
Avoid parallel and
bundled wiring
Use appropriate
grounding
Use shielded wire and
twisted shielded wire
Use shielded cable in
main circuit
Use metal conduit pipe
Appropriate arrangement
of devices in panel
Metal control panel
Line filter
Insulation transformer
Use a passive capacitor
for control circuit
Use ferrite core for
control circuit
Line filter
Separate power supply
systems
Lower the carrier
frequency
Conduction route
What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration.
(1) Wiring and grounding
As shown in Figure A.7, separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as possible
regardless of being located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter. Use
shielded wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extraneous noises, and minimize the
wiring distance. Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel wiring.
Figure A.7 Separate Wiring
For the main circuit wiring, use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the ground to prevent
noise propagation (refer to Figure A.8).
The shield (braided wire) of a shielded wire should be securely connected to the base (common) side
of the signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi-point connection
(refer to Figure A.9).
The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current, but
also to block noise penetration and radiation. Corresponding to the main circuit voltage, the grounding
work should be No. 3 grounding work (300 VAC or less) and special No. 3 grounding work (300 to
600 VAC). Each ground wire is to be provided with its own ground or separately wired to a grounding
point.
Figure A.8 Grounding of Metal Conduit Pipe
Figure A.9 Treatment of Braided Wire of
Shielded Wire
(2) Control panel
The system control panel containing an inverter is generally made of metal, which can shield noise
radiated from the inverter itself.
When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same control
panel, be careful with the layout of each device. If necessary, arrange shield plates between the
inverter and peripheral devices.
A-6
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
(3) Anti-noise devices
To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main
circuit wiring to the air, a line filter and power supply transformer should be used (refer to Figure
A.10).
Line filters are available in these types--the simplified type such as a capacitive filter to be connected
in parallel to the power supply line and an inductive filter to be connected in series to the power supply
line and the orthodox type such as an LC filter to meet radio noise regulations. Use them according to
the targeted effect for reducing noise.
Power supply transformers include common insulated transformers, shielded transformers, and
noise-cutting transformers. These transformers have different effectiveness in blocking noise
propagation.
(a) Capacitive filter
(b) Inductive filter
(c) LC filter
(zero-phase reactor or ferrite ring)
Figure A.10 Various Filters and their Connection
1) Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output terminals
of the signal circuit in parallel.
2) Increase the circuit impedance for noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or
passing signal lines through ferrite core beads. It is also effective to widen the signal base lines (0 V
line) or grounding lines.
(5) Other
The level of generating/propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter. The
higher the carrier frequency, the higher the noise level.
In an inverter whose carrier frequency can be changed, lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the
generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the motor under
driving conditions.
A-7
App.
(4) Noise prevention measures at the receiving side
It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same
control panel as the inverter or located near an inverter. Line filters and shielded or twisted shielded
wires are used to block the penetration of noise in the signal lines of these devices. The following
treatments are also implemented.
[3]
Noise prevention examples
Table A.2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter.
Table A.2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures
No.
1
Target
device
AM
radio
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
When operating an inverter,
noise enters into an AM radio
broadcast (500 to 1500 kHz).
1) Install an LC filter at the
power supply side of the
inverter. (In some cases, a
capacitive filter may be
used as a simple method.)
2) Install a metal conduit
wiring between the
motor and inverter. Or
use shielded wiring.
<Possible cause>
The AM radio may receive
noise radiated from wires at
the power supply and output
sides of the inverter.
Note: Minimize the distance between
the LC filter and inverter as much as
possible (within 1m).
2
AM
radio
When operating an inverter,
noise enters into an AM radio
broadcast (500 to 1500 kHz).
<Possible cause>
The AM radio may receive
noise radiated from the power
line at the power supply side
of the inverter.
A-8
1) Install inductive filters at
the input and output sides
of the inverter.
The number of turns of
the zero-phase reactor (or
ferrite ring) should be as
large as possible. In
addition, wiring between
the inverter and the zerophase reactor (or ferrite
ring) should be as short
as possible. (within 1m)
2) When further
improvement is
necessary, install LC
filters.
Notes
1) The radiation
noise of the
wiring can be
reduced.
2) The conduction
noise to the
power supply
side can be
reduced.
Note: Sufficient
improvement may
not be expected in
narrow regions such
as between
mountains.
1) The radiation
noise of the
wiring can be
reduced.
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
Table A.2 Continued
No.
3
Target
device
Telephone
(in a
common
private
residence
at a
distance
of 40 m)
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
When driving a ventilation
fan with an inverter, noise
enters a telephone in a private
residence at a distance of
40m.
1) Connect the ground
terminals of the motors in
a common connection.
Return to the inverter
panel, and insert a 1 mF
capacitor between the
input terminal of the
inverter and ground.
Notes
1) The effect of the
inductive filter
and LC filter
may not be
expected
because of sound
frequency
component.
2) In the case of a
V-connection
power supply
transformer in a
200V system, it
is necessary to
connect
capacitors as
shown in the
following figure,
because of
different
potentials to
ground.
<Possible cause>
A high-frequency leakage
current from the inverter and
motor flowed to grounded
part of the telephone cable
shield. During the current's
return trip, it flowed through
a grounded pole transformer,
and noise entered the
telephone by electrostatic
induction.
App.
4
Photoelectric
relay
1) As a temporary measure,
Insert a 0.1 mF capacitor
between the 0 V terminal
of the power supply circuit
in the detection unit of the
overhead photoelectric
relay and a frame of the
overhead panel.
A photoelectric relay
malfunctioned when the
inverter runs the motor.
[The inverter and motor are
installed in the same place
(for overhead traveling)]
<Possible cause>
It is considered that induction
noise entered the
photoelectric relay since the
inverter's input power supply
line and the photoelectric
relay's wiring are in parallel
separated by approximately
25 mm over a distance of 30
to 40 m. Due to conditions of
the installation, these lines
cannot be separated.
A-9
2) As a permanent measure,
move the 24 V power
supply from the ground to
the overhead unit so that
signals are sent to the
ground side with relay
contacts in the ceiling
part.
1) The wiring is
separated by
more than 30 cm.
2) When separation
is impossible,
signals can be
received and sent
with dry contacts
etc.
3) Do not wire
weak-current
signal lines and
power lines in
parallel.
Table A.2 Continued
No.
5
Target
device
Photoelectric
relay
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
A photoelectric relay
malfunctioned when the
inverter was operated.
Notes
1) Insert a 0.1 mF capacitor
between the output
common terminal of the
amplifier of the
photoelectric relay and
the frame.
1) If a weak-current
circuit at the
malfunctioning
side is observed,
the measures may
be simple and
economical.
1) Install an LC filter at the
output side of the
inverter.
2) Install a capacitive filter
at the input side of the
inverter.
3) Ground the 0 V
(common) line of the DC
power supply of the
proximity limit switch
through a capacitor to the
box body of the machine.
1) Noise generated
in the inverter
can be reduced.
2) The switch is
superseded by a
proximity limit
switch of
superior noise
immunity (such
as a magnetic
type).
<Possible cause>
Although the inverter and
photoelectric relay are
separated by a sufficient
distance but the power
supplies share a common
connection, it is considered
that conduction noise entered
through the power supply line
into the photoelectric relay.
6
Proximity
limit
switch
(electrostatic
type)
A proximity limit switch
malfunctioned.
<Possible cause>
It is considered that the
capacitance type proximity
limit switch is susceptible to
conduction and radiation
noise because of its low noise
immunity.
A-10
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
Table A.2 Continued
No.
7
Target
device
Pressure
sensor
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
A pressure sensor
malfunctioned.
<Possible cause>
The pressure sensor may
malfunction due to noise that
came from the box housing
through the shielded wire.
8
Position
detector
(pulse
generator
: PG)
Erroneous-pulse outputs
from a pulse converter caused
a shift in the stop position of a
crane.
1) The shielded
parts of shield
wires for sensor
signals are
connected to a
common point in
the system.
2) Conduction
noise from the
inverter can be
reduced.
1) Install an LC filter and a
capacitive filter at the
input side of the inverter.
2) Install an LC filter at the
output side of the
inverter.
1) This is an
example of a
measure where
the power line
and signal line
cannot be
separated.
2) Induction noise
and radiation
noise at the
output side of the
inverter can be
reduced.
Program The PLC program sometimes
mable
malfunctions.
logic
controller
(PLC)
1) Install a capacitive filter
and an LC filter on the
input side of the inverter.
2) Install an LC filter on the
output side of the
inverter.
3) Lower the carrier
frequency of the inverter.
1) Total conduction
noise and
induction noise
in the electric
line can be
reduced.
<Possible cause>
Since the power supply
system is the same for the
PLC and inverter, it is
considered that noise enters
the PLC through the power
supply.
A-11
App.
1) Install an LC filter on
the input side of the
inverter.
2) Connect the shield of the
shielded wire of the
pressure sensor to the 0
V line (common) of the
pressure sensor,
changing the original
connection.
<Possible cause>
Erroneous pulses may be
outputted by induction noise
since the power line of the
motor and the signal line of
the PG are bundled together.
9
Notes
App.B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by
Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High
Voltage
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a translated summary of the Guideline of the Ministry of
International Trade and Industry (September 1994). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is
only for reference for the foreign market. Agency of Natural Resource and Energy of Japan published the following two guidelines for
suppressing harmonic noise in September 1994.
(1) Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose appliances
(2) Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage
Assuming that electronic devices generating high harmonics will be increasing, these guidelines are to
establish regulations for preventing high frequency noise interference on devices sharing the power
source. These guidelines should be applied to all devices that are used on the commercial power lines
and generate harmonic current. This section gives a description limited to general-purpose inverters.
B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters
[1]
Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose appliances
Our three-phase, 200V series inverters of 3.7 kW or less (FRENIC-Mini series) were the products of
which were restricted by the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and Generalpurpose Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999) issued by the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry.
The above restriction, however, was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004. Since then,
the inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their
products.
We, as before, recommend that you connect a reactor (for suppressing harmonics) to your inverter.
[2]
Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special
high voltage
Unlike other guidelines, this guideline is not applied to the equipment itself such as a general-purpose
inverter, but is applied to each large-scale electric power consumer for total amount of harmonics. The
consumer should calculate the harmonics generated from each piece of equipment currently used on
the power source transformed and fed from the high or special high voltage source.
(1) Scope of regulation
In principle, the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions:
-
The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage.
The "equivalent capacity" of the converter load exceeds the standard value for the receiving
voltage (50 kVA at a receiving voltage of 6.6 kV).
Appendix B.2 [1] "Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)" gives you some supplemental information
with regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of an inverter according to the guideline.
A-12
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage
(2) Regulation
The level (calculated value) of the harmonic current that flows from the customer's receiving point out
to the system is subjected to the regulation. The regulation value is proportional to the contract
demand. The regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table B.1.
Appendix B.2 gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent
capacity of the inverter for compliance to "Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers
receiving high voltage or special high voltage."
Table B.1 Upper Limits of Harmonic Outflow Current per kW of Contract Demand (mA/kW)
Receiving
voltage
5th
7th
11th
13th
17th
19th
23rd
Over
25th
6.6 kV
3.5
2.5
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.90
0.76
0.70
22 kV
1.8
1.3
0.82
0.69
0.53
0.47
0.39
0.36
(3) When the regulation applied
The guideline has been applied. As the application, the estimation for "Voltage waveform distortion
rate" required as the indispensable conditions when entering into the consumer's contract of electric
power is already expired.
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving
high voltage or special high voltage
When calculating the required matters related to inverters according to the guideline, follow the terms
listed below. The following descriptions are based on "Technical document for suppressing
harmonics" (JEGE 9702-1995) published by the Japan Electrical Manufacturer's Association (JEMA).
[1]
Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)
(1) "Inverter rated capacity" corresponding to "Pi"
- In the guideline, the conversion factor of a 6-pulse converter is used as reference conversion factor
1. It is, therefore, necessary to express the rated input capacity of inverters in a value including
harmonic component current equivalent to conversion factor 1.
-
Calculate the input fundamental current I1 from the kW rating and efficiency of the load motor, as
well as the efficiency of the inverter. Then, calculate the input rated capacity as shown below:
Input rated capacity = 3 ´ (power supply voltage) ´ I1 ´ 1.0228/1000 (kVA )
where 1.0228 is the 6-pulse converter's value of (effective current)/(fundamental current).
-
When a general-purpose motor or inverter motor is used, the appropriate value shown in Table B.2
can be used. Select a value based on the kW rating of the motor used, irrespective of the inverter
type.
The input rated capacity shown above is for the dedicated use in the equation to calculate
capacity of the inverters, following the guideline. Note that the capacity can not be applied to
the reference for selection of the equipment or wires to be used in the inverter input circuits.
& For selection of capacity for the peripheral equipment, refer to the catalogs or technical
documents issued from their manufacturers.
A-13
App.
The equivalent capacity (Pi) may be calculated using the equation of (input rated capacity) x
(conversion factor). However, catalogs of conventional inverters do not contain input rated capacities,
so a description of the input rated capacity is shown below:
Table B.2 "Input Rated Capacities" of General-purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
200V
0.57
0.97
1.95
2.81
4.61
6.77
400V
0.57
0.97
1.95
2.81
4.61
6.77
Applicable
motor rating
(kW)
Pi
(kVA)
(2) Values of "Ki (conversion factor)"
Depending on whether an optional ACR (AC reactor) or DCR (DC reactor) is used, apply the
appropriate conversion factor specified in the appendix to the guideline. The values of the
conversion factor are listed in Table B.3.
Table B.3 "Conversion Factors Ki" for General-purpose Inverters Determined by Reactors
Circuit
category
3
Circuit type
Conversion
factor Ki
Main applications
w/o reactor
K31=3.4
· General-purpose
w/- reactor (ACR)
K32=1.8
· Elevators
w/- reactor (DCR)
K33=1.8
· Refrigerators, air
w/- reactors (ACR and DCR)
K34=1.4
3-phase bridge
(capacitor
smoothing)
inverters
conditioning
systems
· Other general
appliances
Some models are equipped with a reactor as a built-in standard accessory.
(3) Exception to this guideline
Inverters whose inputs are 100V or 200V lines and capacities are 3.7 (4.0) kW or less are an exception
to this guideline.
Those excluded inverters are already regulated by the "Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics
in home electric and general-purpose appliances" so that all of them are not regulated by this guideline
regardless of the quantity of the units used by a single customer.
[2]
Calculation of Harmonic Current
(1) Value of "input fundamental current"
- When you calculate the amount of harmonics according to Table 2 in Appendix of the Guideline, you
have to previously know the input fundamental current.
-
Apply the appropriate value shown in Table B.4 based on the kW rating of the motor, irrespective
of the inverter type or whether a reactor is used.
If the input voltage is different, calculate the input fundamental current in inverse proportion
to the voltage.
Table B.4
"Input Fundamental Currents" of General-purpose Inverters
Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings
Applicable motor rating
(kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
Input
fundamental
current (A)
200V
1.62
2.74
5.50
7.92
13.0
19.1
400V
0.81
1.37
2.75
3.96
6.50
9.55
6.6 kV converted value
(mA)
49
83
167
240
394
579
A-14
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage
(2) Calculation of harmonic current
Usually, calculate the harmonic current according to the Sub-table 3 "Three phase bridge rectifier with
the filtering capacitor" in Table 2 of the Guideline's Appendix. Table B.5 lists the contents of the
Sub-table 3.
Table B.5 Generated Harmonic Current (%), 3-phase Bridge Rectifier (Capacitor Filtering)
Degree
-
5th
7th
11th
13th
17th
19th
23rd
25th
w/o a reactor
65
41
8.5
7.7
4.3
3.1
2.6
1.8
w/- a reactor (ACR)
38
14.5
7.4
3.4
3.2
1.9
1.7
1.3
w/- a reactor (DCR)
30
13
8.4
5.0
4.7
3.2
3.0
2.2
w/- reactors (ACR and DCR)
28
9.1
7.2
4.1
3.2
2.4
1.6
1.4
ACR:
3%
DCR:
Accumulated energy equal to 0.08 to 0.15 ms (100% load conversion)
Smoothing capacitor: Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30 ms (100% load conversion)
Load:
100%
Calculate the harmonic current of each degree using the following equation:
nth harmonic current (A) = Fundamental current (A) ´
Generated nth harmonic current (%)
100
(3) Maximum availability factor
- For a load for elevators, which provides intermittent operation, or a load with a sufficient designed
motor rating, reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the "maximum availability factor"
of the load.
The "maximum availability factor of an appliance" means the ratio of the capacity of the harmonic
generator in operation at which the availability reaches the maximum, to its total capacity, and the
capacity of the generator in operation is an average for 30 minutes.
-
In general, the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition, but the
standard values shown in Table B.6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment.
Table B.6 Availability Factors of Inverters, etc. for Building Equipment (Standard Values)
Equipment
type
Inverter capacity
category
Single inverter
availability
Air
conditioning
system
200 kW or less
0.55
Over 200 kW
0.60
Sanitary pump
―――
0.30
Elevator
―――
0.25
Refrigerator,
freezer
50 kW or less
0.60
UPS (6-pulse)
200 kVA
0.60
Correction coefficient according to contract demand level
Since the total availability factor decreases if the scale of a building increases, calculating reduced
harmonics with the correction coefficient b defined in Table B.7 is permitted.
Table B.7 Correction Coefficient according to the Building Scale
Contract demand
(kW)
Correction
coefficient b
300
500
1000
2000
1.00
0.90
0.85
0.80
A-15
App.
-
Note: If the contract demand is between two specified values listed in Table B.7, calculate the value
by interpolation.
Note: The correction coefficient b is to be determined as a matter of consultation between the
customer and electric power supplier for the customers receiving the electric power over 2000
kW or from the special high voltage lines.
(4) Degree of harmonics to be calculated
The higher the degree of harmonics, the lower the current flows. This is the property of harmonics
generated by inverters so that the inverters are covered by "The case not causing a special hazard" of
the term (3) in the above Appendix for the 9th or higher degrees of the harmonics.
Therefore, "It is sufficient that the 5th and 7th harmonic currents should be calculated."
[3]
Examples of calculation
(1) Equivalent capacity
Input capacity and
Conversion factor
No. of inverters
Example of loads
Equivalent capacity
[Example 1] 400V, 3.7 kW, 10 units
w/- AC reactor and DC reactor
4.61 kVA×10 units
K32 = 1.4
4.61 ´ 10 ´ 1.4
= 64.54 kVA
[Example 2] 400V, 1.5 kW, 15 units
w/- AC reactor
2.93 kVA×15 units
K34 = 1.8
2.93 ´ 15 ´ 1.8
= 79.11 kVA
Refer to Table B.2. Refer to Table B.3.
(2) Harmonic current every degrees
[Example 1] 400V, 3.7 kW 10 units, w/- AC reactor, and maximum availability: 0.55
Fundamental current
onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
394×10= 3940
3940×0.55= 2167
Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
5th
(38%)
7th
11th
(14.5%) (7.4%)
823.5
314.2
Refer to Tables B.4 and
B.6.
13th
(3.4%)
17th
(3.2%)
19th
(1.9%)
23rd
(1.7%)
25th
(1.3%)
Refer to Table B.5.
[Example 2] 400V，3.7 kW，15 units, w/- AC reactor and DC reactor，and maximum availability: 0.55
Fundamental current
onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
394×15= 5910
Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
5th
(28%)
7th
(9.1%)
910.1
295.8
11th
(7.2%)
13th
(4.1%)
17th
(3.2%)
5910×0.55= 3250.5
Refer to Tables B.4 and
B.6.
Refer to Table B.5.
A-16
19th
(2.4%)
23rd
(1.6%)
25th
(1.4%
)
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
App.C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors
Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical
Manufacturers' Association (JEMA) (March, 1995). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is
only for reference for the foreign market. -
Preface
When an inverter drives a motor, surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are
superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals. If the surge voltages
are too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in damage.
For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages
and countermeasures against them.
& Refer to A.2 [1] "Inverter noise" for details of the principle of inverter operation.
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages
As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage, the
magnitude E of the DC voltage becomes about 2 times that of the source voltage (about 620V in
case of an input voltage of 440 VAC). The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this DC
voltage value.
This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage (620V x 2 =
approximately 1,200V) depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring
conditions.
Figure C.1 Voltage Wave Shapes of Individual Portions
A measured example in Figure C.2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal voltage
with a wiring length between the inverter and the motor.
From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring
length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage.
The shorter a pulse rise time becomes, the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of a
short wiring length.
A-17
App.
But, as there exists inductance (L) and stray capacitance (C) in wiring between the inverter and the
motor, the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage originating
in LC resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals. (Refer to Figure
C.1)
Figure C.2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage
C.2 Effect of surge voltages
The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor input terminals
and depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation.
When the motor is driven with a 200 V class inverter, the dielectric strength of the insulation is no
problem since the peak value at the motor terminal voltage increases twice due to the surge voltages
(the DC voltage is only about 300 V).
But in case of a 400 V class inverter the DC voltage is approximately 600 V and depending on the
wiring length, the surge voltages may greatly increase and sometimes result in damage to the
insulation.
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages
The following methods are countermeasures against damage to the motor insulation by the surge
voltages and using a motor driven with a 400 V class inverter.
[1]
Method using motors with enhanced insulation
Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge proof strength to be improved.
[2]
Method to suppress surge voltages
There are two methods for suppressing the surge voltages, one is to reduce the voltage rise time and
another is to reduce the voltage peak value.
(1) Output reactor
If wiring length is relatively short the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise
time (dv/dt) with the installation of an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter. (Refer to Figure
C.3 (1).)
However, if the wiring length becomes long, suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may be
difficult.
(2) Output filter
Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage to
be reduced. (Refer to Figure C.3 (2).)
A-18
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
(1) Output reactor
(2) Output filter
Figure C.3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage
C.4 Regarding existing equipment
[1]
In case of a motor being driven with 400 V class inverter
A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating
from switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0.013% under the surge
voltage condition of over 1,100 V and most of the damage occurs several months after commissioning
the inverter. Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor insulation damage
after a lapse of several months of commissioning.
[2]
In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 400 V class inverter
We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the method of Section C.3.
App.
A-19
App.D Inverter Generating Loss
The table below lists the inverter generating loss.
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Generating loss (W)
High carrier
frequency
(15 kHz)
Inverter type
Low carrier
frequency
(2 kHz)
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-2o
20
23
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-2o
27
32
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-2o
40
50
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-2o
60
77
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-2o
91
110
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-2o
128
165
3.7, 4.0
FRN3.7C1n-2o
203
260
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-4o
28
45
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-4o
41
64
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-4o
63
103
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-4o
89
149
3.7
FRN3.7C1n-4o
4.0
FRN4.0C1n-4o
135
235
0.1
FRN0.1C1n-7o
21
24
0.2
FRN0.2C1n-7o
29
34
0.4
FRN0.4C1n-7o
41
51
0.75
FRN0.75C1n-7o
64
80
1.5
FRN1.5C1n-7o
101
129
2.2
FRN2.2C1n-7o
143
180
Notes 1) A box (n) in the above table replaces S or E depending on enclosure.
2) A box (o) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on shipping destination.
A-20
App.E Conversion from SI Units
App.E Conversion from SI Units
All expressions given in Chapter 7, "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER
CAPACITIES" are based on SI units (International Metric System of Units). This section explains
how to convert expressions to other units.
[1]
Conversion of units
(1) Force
(6) Inertia constant
• 1 (kgf) » 9.8 (N)
• 1 (N) » 0.102 (kgf)
J (kg·m2)
:moment of inertia
GD2 (kg·m2)
:flywheel effect
• GD2 = 4 J
(2) Torque
• 1 (kgf·m) » 9.8 (N·m)
• 1 (N·m) » 0.102 (kgf·m)
• J = GD
2
4
(7) Pressure and stress
(3) Work and Energy
• 1 (mmAq) » 9.8 (Pa) » 9.8 (N/m2)
• 1(Pa) » 1(N/m2) » 0.102 (mmAq)
• 1 (bar) » 100000 (Pa) » 1.02 (kg·cm2)
• 1 (kg·cm2) » 98000 (Pa) » 980 (mbar)
• 1 atmospheric pressure = 1013 (mbar)
• 1 (kgf·m) » 9.8 (N·m) = 9.8(J) =
9.8 (W·s)
(4) Power
• 1 (kgf·m/s) » 9.8 (N·m/s) = 9.8 (J/s)
= 760 (mmHg) = 101300 (Pa)
» 1.033 (kg/cm2)
= 9.8(W)
• 1 (N·m/s) » 1 (J/s) = 1 (W)
» 0.102 (kgf·m/s)
(5) Rotation speed
2p
( rad / s) » 0.1047 (rad/s)
60
60
• 1 (rad / s) =
(r/min) » 9.549 (r/min)
2p
• 1 (r/min) =
App.
A-21
[2]
Calculation formula
(1) Torque, power, and rotation speed
2p
· N (r/min) · t (N · m)
60
• P ( W ) » 1.026 · N (r/min) · T (kgf · m)
• P (W) »
P (W)
N (r/min)
P (W)
• T (kgf · m) » 0.974 ·
N (r/min)
(4) Acceleration torque
Driving mode
J (kg · m2) DN ( r / min)
·
9.55
Dt (s) · hG
2 ( kg · 2) DN ( r / min)
m ·
• T (kgf · m) » GD
375
Dt (s) · hG
• t (N · m) »
• t (N · m) » 9.55 ·
Braking mode
J ( kg · m2) DN (r / min) · hG
·
9.55
Dt (s)
2 ( kg · 2) DN ( r / min) · h
GD
m
G
·
• T (kgf · m) »
375
Dt (s)
• t (N · m) »
(2) Kinetic energy
• E (J ) »
1
2
· J ( kg · m2 ) · N 2 [(r/min) ]
182.4
• E (J) »
1
2
· GD2 ( kg · m2) · N 2 [(r/min) ]
730
(5) Acceleration time
J + J 2 / hG (kg · m2) DN (r / min)
·
9.55
t M - t L / hG ( N · m )
• t ACC (s) » 1
(3) Torque of linear moving load
Driving mode
• t (N · m) » 0.159 ·
• t ACC (s) »
V (m / min)
· F ( N)
N M (r/min) · hG
• T (kgf · m) » 0.159 ·
V ( m / min)
· F (kgf )
N M (r/min) · hG
(6) Deceleration time
J + J 2 · hG (kg · m2)
• t DEC (s) » 1
tM - tL · hG ( N · m)
Braking mode
• t (N · m) » 0.159 ·
• t DEC (s) »
V (m / min)
· F ( N)
N M (r/min) / hG
• T (kgf · m) » 0.159 ·
GD12 + GD 2 2 / hG (kg · m2) DN (r / min)
·
375
T M - T L / hG (kgf · m)
V ( m / min)
· F ( kgf )
N M (r/min) / hG
A-22
·
DN (r / min)
9.55
GD12 + GD 2 2 · hG (kg · m2)
T M - T L · hG (kgf · m)
·
DN (r / min)
375
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
App.F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires, HIV wires, and 600 V class of cross-linked
polyethylene-insulated wires.
n IV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 60°C)
Table F.1 (a) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Wiring outside duct
Allowable current
Wire size
2
(mm )
Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
reference value
35°C
40°C
45°C
50°C
55°C
35°C
40°C
45°C
50°C
(up to 30°C)
(Io×0.91)
(Io×0.82)
(Io×0.71)
(Io×0.58)
(Io×0.40)
(Io×0.63)
(Io×0.57)
(Io×0.49)
(Io×0.40)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
27
24
22
19
15
11
17
15
13
10
3.5
37
33
30
26
21
15
23
21
18
14
5.5
49
44
40
34
28
20
30
27
24
19
8.0
61
55
50
43
35
25
38
34
29
24
14
88
80
72
62
51
36
55
50
43
35
22
115
104
94
81
66
47
72
65
56
46
38
162
147
132
115
93
66
102
92
79
64
60
217
197
177
154
125
88
136
123
106
86
100
298
271
244
211
172
122
187
169
146
119
150
395
359
323
280
229
161
248
225
193
158
200
469
426
384
332
272
192
295
267
229
187
250
556
505
455
394
322
227
350
316
272
222
325
650
591
533
461
377
266
409
370
318
260
400
745
677
610
528
432
305
469
424
365
298
500
842
766
690
597
488
345
530
479
412
336
2 x 100
497
452
407
352
288
203
313
283
243
198
2 x 150
658
598
539
467
381
269
414
375
322
263
2 x 200
782
711
641
555
453
320
492
445
383
312
2 x 250
927
843
760
658
537
380
584
528
454
370
2 x 325
1083
985
888
768
628
444
682
617
530
433
2 x 400
1242
1130
1018
881
720
509
782
707
608
496
2 x 500
1403
1276
1150
996
813
575
883
799
687
561
n HIV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 75°C)
Table F.1 (b) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Wiring outside duct
Allowable current
Wire size
2
(mm )
Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
reference value
35°C
40°C
45°C
50°C
55°C
35°C
40°C
45°C
50°C
(up to 30°C)
(Io×0.91)
(Io×0.82)
(Io×0.71)
(Io×0.58)
(Io×0.40)
(Io×0.63)
(Io×0.57)
(Io×0.49)
(Io×0.40)
Io (A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
2.0
32
31
29
27
24
22
21
20
18
17
3.5
45
42
39
37
33
30
29
27
25
23
5.5
59
56
52
49
44
40
39
36
34
30
8.0
74
70
65
61
55
50
48
45
42
38
14
107
101
95
88
80
72
70
66
61
55
22
140
132
124
115
104
94
92
86
80
72
38
197
186
174
162
147
132
129
121
113
102
60
264
249
234
217
197
177
173
162
151
136
100
363
342
321
298
271
244
238
223
208
187
150
481
454
426
395
359
323
316
296
276
248
200
572
539
506
469
426
384
375
351
328
295
250
678
639
600
556
505
455
444
417
389
350
325
793
747
702
650
591
533
520
487
455
409
400
908
856
804
745
677
610
596
558
521
469
500
1027
968
909
842
766
690
673
631
589
530
2 x 100
606
571
536
497
452
407
397
372
347
313
2 x 150
802
756
710
658
598
539
526
493
460
414
2 x 200
954
899
844
782
711
641
625
586
547
492
2 x 250
1130
1066
1001
927
843
760
741
695
648
584
2 x 325
1321
1245
1169
1083
985
888
866
812
758
682
2 x 400
1515
1428
1341
1242
1130
1018
993
931
869
782
2 x 500
1711
1613
1515
1403
1276
1150
1122
1052
982
883
A-23
App.
Io (A)
2.0
n 600 V class of Cross-linked Polyethylene-insulated wires (Maximum allowable
temperature: 90°C)
Table F.1 (c) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Wiring outside duct
Allowable current
Wire size
2
(mm )
Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
reference value
35°C
40°C
45°C
50°C
55°C
35°C
40°C
45°C
50°C
(up to 30°C)
(Io×0.91)
(Io×0.82)
(Io×0.71)
(Io×0.58)
(Io×0.40)
(Io×0.63)
(Io×0.57)
(Io×0.49)
(Io×0.40)
Io (A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
2.0
38
36
34
32
31
29
25
24
22
21
3.5
52
49
47
45
42
39
34
33
31
29
5.5
69
66
63
59
56
52
46
44
41
39
8.0
86
82
78
74
70
65
57
54
51
48
14
124
118
113
107
101
95
82
79
74
70
22
162
155
148
140
132
124
108
103
97
92
38
228
218
208
197
186
174
152
145
137
129
60
305
292
279
264
249
234
203
195
184
173
100
420
402
384
363
342
321
280
268
253
238
150
556
533
509
481
454
426
371
355
335
316
200
661
633
605
572
539
506
440
422
398
375
250
783
750
717
678
639
600
522
500
472
444
325
916
877
838
793
747
702
611
585
552
520
400
1050
1005
961
908
856
804
700
670
633
596
500
1187
1136
1086
1027
968
909
791
757
715
673
2 x 100
700
670
641
606
571
536
467
447
422
397
2 x 150
927
888
848
802
756
710
618
592
559
526
2 x 200
1102
1055
1008
954
899
844
735
703
664
625
2 x 250
1307
1251
1195
1130
1066
1001
871
834
787
741
2 x 325
1527
1462
1397
1321
1245
1169
1018
974
920
866
2 x 400
1751
1676
1602
1515
1428
1341
1167
1117
1055
993
2 x 500
1978
1894
1809
1711
1613
1515
1318
1262
1192
1122
A-24
App. G Replacement Information
App.G Replacement Information
When replacing Fuji conventional inverter series (FVR-C9S, FVR-C11S) with the FRENIC-Mini
series, refer to the replacement information given in this section.
G.1 External dimensions comparison tables
Below is a guide that helps in using the comparison tables on the following pages.
- Mounting area
/Mini (%)
Allows comparing the mounting area required for the FRENIC-Mini series
with that for the conventional inverter series in percentage, assuming the
area for the FRENIC-Mini series to be 100%. If this value is greater than
100%, it means that the mounting area required for the FRENIC-Mini series
is smaller than that of other series.
- Volume/Mini (%)
Allows comparing the volume of the FRENIC-Mini series with that of the
conventional inverter series in percentage, assuming the volume of the
FRENIC-Mini series to be 100%. If this value is greater than 100%, it means
that the volume of the FRENIC-Mini is smaller than that of other series.
- In the FRENIC-Mini columns, dimensions in hatched boxes (
than those of FVR-C9S and FVR-C11S series.
) denote that they are smaller
- In the FVR-C11S and FVR-C9S columns, underlined and bolded dimensions denote that they are
smaller than those of the FRENIC-Mini series.
App.
A-25
G.1.1
Standard models
FVR-C9S vs. FRENIC-Mini
FVR-C9S (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
ApplicPower able
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
FRENIC-Mini (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
External dimensions (mm)
Mounting area
W
H
D
D1
D2
m
-2
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
m
-3
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
W
H
D
D1
D2
0.1
80
120
60
50
10
1.0
100.0
0.6
75.0
80
120
80
70
0.2
80
120
65
50
15
1.0
100.0
0.6
81.3
80
120
80
70
2
Volume
3
External dimensions (mm)
Mounting area
Volume
2
3
10
1.0
0.8
10
1.0
0.8
m
m
-2
-3
(x10 ) (x10 )
0.4
80
120
75
50
25
1.0
100.0
0.7
78.9
80
120
95
70
25
1.0
0.9
phase 0.75
80
120
100
50
50
1.0
100.0
1.0
83.3
80
120
120
70
50
1.0
1.2
200 V
1.5
110
130
130
65
65
1.4
100.0
1.9
93.5
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
2.2
110
130
140
75
65
1.4
100.0
2.0
100.7
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
3.7, 4.0 140
180
138
65
73
2.5
100.0
3.5
99.3
140
180
139
75
64
2.5
3.5
0.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
115
75
40
1.4
1.6
0.75
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
phase 1.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
400 V
2.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
3.7, 4.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140
180
139
75
64
2.5
3.5
0.1
80
120 85.5 75.5
10
1.0
100.0
0.8
106.9
80
120
80
70
10
1.0
0.8
0.2
80
120 90.5 75.5
15
1.0
100.0
0.9
113.1
80
120
80
70
10
1.0
0.8
3-
3-
1phase
200 V
0.4
80
120 100.5 75.5
25
1.0
100.0
1.0
105.8
80
120
95
70
25
1.0
0.9
0.75
80
120 140.5 90.5
50
1.0
100.0
1.3
100.4
80
120
140
90
50
1.0
1.3
1.5
110
130 140.5 75.5
65
1.4
100.0
2.0
94.3
110
130
149
85
64
1.4
2.1
2.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140
180
139
75
64
2.5
3.5
–
–
FVR-C11S vs. FRENIC-Mini
FVR-C11S (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
ApplicPower able
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
External dimensions (mm)
Mounting area
W
2
FRENIC-Mini (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
Volume
3
External dimensions (mm)
Mounting area
Volume
2
3
1.0
0.8
m
m
-2
-3
(x10 ) (x10 )
H
D
D1
D2
m
-2
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
m
-3
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
W
H
D
D1
D2
0.1
80 120
80
70
10
1.0
100.0
0.8
100.0
80
120
80
70
10
0.2
80 120
85
70
15
1.0
100.0
0.8
106.3
80
120
80
70
10
1.0
0.8
0.4
80 120
95
70
25
1.0
100.0
0.9
100.0
80
120
95
70
25
1.0
0.9
phase 0.75
80 120
120
70
50
1.0
100.0
1.2
100.0
80
120
120
70
50
1.0
1.2
200 V
1.5
110 130
139
75
64
1.4
100.0
2.0
100.0
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
2.2
110 130
139
75
64
1.4
100.0
2.0
100.0
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
3.7, 4.0 140 180
137
65
72
2.5
100.0
3.5
98.6
140
180
139
75
64
2.5
3.5
0.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
115
75
40
1.4
1.6
0.75
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
phase 1.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
400 V
2.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
130
139
75
64
1.4
2.0
3.7, 4.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140
180
139
75
64
2.5
3.5
0.1
80 120
80
70
10
1.0
100.0
0.8
100.0
80
120
80
70
10
1.0
0.8
0.2
80 120
85
70
15
1.0
100.0
0.8
106.3
80
120
80
70
10
1.0
0.8
3-
3-
1phase
200 V
0.4
80 120
115
90
25
1.0
100.0
1.1
121.1
80
120
95
70
25
1.0
0.9
0.75
80 120
140
90
50
1.0
100.0
1.3
100.0
80
120
140
90
50
1.0
1.3
1.5
110 130
149
85
64
1.4
100.0
2.1
100.0
110
130
149
85
64
1.4
2.1
2.2
140 180
137
65
72
2.5
100.0
3.5
98.6
140
180
139
75
64
2.5
3.5
A-26
App. G Replacement Information
G.1.2
Models available on order
[ 1 ] EMC filter built-in type
In the European version, the EMC filter built-in type is provided as a standard model. In other
versions, it is available on order.
FVR-C9S vs. FRENIC-Mini
FVR-C9S (IP20)
(Standard unit wit a foot-mount filter)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
ApplicPower able
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
FRENIC-Mini (Planning values) (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
Mounting area
W
H
D
D1
D2
m
-2
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
m
-3
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
0.1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
phase 0.75
–
–
–
–
–
–
200 V
1.5
–
–
–
–
–
2.2
–
–
–
–
–
3.7, 4.0
–
–
–
–
0.4
–
–
–
0.75
–
–
–
phase 1.5
–
–
400 V
2.2
–
–
3.7, 4.0
–
–
0.1
0.2
0.4
3-
3-
1phase
200 V
2
Volume
3
External dimensions (mm)
Volume
2
3
1.0
1.0
m
m
-2
-3
(x10 ) (x10 )
H
D
D1
D2
–
80 120
100
90
10
–
–
80 120
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
–
–
80 120
115
90
25
1.0
1.1
–
–
–
80 120
140
90
50
1.0
1.3
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
110 130
158
118
40
1.4
2.3
–
–
–
–
–
–
110 130
182
118
64
1.4
2.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
85 170 120.5
–
–
1.4
150.5
1.7
181.4
80 120
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
85 170 125.5
–
–
1.4
150.5
1.8
188.9
80 120
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
85 170 135.5
–
–
1.4
150.5
2.0
177.4
80 120
115
90
25
1.0
1.1
0.75
85 170 175.5
–
–
1.4
101.0
2.5
127.6
110
130
139
99
40
1.4
2.0
1.5
115 180 175.5
–
–
2.1
82.1
3.6
79.2
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
2.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
–
–
W
Mounting area
Note: In the FRENIC-Mini columns, dimensions in bold boxes denote that they are greater than those of standard models.
A-27
App.
External dimensions (mm)
FVR-C11S vs. FRENIC-Mini
FVR-C11S (IP20)
(Standard unit wit a foot-mount filter)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
ApplicPower able
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
FRENIC-Mini (Planning values) (IP20)
(Ambient temperature: 50°C)
Mounting area
W
H
D
D1
D2
m
-2
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
m
-3
(x10 )
/Mini
(%)
0.1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
phase 0.75
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
80 120
140
90
50
1.0
1.3
200 V
1.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
2.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
3-
2
Volume
3
External dimensions (mm)
Mount-
External dimensions (mm)
W
ing area
Volume
2
3
1.0
1.0
m
m
-2
-3
(x10 ) (x10 )
H
D
D1
D2
–
80 120
100
90
10
–
–
80 120
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
–
–
80 120
115
90
25
1.0
1.1
3.7, 4.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
0.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110 130
158
118
40
1.4
2.3
0.75
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110 130
182
118
64
1.4
2.6
phase 1.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
400 V
2.2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
3.7, 4.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
0.1
86 170
117
–
–
1.5
152.3
1.7
178.2
80 120
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
0.2
86 170
122
–
–
1.5
152.3
1.8
185.8
80 120
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
0.4
86 170
152
–
–
1.5
152.3
2.2
201.3
80 120
115
90
25
1.0
1.1
0.75
200 V
1.5
86 170
177
–
–
1.5
102.2
2.6
130.2
110
130
139
99
40
1.4
2.0
116 180
192
–
–
2.1
82.9
4.0
87.4
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
2.2
148 230
183
–
–
3.4
135.1
6.2
135.8
140 180
182
118
64
2.5
4.6
3-
1phase
Note: In the FRENIC-Mini columns, dimensions in bold boxes denote that they are greater than those of standard models.
[ 2 ] Baking resistor built-in type
This model has the same dimensions as standard models listed in Section G.1.1.
A-28
App. G Replacement Information
G.2 Terminal arrangements and symbols
This section shows the difference in the terminal arrangements and their symbols between the
FRENIC-Mini series and the replaceable inverter series.
When replacing the conventional series with the FRENIC-Mini series, be careful with the wiring
direction that may also differ depending upon models
FVR-C9S vs. FRENIC-Mini
App.
A-29
FVR-C11S vs. FRENIC-Mini
A-30
App. G Replacement Information
G.3 Function codes
This section describes the replacement information related to function codes that are required when
replacing the conventional inverter series (e.g., FVR-C9S and FVR-C11S) with the FRENIC-Mini
series. It also provides the conversion table for the torque boost setting.
FVR-C9S vs. FRENIC-Mini
FVR-C9S
Function
Name
code
F00
Data protection
F01
Frequency command
F02
Operation method
F03
Maximum frequency
F04
Base frequency
F05
Acceleration time
F06
Deceleration time
F07
Torque boost
FRENIC-Mini
Function
Name
code
F00
Data Protection
F01
Frequency Command Source 1
F02
RUN Command Source
F03
Maximum Frequency
F04
Base Frequency
F07
Acceleration Time 1
F08
Deceleration Time 1
F09
Torque Boost
F37
F08
Electronic thermal overload relay
(Select)
F10
F09
Electronic thermal overload relay
(Level)
F11
F12
F10
F11
Restart mode after momentary
power failure (Select)
Frequency setting gain
F14
C32
C34
Restart after Instantaneous Power
Failure
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain for
terminal input [12]) (Gain)
H03
H04
H05
Data Initialization (Data reset)
Retry (No. of retries)
Retry (Latency time)
Jump frequency width
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 3
Peak frequency
Bottom frequency
THR terminal function
C04
C01
C02
C03
F15
F16
E01
Jump Frequency Band
Jump Frequency 1
Jump Frequency 2
Jump Frequency 3
Frequency Limiter (High)
Frequency Limiter (Low)
X1 Terminal Function
F28
BX terminal function
E02
X2 Terminal Function
F29
F30
F31
F32
Multistep frequency setting 1
Multistep frequency setting 2
Multistep frequency setting 3
FM terminal (Voltage adjustment)
C05
C06
C07
F30
F33
FM terminal (Select)
F31
Multistep Frequency Settings 1
Multistep Frequency Settings 2
Multistep Frequency Settings 3
Terminal [FMA] (Gain to output
voltage)
Terminal [FMA] (Monitor object)
F18
C50
F12
F13
DC brake (Braking current)
DC brake (Braking time)
F14
F15
Starting frequency
Motor sound
F16
Alarm history
F17
F18
Data initializing
Auto-reset
F19
Motor Characteristics
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F27
A-31
F10=0/F10=1 is equivalent to F14=1/F14=4.
Analog input is applied to [12] so that the gain
for set frequency is equal to the gain for [12].
Setting differs each other. Refer to Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES" for details.
App.
F21
F22
F20
F23
F26
Bias frequency
The data implements other function.
For details, refer to the torque boost setting
conversion table on page A-33.
Select the reduced/constant torque using F37.
Load Selection/Auto Torque
Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation
Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Select "Disable" using F11 (= 0.00) instead of
Protection (Select motor
F10.
characteristics)
Electronic Thermal Motor Overload
Protection (Overload detection
current)
Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Set the data at 1.0min.
Protection (Thermal time constant)
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain for
terminal input [12]) (Gain reference
point)
Bias (for Frequency Command 1,
F01)
Bias (Frequency command 1)
(Bias reference point)
DC Braking (Braking level)
DC Braking (Braking time)
DC Braking (Start frequency)
Start Frequency
Motor Sound (Carrier frequency)
F26
Remarks
Set at 3 Hz.
F15=0 to 5 sets the carrier frequency at 2.5 to
15kHz equivalently. Check the motor sound and
select the frequency correctly.
Check the alarm information from the keypad.
Refer to Chapter 3 for details.
When the retry is enabled (F18=1), set
H04=5/H05=0.5s.
No function code with same feature. No setting
required.
Assign (THR) to the terminal [X1].
If F27=0, set E01=9, if F27=1, set E01=0.
Assign (BX) to the terminal [X2].
If F28=0, set E02=7, if F28=1, set E02=1.
The data has different feature each other.
Readjust the meter.
When selecting the output frequency (F33=0),
set F31=0. If the output current (F33=1),set F31=
2.
FVR-C11S vs. FRENIC-Mini
FVR-C11S
Function
Name
code
F00
Data protection
F01
Frequency command
F02
Operation method
F03
Maximum frequency
F04
Base frequency
F07
Acceleration time
F08
Deceleration time
F09
Torque boost
FRENIC-Mini
Function
Name
code
F00
Data Protection
F01
Frequency Command Source 1
F02
RUN Command Source
F03
Maximum Frequency
F04
Base Frequency
F07
Acceleration Time 1
F08
Deceleration Time 1
F09
Torque Boost
F37
F10
Electronic thermal overload relay
(Select)
F10
F11
Electronic thermal overload relay
(Level)
F11
F12
Electronic thermal overload relay
F12
F14
Restart mode after momentary
power failure (Select)
Frequency limiter (Peak)
Frequency limiter (Bottom)
Gain (Frequency setting)
F14
F15
F16
F17
F15
F16
C32
C34
F18
Bias frequency
F18
C50
Remarks
The data implements other function.
For details, refer to the torque boost setting
conversion table on page A-33.
Select the reduced/constant torque using F37.
Load Selection/Auto Torque
Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation
Electronic Thermal Motor Overload Select "Disable" using F11 (= 0.00) instead of
Protection (Select motor
F10.
characteristics)
Electronic Thermal Motor Overload
Protection (Overload detection
current)
Electronic Thermal Motor Overload
Protection (Thermal time constant)
Restart after Instantaneous Power
Failure
Frequency Limiter (High)
Frequency Limiter (Low)
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain for
terminal input [12]) (Gain)
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain for
terminal input [12]) (Gain reference
point)
Bias (for Frequency Command 1,
F01)
Bias (Frequency command 1)
(Bias reference point)
DC Braking (Start frequency)
DC Braking (Braking level)
DC Braking (Braking time)
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Motor Sound (Carrier frequency)
Motor Sound (Sound tone)
Terminal [FMA] (Gain to output
voltage)
Terminal [FMA] (Monitor object)
F20
F21
F22
F23
F25
F26
F27
F30
DC brake (Starting freq.)
DC brake (Braking level)
DC brake (Braking time)
Starting frequency
Stop frequency
Motor sound (Carrier freq.)
Motor sound (Sound tone)
FM terminal (Voltage adjustment)
F20
F21
F22
F23
F25
F26
F27
F30
F31
FM terminal (Select)
F31
F36
30Ry operation mode
E27
E01
E02
E03
X1 terminal function (Select)
X2 terminal function (Select)
X3 terminal function (Select)
E01
E02
E03
[30A/B/C] Terminal Function
(Mechanical relay contacts)
X1 Terminal Function
X2 Terminal Function
X3 Terminal Function
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06
C07
P00
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 3
Jump frequency (Hysteresis)
Multistep frequency setting 1
Multistep frequency setting 2
Multistep frequency setting 3
Motor Characteristics
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06
C07
Jump Frequency 1
Jump Frequency 2
Jump Frequency 3
Jump Frequency Band
Multistep Frequency Settings 1
Multistep Frequency Settings 2
Multistep Frequency Settings 3
H01
Operation time
H02
Trip history
H03
H04
Data initializing
Auto-reset (Times)
Replace the data of FVR-C11S from 2 to 4 of
FRENIC-Mini and from 3 to 5.
Analog input is applied to [12] so that the gain
for set frequency is equal to the gain for [12].
Setting differs each other. Refer to Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES" for details.
Set at 3 Hz.
The selection for the data differs each other. For
details refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES."
If F36=0, set E27=99, if F36=1, set E27=1099.
The selection for the data differs each other. For
details refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES."
No function code with same feature. No setting
required.
Check the alarm information from the keypad.
Refer to Chapter 3 for details.
Check the alarm information from the keypad.
Refer to Chapter 3 for details.
H03
H04
Data Initialization (Data reset)
Retry (No. of retries)
H05
Retry (Latency time)
A-32
If the retry is disabled, set 0. If enabled, set
5times.
App. G Replacement Information
FVR-C11S
FRENIC-Mini
Function
Name
code
H06
Cooling Fan ON/OFF
J01
PID Control
E61
Terminal [12] (Function selection)
Function
Name
code
H06
Fan stop operation
H20
PID control (Select)
H21
PID control
(Feedback signal select)
E62
Terminal [C1](Function selection)
C32
Analog Input Adjustment (Gain for
terminal input [12]) (Gain)
H22
H23
H24
H25
o00
PID control P (gain)
PID control I (Integration time)
PID control D (Differentiation time)
PID control (Feedback filter)
Option select (RS485)
J03
J04
J05
J06
y10
PID control P (gain)
PID control I (Integration time)
PID control D (Differentiation time)
PID control (Feedback filter)
RS485 (Protocol selection)
o01
o02
Station address
Mode select on no response error
y01
y02
o03
o04
o05
o06
o07
o08
Timer
Baud rate
Data length
Parity check
Stop bits
No response error detection time
y03
y04
y05
y06
y07
y08
o09
o10
Response interval
RS485 command select
(Frequency setting)
RS485 command select
(Running command)
y09
H30
RS485 (Station address)
RS485
(Mode selection on no response
error)
RS485 (Timer)
RS485 (Transmission speed)
RS485 (Data length)
RS485 (Parity check)
RS485 (Stop bits)
RS485
(No response error detection time)
RS485 (Response interval)
Communications Link
(Function selection)
o11
Remarks
To select the [12] as the feedback set the data of
5.
To select the [C1] as the feedback set the data of
5.
When the frequency is commanded in 1-5V,
select the [12] and set the C32 (analog input
gain) for 200%. Use it as 0-5V range.
Select 2 (Fuji general-purpose protocol).
1200 bps is not supported.
For details of the data compatibility, refer to
Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES."
Conversion Table for Setting Torque Boost
Inverter
Series Name
Func. Codes
FRENIC-Mini
F09
F37
0
0
None, Consult us.
0
1
0.2
1
0.8
1
1.5
1
2.3
1
3.1
1
3.9
1
4.7
1
5.5
1
6.3
1
7.2
1
8
1
8.9
1
9.8
1
10.6
1
11.5
1
12.5
1
13.2
1
14.1
1
15
1
15.8
1
16.7
1
17.5
1
18.3
1
19.2
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
20
1
A-33
App.
Data
FVR-C9S
FVR-C11S
F09
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Glossary
This glossary explains the technical terms that are frequently used in this manual.
Glossary
Acceleration time
Automatic energy saving operation
Period required when an inverter accelerates its
output from 0 Hz to the output frequency.
Related function codes: F03, F07, E10, and H54
Energy saving operation that automatically drives
the motor with lower output voltage when the motor
load has been light, for minimizing the product of
voltage and current (electric power).
Related function code: F37
Alarm mode
One of the three operation modes supported by the
inverter. If the inverter detects any malfunction,
error, or fault in its operation, it immediately shuts
down or trips the output to the motor and enters this
mode in which corresponding alarm codes are
displayed on the LED monitor.
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) control
A control that keeps an output voltage constant
regardless to variations of the input source voltage
or load.
Base frequency
Alarm output (for any faults)
A mechanical contact output signal that is generated
when the inverter is halted by an alarm, by shortcircuiting between terminals [30A] and [30C].
Related function code: E27
See Alarm mode.
Analog input
An external voltage or current input signal to give
the inverter the frequency command. The analog
voltage is applied on the terminal [11], the current
on the [C1]. These terminals are also used to input
the signal from the external potentiometer, PTC and
PID feedback signals depending on the function
code definition.
Related function codes: F01, C30, E60 to E62 and
J02
The minimum frequency at which an inverter
delivers a constant voltage in the output V/f pattern.
Related function code: F04
Bias
A value to be added to an analog input frequency to
modify and produce the output frequency.
Related function codes: F18, C50 to C52
Braking torque
Analog output
Applicable motor rating
Rated output (in kW) of a general-purpose motor
that is used as a standard motor listed in tables in
Chapter
6,
"SELECTING
PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT" and Chapter 8, "SPECIFICATIONS."
Automatic deceleration
A control mode in which deceleration time is
automatically extended up to 3 times of the
commanded time to prevent the inverter from
tripping due to an overvoltage caused by
regenerative power even if a braking resistor is
used.
Related function code: H69
G-1
Glossary
Torque that acts in a direction that will stop a
rotating motor (or the force required to stop a
running motor).
An analog DC output signal of the monitored data
such as the output frequency, the current and
voltage inside an inverter. The signal drive an
analog meter installed outside the inverter for
indicating the current inverter running status.
Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.4.1 "Terminal
functions."
If a deceleration time is shorter than the natural
stopping time (coast-to-stop) determined by a
moment of inertia for a load machine, then the
motor works as a generator when it decelerates,
causing the kinetic energy of the load to be
converted to electrical energy that is returned to the
inverter from the motor. If this power (regenerative
power) is consumed or accumulated by the inverter,
the motor generates a braking force called "braking
torque."
Constant torque load
A constant torque load is characterized by:
1) A requirement for an essentially constant torque,
regardless of the r/min
2) A power requirement that decreases in
proportion to the r/min
Related function code: F37
Applications: Conveyors, elevators, and transport
machines
Carrier frequency
Frequency used to modulate a modulated frequency
to establish the modulation period of a pulse width
under the PWM control system. The higher the
carrier frequency, the closer the inverter output
current approaches a sinusoidal waveform and the
quieter the motor becomes.
Related function code: F26
Coast-to-stop
If the inverter stops its output when the motor is
running, the motor will coast to a stop due to inertial
force.
Control circuit terminals
Terminals on the inverter, which are used for
input/output of signals to control or manage the
inverter/external equipment directly or indirectly
Communications link function
A feature to control an inverter from external
equipment serially linked to the inverter such as a
PC or PLC.
Related function code: H30
Current limiter
Constant feeding rate time
Cursor
Time required for an object to move in a constant
distance previously defined. The faster speed, the
shorter time and vise versa. This facility may be
applied to a chemical process that determines a
processing time of materials as the speed such as
heating, cooling, drying, or doping in some
constant-speed machinery.
Related function codes: E39 and E50.
Marker blinking on the four-digit, 7-segment LED
monitor which shows that data in the blinking digit
can be changed/modified by keying operation.
A device that keeps an inverter output frequency
within the specified current limit.
Curvilinear V/f pattern
A generic name for the inverter output patterns with
curvilinear relation between the frequency and
voltage.
Refer to function code H07 in Chapter 9, Section
9.2.5 "H codes."
Constant output load
A constant output load is characterized by:
1) The required torque is in inverse proportion to
the load r/min
2) An essentially constant power requirement
Related function code: F37
Applications: Machine tool spindles
DC braking (DC injection braking)
DC current braking that an inverter injects into the
motor to brake and stop it against the moment of
inertia of the motor or its load. The inertial energy
generated is consumed as heat in the motor.
If a motor having the load with large moment of
inertia is going to stop abruptly, the moment of
inertia may force to rotate the motor after the
inverter output frequency has been reduced to 0 Hz.
Use DC injection braking to stop the motor
completely.
Related function codes: F20 and F21
G-2
Glossary
DC link bus voltage
Frequency resolution
Voltage at the DC link bus that is the end stage of
the converter part of inverters. The part rectifies the
input AC power to charge the DC link bus
capacitor/s as the DC power to be inverted to AC
power.
The minimum step, or increment, in which output
frequency is varied, rather than continuously.
Function code
Code to customize the inverter. Setting function
codes realizes the potential capability of the inverter
to meet it for the individual power system
applications.
Deceleration time
Period during which an inverter slows its output
frequency down from the maximum to 0 Hz.
Related function codes: F03, F08, E11, and H54
Gain (for frequency setting)
A frequency setting gain enables varying the slope
of the output of the frequency set with an analog
input signal.
Related function codes: C32, C34, C37, and C39
Digital input
Input signals given to the programmable input
terminals or the programmable input terminals
themselves. A command assigned to the digital
input is called the terminal command to control the
inverter externally.
Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.4.1 "Terminal
functions."
IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
Stands for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor that
enables the inverter section to switch high
voltage/current DC power in very high speed and to
output pulse train.
Electronic thermal overload protection
Interphase unbalance
Electronic thermal overload protection to issue an
early warning of the motor overheating to safeguard
a motor.
An inverter calculates the motor overheat condition
based on the internal data (given by function code
P99 about the properties of the motor) and the
driving conditions such as the drive current, voltage
and frequency.
A condition of an AC input voltage (supply voltage)
that states the voltage balance of each phase in an
expression as:
Interphase voltage unbalance (%)
=
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
´ 67
3 - phase average voltage (V)
External potentiometer
Inverse mode operation
Fan stop operation
A mode of operation in which the output frequency
lowers as the analog input signal level rises.
A mode of control in which the cooling fan is shut
down if the internal temperature in the inverter is
low and when no operation command is issued.
Related function code: H06
Jogging operation
Frequency accuracy (stability)
A special operation mode of inverters, in which a
motor jogs forward or reverse for a short time at a
slower speed than usual operating modes.
Related function codes: F03, C20, and H54
The percentage of variations in output frequency to
a predefined maximum frequency.
Jump frequencies
Frequencies that have a certain output with no
change in the output frequency within the specified
frequency band in order to skip the resonance
frequency band of a machine.
Related function codes: C01 to C04
Frequency limiter
Frequency limiter used inside the inverter to control
the internal drive frequency in order to keep the
motor speed within the specified level between the
peak and bottom frequencies.
Related function codes: F15, F16, and H64
Keypad operation
To use a keypad to run an inverter.
Line speed
Running speed of an object (e.g., conveyor) driven
by the motor. The unit is meter per minute, m/min.
G-3
Glossary
A potentiometer (optional) that is used to set
frequencies as well as built-in one.
Load shaft speed
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
Number of revolutions per minute (r/min) of a
rotating load driven by the motor, such as a fan.
thermistor
Type of thermistor with a positive temperature
coefficient. Used to safeguard a motor.
Related function codes: H26 and H27
Main circuit terminals
Power input/output terminals of an inverter, which
includes terminals to connect the power source,
motor, DC rector, braking resistor, and other power
components.
Rated capacity
The rating of an inverter output capacity (at the
secondary side), or the apparent power that is
represented by the rated output voltage times the
rated output current, which is calculated by solving
the following equation and is stated in kVA:
Maximum frequency
The output frequency commanded by the input of
the maximum value of a frequency setup signal (for
example, 10 V for a voltage input range of 0 to 10 V
or 20 mA for a current input range of 4 to 20 mA).
Related function code: F03
Rated capacity (kVA)
= 3 ´ Rated output voltage (V)
´ Rated output current (A) ´10 -3
The rated output voltage is assumed to be 220 V for
200 V class equipment and 440 V for 400 V class
equipment.
Modbus RTU
Communication protocol used in global FA
network market, which is developed by Modicon,
Inc. USA.
Rated output current
A total RMS equivalent to the current that flows
through the output terminal under the rated input
and output conditions (the output voltage, current,
frequency, and load factor meet their rated
conditions). Essentially, equipment rated at 200 V
covers the current of a 200 V, 50 Hz 6-pole motor
and equipment rated at 400 V covers the current of a
380 V, 50 Hz 4-pole motor.
Momentary voltage dip capability
The minimum voltage (V) and time (ms) that permit
continued rotation of the motor after a momentary
voltage drop (instantaneous power failure).
Multistep frequency selection
To preset frequencies (up to 7 stages), then select
them at some later time using external signals.
Related function codes: E01 to E03, C05 to C11
Rated output voltage
The overload current that an inverter can tolerate,
expressed as a percentage of the rated output
current and also as a permissible energization time.
A fundamental wave RMS equivalent to the voltage
that is generated across the output terminal when
the AC input voltage (supply voltage) and
frequency meet their rated conditions and the output
frequency of the inverter equals the base frequency.
PID control
Required power supply capacity
The scheme of control that brings controlled objects
to a desired value quickly and accurately, and which
consists of three categories of action: proportional,
integral and derivative.
Proportional action minimizes errors from a set
point. Integral action resets errors from a desired
value to 0. Derivative action applies a control value
in proportion to a differential component of the
difference between the PID reference and feedback
values. (See Chapter 4, Figure 4.7.)
Related function codes: E01 to E03, E40, E41, E43,
E60 to E62, C51, C52, J01 to J06
The capacity required of a power supply for an
inverter. This is calculated by solving either of the
following equations and is stated in kVA:
Overload capability
Required power supply capacity (kVA)
= 3 ´ 200 ´ Input RMS current (200V, 50Hz)
or
= 3 ´ 220 ´ Input RMS current (220V, 60Hz)
Required power supply capacity (kVA)
= 3 ´ 400 ´ Input RMS current (400V, 50Hz)
or
Programming mode
= 3 ´ 440 ´ Input RMS current (40V, 6 0Hz)
One of the three operation modes supported by the
inverter. This mode uses the menu-driven system
and allows the user to set function codes or check
the inverter status/maintenance information.
G-4
Glossary
Running mode
Thermal time constant
One of the three operation modes supported by the
inverter. If the inverter is turned ON, it
automatically enters this mode which you may:
run/stop the motor, set up the set frequency,
monitor the running status, and jog the motor.
The time needed to activate the electronic thermal
overload protection after the preset operation level
(current) continuously flows. This is an adjustable
function code data to meet the property of a motor
that is not manufactured by Fuji Electric.
Related function code: F12
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Torque boost
(weak/strong)
If a general-purpose motor is run with an inverter,
voltage drops will have a pronounced effect in a
low-frequency region, reducing the motor output
torque. In a low-frequency range, therefore, to
increase the motor output torque, it is necessary to
augment the output voltage. This process of voltage
compensation is called torque boost.
Related function code: F09
To reduce the impact on the inverter driven
machine during acceleration/deceleration, the
inverter gradually accelerates/decelerates the motor
at the both ends of the acceleration/deceleration
zones like a figure of S letter.
Related function code: H07
Slip compensation control
A mode of control in which the output frequency of
an inverter plus an amount of slip compensation is
used as an actual output frequency to compensate
for motor slippage.
Related function code: P09
Stall
A behavior of a motor when it loses speed by
tripping of the inverter due to overcurrent detection
or other malfunctions of the inverter.
Transistor output
Start frequency
A control signal that generates predefined data from
within an inverter via a transistor (open collector).
The minimum frequency at which an inverter starts
its output (not the frequency at which a motor starts
rotating).
Related function code: F23
Trip
Starting torque
Torque that a motor produces when it starts rotating
(or the drive torque with which the motor can run a
load).
V/f characteristic
A characteristic expression of the variations in
output voltage V (V), and relative to variations in
output frequency f (Hz). To achieve efficient motor
operation, an appropriate V/f (voltage/frequency)
characteristic helps a motor produce its output
torque matching the torque characteristics of a load.
Simultaneous keying
To simultaneously press the 2 keys on the keypad.
This presents the special function of inverters.
Stop frequency
The output frequency at which an inverter stops its
output.
Related function code: F25
G-5
Glossary
In response to an overvoltage, overcurrent, or any
other unusual condition, actuation of an inverter's
protective circuit to stop the inverter output.
V/f control
The rotating speed N (r/min) of a motor can be
stated in an expression as
N = 120 ´ f ´ (1 - s)
p
where,
f: Output frequency
p: Number of poles
s: Slippage
On the basis of this expression, varying the output
frequency varies the speed of the motor. However,
simply varying the output frequency f (Hz) would
result in an overheated motor or would not allow the
motor to demonstrate its optimum utility if the
output voltage V (V) remains constant. For this
reason, the output voltage V must be varied with the
output frequency f by using an inverter. This
scheme of control is called V/f control.
Variable torque load
A squared torque load is characterized by:
1) A change in the required torque in proportion to
the square of the number of revolutions per minute.
2) A power requirement that decreases in
proportion to the cube of the decrease in the number
of revolutions per minute.
Re quired power (kW )
Rotating speed (r / min) ´ Torque ( N · m)
=
9.55
Related function code: F37
Applications: Fans and pumps
Voltage and frequency variations
Variations in the input voltage or frequency within
permissible limits. Variations outside these limits
might cause an inverter or motor to fail.
G-6
Compact Inverter
User's Manual
First Edition, September 2002
Second Edition, March 2005
Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
The purpose of this manual is to provide accurate information in the handling, setting up and operating of
the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters. Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or
omissions you may have found, or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect
damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual.
USER'S MANUAL
Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
Mitsui Sumitomo Bank Ningyo-cho Bldg.,
5-7, Nihonbashi Odemma-cho, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 103-0011, Japan
Phone: +81-3-5847-8011 Fax: +81-3-5847-8172
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan 2005-3 (C05a/I02) CM 10 FIS
MEH446a
FRENIC Mini ユーザーズマニュアルC■M■Y■K■
">